FCC ID: MSQ8260NG Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 8260

Intel WiFi Adapter Information Guide Intel WiFi Adapter Information Guide This version of Intel PROSet/Wireless WiFi Software is compatible with the adapters listed below. However, note that newer features provided in this software release are generally not supported for older, legacy adapters. The following adapters are supported on this release for Windows* 8 and Windows* 8.1 with Windows* 7 drivers from Intel:

Intel Centrino Wireless-N 100 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 130 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 1000 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 1030 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6200 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6230 The following adapters are supported on this release for Windows* 8 with Windows* 8 drivers from Intel:

Intel Centrino Wireless-N 105 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 135 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 2200 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 2230 Intel Centrino Wireless-N + WiMAX 6150 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6205 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6235 Intel Centrino Advanced-N + WiMAX 6250 Intel Centrino Ultimate-N 6300 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 7260 Intel Dual Band Wireless-N 7260 Intel Wireless-N 7260 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 3160 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 7265 Intel Dual Band Wireless-N 7265 Intel Wireless-N 7265 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 8260 The following adapters are supported on this release for Windows* 8.1 with Windows* 8 drivers from Intel:

Intel Centrino Wireless-N 105 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 135 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 2200 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 2230 Intel Centrino Wireless-N + WiMAX 6150 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6205 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6235 Intel Centrino Advanced-N + WiMAX 6250 Intel Centrino Ultimate-N 6300 The following adapters are supported on this release for Windows* 8.1 with Windows* 8.1 drivers from Intel:

Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 7260 Intel Dual Band Wireless-N 7260 Intel Wireless-N 7260 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 3160 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 7265 Intel Dual Band Wireless-N 7265 Intel Wireless-N 7265 Intel Tri-Band Wireless-AC 17265 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 8260 With your WiFi network card, you can access WiFi networks, share files or printers, or even share your Internet index.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:47 PM]

Intel WiFi Adapter Information Guide connection. All of these features can be explored using a WiFi network in your home or office. This WiFi network solution is designed for both home and business use. Additional users and features can be added as your networking needs grow and change. This guide contains basic information about Intel adapters. It includes information about several adapter properties that you can set to control and enhance the performance of your adapter with your particular wireless network and environment. Intel wireless adapters enable fast connectivity without wires for desktop and notebook PCs. Adapter Settings Regulatory Information Specifications Important Information Support Warranty Glossary Depending on the model of your Intel WiFi adapter, your adapter is compatible with 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, and 802.11n (draft 2.0) wireless standards. Operating at 5GHz or 2.4GHz frequency at data rates of up to 450 Mbps, you can now connect your computer to existing high-speed networks that use multiple access points within large or small environments. Your WiFi adapter maintains automatic data rate control according to the access point location and signal strength to achieve the fastest possible connection. All of your wireless network connections are easily managed by the WiFi connection utility. Profiles that are set up through the WiFi connection utility provide enhanced security measures with 802.1X network authentication. Information in this document is subject to change without notice. 20042014 Intel Corporation. All rights reserved. Intel Corporation, 5200 N.E. Elam Young Parkway, Hillsboro, OR 97124-6497 USA The copying or reproducing of any material in this document in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Intel Corporation is strictly forbidden. Intel is a trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Intel disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Windows Vista is either a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

*Other names and brands may be claimed as the property of others. Intel Corporation assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions in this document. Nor does Intel make any commitment to update the information contained herein.

"IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR ALL USERS OR DISTRIBUTORS:

Intel wireless LAN adapters are engineered, manufactured, tested, and quality checked to ensure that they meet all necessary local and governmental regulatory agency requirements for the regions that they are designated and/or marked to ship into. Because wireless LANs are generally unlicensed devices that share spectrum with radars, satellites, and other licensed and unlicensed devices, it is sometimes necessary to dynamically detect, avoid, and limit usage to avoid interference with these devices. In many instances Intel is required to provide test data to prove regional and local compliance to regional and governmental regulations before certification or approval to use the product is granted. Intel's wireless LAN's EEPROM, firmware, and software driver are designed to carefully control parameters that affect radio operation and to ensure electromagnetic compliance (EMC). These parameters include, without limitation, RF power, spectrum usage, channel scanning, and human exposure. For these reasons Intel cannot permit any manipulation by third parties of the software provided in binary format with the wireless LAN adapters (e.g., the EEPROM and firmware). Furthermore, if you use any patches, utilities, or code with the Intel wireless LAN adapters that have been manipulated by an unauthorized party (i.e., patches, utilities, or code (including open source code modifications) which have not been validated by Intel), (i) you will be solely responsible for ensuring the regulatory compliance of the products, (ii) Intel will bear no liability, under any theory of liability for any issues associated with the modified products, including without limitation, claims under the warranty and/or issues arising from regulatory non-compliance, and (iii) Intel will not provide or be required to index.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:47 PM]

Intel WiFi Adapter Information Guide assist in providing support to any third parties for such modified products. Note: Many regulatory agencies consider Wireless LAN adapters to be "modules", and accordingly, condition system-

level regulatory approval upon receipt and review of test data documenting that the antennas and system configuration do not cause the EMC and radio operation to be non-compliant."

February 12, 2015 index.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:47 PM]

Adapter Settings Back to Contents Adapter Settings The Advanced tab displays the device properties for the WiFi adapter installed on your computer. How to Access At the Intel PROSet/Wireless WiFi Connection Utility, Advanced Menu click Adapter Settings. Select the Advanced tab. WiFi Adapter Settings Description Name 802.11ac Mode

(5GHz) 802.11n Channel Width

(2.4 GHz) Description The 802.11ac standard builds on 802.11n standard. 802.11ac Mode delivers up to 867Mbps

(theoretical) by increasing channel bandwidth to 80MHz and adding higher density modulation

(256 QAM). Select Enabled or Disabled to set the 802.11ac mode of the WiFi adapter. Enabled is the default setting. This setting applies to 802.11ac capable adapters only. Set high throughput channel width to maximize performance. Set the channel width to Auto or 20MHz. Use 20MHz if 802.11n channels are restricted. This setting applies to 802.11n capable adapters only. 802.11n Channel Width

(5.2 GHz) NOTE: This setting does not apply to the Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN (uses 20 MHz channel width only). Set high throughput channel width to maximize performance. Set the channel width to Auto or 20MHz. Use 20MHz if 802.11n channels are restricted. This setting applies to 802.11n capable adapters only. NOTE: This setting does not apply to the following adapters:

Intel WiFi Link 1000 Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AGN 802.11n Mode The 802.11n standard builds on previous 802.11 standards by adding multiple-input multiple-

output (MIMO). MIMO increases data throughput to improve transfer rate. Select Enabled or Disabled to set the 802.11n mode of the WiFi adapter. Enabled is the default setting. This setting applies to 802.11n capable adapters only. Ad Hoc Channel 802.11b/g Ad Hoc QoS Mode NOTE: To achieve transfer rates greater than 54 Mbps on 802.11n connections, WPA2*-AES security must be selected. No security (None) can be selected to enable network setup and troubleshooting. An administrator can enable or disable support for high throughput mode to reduce power-

consumption or conflicts with other bands or compatibility issues. Select Enabled or Disabled. Quality of Service (QoS) control in ad hoc networks. QoS provides prioritization of traffic from the access point over a wireless LAN based on traffic classification. WMM (Wi-Fi Multimedia) is the QoS certification of the Wi-Fi Alliance (WFA). When WMM is enabled, the WiFi adapter uses WMM to support priority tagging and queuing capabilities for Wi-Fi networks. WMM Enabled (Default) WMM Disabled Bluetooth Enable or disable Bluetooth AMP. AMP stands for alternate MAC/PHY and uses the 802.11 (Wi-

adaptusr.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:48 PM]

Adapter Settings AMP HT Mode/VHT Mode/Disabled Fat Channel Intolerant Fi) as the high-speed transport. If disabled, Bluetooth HS is turned off. This settings lets you select HT Mode (High Throughput mode), VHT Mode (Very High Throughput Mode) or to disable both modes. HT Mode supports 802.11n compatibility, whereas VHT Mode supports 802.11ac compatibility. This setting communicates to access points that this WiFi adapter does not prefer 40MHz channels in the 2.4GHz band. The default setting is for this to be turned off (disabled), so that the adapter does not send this notification. If the access point continues to use 40MHz channels, the WiFi adapter will also use 40MHz channels if the 802.11n Channel Width (2.4GHz) setting is AUTO. NOTE: This setting does not apply to the following adapters:

Intel Wireless WiFi Link 4965AG_ Intel PRO/Wireless 3945ABG Network Connection Mixed mode protection Use to avoid data collisions in a mixed 802.11b and 802.11g environment. Request to Send/Clear to Send (RTS/CTS) should be used in an environment where clients may not hear each other. CTS-to-self can be used to gain more throughput in an environment where clients are in close proximity and can hear each other. Preferred Band In an environment with other radiating devices nearby (such as microwave ovens, cordless telephones, access points, or client devices), in order to reduce interference you may prefer the 5GHz band over the 2.4GHz band, or vice-versa. Your choices are:

No Preference Prefer 2.4GHz band Prefer 5GHz band Here are the various Wi-Fi bands:

802.11 legacy - 2.4GHz 802.11a - 3.7GHz and 5GHz 802.11b - 2.4GHz 802.11g - 2.4GHz 802.11n - 2.4GHz and 5GHz 802.11ac - 5GHz 802.11ad - 60GHz Roaming Aggressiveness This setting lets you define how aggressively your wireless client roams to improve connection to an access point. There are five available settings. Transmit Power 3. Medium: This is the default. A balanced setting between not roaming and performance. 1. Lowest: Your wireless client will not roam. Only significant link quality degradation causes it to roam to another access point. 5. Highest: Your wireless client continuously tracks the link quality. If any degradation occurs, it tries to find and roam to a better access point. Default Setting: Highest power setting. Lowest: Minimum Coverage: Set the adapter to the lowest transmit power. Enables you to expand the number of coverage areas or confine a coverage area. Reduces the coverage area in high traffic areas to improve overall transmission quality and avoids congestion and interference with other devices. Highest: Maximum Coverage: Set the adapter to a maximum transmit power level. Select for maximum performance and range in environments with limited additional WiFi radio devices. NOTE: The optimal setting is for a user to always set the transmit power at the lowest possible level that is still compatible with the quality of their communication. This allows the maximum number of wireless devices to operate in dense areas and reduce interference with other devices that it shares the same radio spectrum with. adaptusr.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:48 PM]

Adapter Settings Wake on Magic Packet NOTE: This setting takes effect when either Network (Infrastructure) or Device to Device (ad hoc) mode is used. This setting, enabled, wakes the computer from a sleep state when it receives a "magic packet"

from a sending computer. The magic packet contains the MAC address of the intended destination computer. Wake on Pattern Match Enabling turns on Wake on Magic Packet. Disabling turns off Wake on Magic Packet. Disabling this only disables the magic packet feature, not Wake on Wireless LAN. This feature wakes the computer from a sleep state when a particular wake pattern is received at the adapter. This feature is supported by the Window* 7 and Windows 8. Such patterns typically are:

Wake on new incoming TCP connection for IPv4 and IPv6 (TCP SYN IPv4 and TCP SYN IPv6). Wake on 802.1x re-authentication packets. Disabling this only disables the pattern match feature, not Wake on Wireless LAN. Wireless Mode Select which mode to use for connection to a wireless network:

802.11a only: Connect the wireless WiFi adapter to 802.11a networks only. Not applicable for all adapters. 802.11b only: Connect the wireless WiFi adapter to 802.11b networks only. Not applicable for all adapters. 802.11g only: Connect the wireless WiFi adapter to 802.11g networks only. 802.11a and 802.11g: Connect the WiFi adapter to 802.11a and 802.11g networks only. Not applicable for all adapters. 802.11b and 802.11g: Connect the WiFi adapter to 802.11b and 802.11g networks only. Not applicable for all adapters. 802.11a, 802.11b, and 802.11g: (Default) - Connect to either 802.11a, 802.11b or 802.11g wireless networks. Not applicable for all adapters. OK Cancel Saves settings and returns to the previous page. Closes and cancels any changes. Back to Top Back to Contents Trademarks and Disclaimers adaptusr.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:48 PM]

Regulatory Information Back to Contents Regulatory Information This section provides regulatory information for the following wireless adapters:

Intel Centrino Wireless-N 100 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 105 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 130 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 135 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 1000 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 1030 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 2200 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 2230 Intel Centrino Wireless-N + WiMAX 6150 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6200 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6205 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6230 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6235 Intel Centrino Advanced-N + WiMAX 6250 Intel Centrino Ultimate-N 6300 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 7260 Intel Dual Band Wireless-N 7260 Intel Wireless-N 7260 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 3160 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 3165 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 7265 Intel Dual Band Wireless-N 7265 Intel Wireless-N 7265 Intel Tri-Band Wireless-AC 17265 Intel Wireless Gigabit Sink W13100 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 8260 NOTE: Due to the evolving state of regulations and standards in the wireless LAN field (IEEE 802.11 and similar standards), the information provided herein is subject to change. Intel Corporation assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions in this document. Intel WiFi/WiMAX Wireless Adapters Information in this section supports the following wireless adapters:

Intel Centrino Wireless-N + WiMAX 6150 Intel Centrino Advanced-N + WiMAX 6250 See Specifications for complete wireless adapter specifications. NOTE: In this section, all references to the "wireless adapter" refer to all adapters listed above. The following information is provided:

Information for the User Regulatory Information Information for OEMs and Host Integrators INFORMATION FOR THE USER Safety Notices regs.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:49 PM]

Regulatory Information USA FCC Radio Frequency Exposure The FCC with its action in ET Docket 96-8 has adopted a safety standard for human exposure to radio frequency (RF) electromagnetic energy emitted by FCC certified equipment. The wireless adapter meets the Human Exposure requirements found in FCC Part 2, 15C, 15E along with guidance from KDB 447498, KDB 248227 and KDB 616217. Proper operation of this radio according to the instructions found in this manual will result in exposure substantially below the FCCs recommended limits. The following safety precautions should be observed:

Do not touch or move antenna while the unit is transmitting or receiving. Do not hold any component containing the radio such that the antenna is very close or touching any exposed parts of the body, especially the face or eyes, while transmitting. Do not operate the radio or attempt to transmit data unless the antenna is connected; this behavior may cause damage to the radio. Use in specific environments:

The use of wireless adapters in hazardous locations is limited by the constraints posed by the safety directors of such environments. The use of electronic devices equipped with wireless adapters on airplanes is governed by rules for each commercial airline operator. The use of wireless adapters in hospitals is restricted to the limits set forth by each hospital. Explosive Device Proximity Warning Warning: Do not operate a portable transmitter (including this wireless adapter) near unshielded blasting caps or in an explosive environment unless the transmitter has been modified to be qualified for such use. Antenna Warnings Warning: The wireless adapter is not designed for use with high-gain directional antennas. Use On Aircraft Caution Caution: Regulations of commercial airline operators may prohibit airborne operation of certain electronic devices equipped with radio-frequency wireless devices (wireless adapters) because their signals could interfere with critical aircraft instruments. Caution: 60 GHz/802.11ad equipment is not permitted on aircraft per FCC 15.255. OEM and host integrators should consider this FCC rule in host devices. Other Wireless Devices Safety Notices for Other Devices in the Wireless Network: See the documentation supplied with wireless adapters or other devices in the wireless network. Local Restrictions on 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11d, 802.11g, 802.11n, 802.11ac, and 802.16e Radio Usage Caution: Due to the fact that the frequencies used by 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11d, 802.11g, 802.11n, 802.11ac, and 802.16e wireless LAN devices may not yet be harmonized in all countries, 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11d, 802.11g, 802.11n, 802.11ac, and 802.16e products are designed for use only in specific countries, and are not allowed to be operated in countries other than those of designated use. As a user of these products, you are responsible for ensuring that the products are used only in the countries for which they were intended and for verifying that they are configured with the correct selection of frequency and channel for the country of use. The device transmit power control (TPC) interface is part of the Intel PROSet/Wireless WiFi Connection Utility Software. Operational restrictions for Equivalent Isotropic Radiated Power (EIRP) are provided by the system manufacturer. Any deviation from the permissible power and frequency settings for the country of use is an infringement of national law and may be punished as such. regs.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:49 PM]

Regulatory Information Wireless Interoperability The wireless adapter is designed to be interoperable with other wireless LAN products that are based on direct sequence spread spectrum (DSSS) radio technology and to comply with the following standards:

IEEE Std. 802.11b compliant Standard on Wireless LAN IEEE Std. 802.11g compliant Standard on Wireless LAN IEEE Std. 802.11a compliant Standard on Wireless LAN IEEE Std. 802.11n draft 2.0 compliant on Wireless LAN IEEE 802.16e-2005 Wave 2 compliant Wireless Fidelity certification, as defined by the Wi-Fi Alliance WiMAX certification as defined by the WiMAX Forum The Wireless Adapter and Your Health The wireless adapter, like other radio devices, emits radio frequency electromagnetic energy. The level of energy emitted by the wireless adapter, however, is less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by other wireless devices such as mobile phones. The wireless adapter operates within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations. These standards and recommendations reflect the consensus of the scientific community and result from deliberations of panels and committees of scientists who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature. In some situations or environments, the use of the wireless adapter may be restricted by the proprietor of the building or responsible representatives of the applicable organization. Examples of such situations may include:

Using the wireless adapter on board airplanes, or Using the wireless adapter in any other environment where the risk of interference with other devices or services is perceived or identified as being harmful. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of wireless adapters in a specific organization or environment (an airport, for example), you are encouraged to ask for authorization to use the adapter before you turn it on. REGULATORY INFORMATION USA - Federal Communications Commission (FCC) This wireless adapter is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 and 5.470 to 5.75GHz frequency ranges. No configuration controls are provided for Intel wireless adapters allowing any change in the frequency of operations outside the FCC grant of authorization for U.S. operation according to Part 15.407 of the FCC rules. Intel wireless adapters are intended for OEM integrators only. Intel wireless adapters cannot be co-located with any other transmitter unless approved by the FCC. This wireless adapter complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation of the device is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation. Class B Device Interference Statement This wireless adapter has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This wireless adapter generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If the wireless adapter is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, the wireless adapter may cause harmful interference to radio communications. There is no guarantee, however, that such interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this wireless adapter does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception

(which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on), the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by taking one or more of the following measures:

regs.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:49 PM]

Regulatory Information Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna of the equipment experiencing the interference. Increase the distance between the wireless adapter and the equipment experiencing the interference. Connect the computer with the wireless adapter to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the equipment experiencing the interference is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. NOTE: The adapter must be installed and used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions as described in the user documentation that comes with the product. Any other installation or use will violate FCC Part 15 regulations. Safety Approval Considerations This device has been safety approved as a component and is for use only in complete equipment where the acceptability of the combination is determined by the appropriate safety agencies. When installed, consideration must be given to the following:

It must be installed into a compliant host device meeting the requirement of UL/EN/IEC 60950-1 2nd edition including the general provisions of enclosure design 1.6.2 and specifically paragraph 1.2.6.2 (Fire Enclosure). The device shall be supplied by a SELV source when installed in the end-use equipment. A heating test shall be considered in the end-use product for meeting the requirement of UL/EN/IEC 60950-1 2nd edition. Low Halogen Applies only to brominated and chlorinated flame retardants (BFRs/CFRs) and PVC in the final product. Intel components as well as purchased components on the finished assembly meet JS-709 requirements, and the PCB /

substrate meet IEC 61249-2-21 requirements. The replacement of halogenated flame retardants and/or PVC may not be better for the environment. Japan 5GHz Korea

. 5150-5250MHz . Mexico La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. Taiwan regs.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:49 PM]

Regulatory Information 5.25-5.35 Radio Approvals To determine whether you are allowed to use your wireless network device in a specific country, please check to see if the radio type number that is printed on the identification label of your device is listed in the manufacturer's OEM Regulatory Guidance document. Modular Regulatory Certification Country Markings A list of countries requiring regulatory markings is available. Note that the lists include only countries requiring marking but not all certified countries. To find the regulatory country marking information for your adapter, perform these steps:

1. Open this web site: http://www.intel.com/support/wireless/wlan/

2. Click on the link for your adapter. 3. Click Document and Guides. 4. Under Regulatory Information, click Regulatory documents for your adapter. Regulatory ID Due to the very small size of the 7265D2W (12x16), the marking has been placed in this user manual because the product label on the device is considered too small to be readable. USA: Model 7265D2W, FCC ID: PD97265D2 Canada: Model 7265D2W, IC: 1000M-7265D2 Japan: Model 7265D2W:

Korea: Model 7265D2W, MSIP-CRM-INT-7265D2W Taiwan: Model 7265D2W, regs.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:49 PM]

Regulatory Information China: Model 7265D2W, CMIIT ID: 2014AJ3467 (M) Australia: Model 7265D2W, Due to the very small size of the 17265NGW/13100NGW, the marking has been placed in this user manual because the product label on the device is considered too small to be readable. Singapore: Model 17265NGW/13100NGW:

INFORMATION FOR OEMs and HOST INTEGRATORS The guidelines described within this document are provided to OEM integrators installing Intel wireless adapters in notebook and tablet PC host platforms. Adherence to these requirements is necessary to meet the conditions of compliance with FCC rules, including RF exposure. When all antenna type and placement guidelines described herein are fulfilled the Intel wireless adapters may be incorporated into notebook and tablet PC host platforms with no further restrictions. If any of the guidelines described herein are not satisfied it may be necessary for the OEM or integrator to perform additional testing and/or obtain additional approval. The OEM or integrator is responsible to determine the required host regulatory testing and/or obtaining the required host approvals for compliance. Intel wireless adapters are intended for OEMs and host integrators only. The Intel wireless adapter FCC Grant of Authorization describes any limited conditions of modular approval. The Intel wireless adapters must be operated with an access point that has been approved for the country of operation. Changes or modification to Intel wireless adapters by OEMs, integrators or other third parties is not permitted. Any changes or modification to Intel wireless adapters by OEMs, integrators or other third parties will void authorization to operate the adapter. Antenna Type and Gains Only antennas of the same type and with equal or less gains as shown below may be used with the Intel wireless adapters. Other types of antennas and/or higher gain antennas may require additional authorization for operation. Antenna Type PIFA Antenna Location

(Main/Aux) Main 2.4GHz Peak Gain in dBi*

2.6GHz Peak Gain in dBi*

5.2GHz Peak Gain in dBi*

5.5GHz Peak Gain in dBi*

5.7GHz Peak Gain in dBi*

regs.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:49 PM]

Regulatory Information Aux MIMO

*All antenna gains include cable loss. 3.24 3.47 3.73 4.77 4.77 Antenna Placement Within the Host Platform To ensure RF exposure compliance the antenna(s) used with the Intel wireless adapters must be installed in notebook or tablet PC host platforms to provide a minimum separation distance from all persons, in all operating modes and orientations of the host platform, with strict adherence to the table below. The antenna separation distance applies to both horizontal and vertical orientation of the antenna when installed in the host system. Intel Wireless Adapter Minimum required antenna-to-user separation distance Intel Centrino Wireless-N + WiMAX 6150 Intel Centrino Wireless-N + WiMAX 6350 18 mm 17 mm Simultaneous Transmission of Intel Wireless Adapters with Other Integrated or Plug-In Transmitters Based upon FCC Knowledge Database publication number 616217 when there are multiple transmitting devices installed in a host device, an RF exposure transmitting assessment shall be performed to determine the necessary application and test requirements. OEM integrators must identify all possible combinations of simultaneous transmission configurations for all transmitters and antennas installed in the host system. This includes transmitters installed in the host as mobile devices (>20 cm separation from user) and portable devices (<20 cm separation from user). OEM integrators should consult the actual FCC KDB 616217 document for all details in making this assessment to determine if any additional requirements for testing or FCC approval is necessary. Information To Be Supplied to the End User by the OEM or Integrator The following regulatory and safety notices must be published in documentation supplied to the end user of the product or system incorporating the Intel wireless adapter, in compliance with local regulations. Host system must be labeled with "Contains FCC ID: MSQ8260NG", IC: 3568A-8260NG, ID displayed on label. The Intel wireless adapter must be installed and used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions as described in the user documentation that comes with the product. Intel Corporation is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modification of the devices included with the wireless adapter kit or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than that specified by Intel Corporation. The correction of interference caused by such unauthorized modification, substitution or attachment is the responsibility of the user. Intel Corporation and authorized resellers or distributors are not liable for any damage or violation of government regulations that may arise from the user failing to comply with these guidelines. Local Restriction of 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11n, and 802.11e Radio Usage The following statement on local restrictions must be published as part of the compliance documentation for all 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g and 802.11n products. Caution: Due to the fact that the frequencies used by 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11n, and 802.16e wireless LAN devices may not yet be harmonized in all countries, 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11n, and 802.16e products are designed for use only in specific countries, and are not allowed to be operated in countries other than those of designated use. As a user of these products, you are responsible for ensuring that the products are used only in the countries for which they were intended and for verifying that they are configured with the correct selection of frequency and channel for the country of use. Any deviation from the permissible power and frequency settings for the country of use is an infringement of national law and may be punished as such. regs.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:49 PM]

Regulatory Information Intel WiFi Adapters, 802.11n Compliant The information in this section applies to the following products:

Intel Centrino Wireless-N 100 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 105 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 130 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 135 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 1000 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 1030 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 2200 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 2230 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6200 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6205 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6230 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6235 Intel Centrino Ultimate-N 6300 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 7260 Intel Dual Band Wireless-N 7260 Intel Wireless-N 7260 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 3160 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 3165 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 7265 Intel Dual Band Wireless-N 7265 Intel Wireless-N 7265 Intel Tri-Band Wireless-AC 17265 Intel Wireless Gigabit Sink W13100 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 8260 See Specifications for complete wireless adapter specifications. NOTE: In this section, all references to the "wireless adapter" refer to all adapters listed above. The following information is provided:

Information for the User Regulatory Information Information for OEMs and Host Integrators Statements of European Compliance INFORMATION FOR THE USER Safety Notices USA FCC Radio Frequency Exposure The FCC with its action in ET Docket 96-8 has adopted a safety standard for human exposure to radio frequency (RF) electromagnetic energy emitted by FCC certified equipment. The wireless adapter meets the Human Exposure requirements found in FCC Part 2, 15C, 15E along with guidance from KDB 447498, KDB 248227 and KDB 616217. Proper operation of this radio according to the instructions found in this manual will result in exposure substantially below the FCCs recommended limits. The following safety precautions should be observed:

Do not touch or move antenna while the unit is transmitting or receiving. Do not hold any component containing the radio such that the antenna is very close or touching any exposed parts of the body, especially the face or eyes, while transmitting. Do not operate the radio or attempt to transmit data unless the antenna is connected; this behavior may cause damage to the radio. Use in specific environments:

regs.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:49 PM]

Regulatory Information The use of wireless adapters in hazardous locations is limited by the constraints posed by the safety directors of such environments. The use of wireless adapters on airplanes is governed by the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA). The use of wireless adapters in hospitals is restricted to the limits set forth by each hospital. Explosive Device Proximity Warning Warning: Do not operate a portable transmitter (including this wireless adapter) near unshielded blasting caps or in an explosive environment unless the transmitter has been modified to be qualified for such use. Antenna Warnings Warning: The wireless adapter is not designed for use with high-gain directional antennas. Use On Aircraft Caution Caution: Regulations of commercial airline operators may prohibit airborne operation of certain electronic devices equipped with radio-frequency wireless devices (wireless adapters) because their signals could interfere with critical aircraft instruments. Caution: 60 GHz/802.11ad equipment is not permitted on aircraft per FCC 15.255. OEM and host integrators should consider this FCC rule in host devices. Other Wireless Devices Safety Notices for Other Devices in the Wireless Network: See the documentation supplied with wireless adapters or other devices in the wireless network. Local Restrictions on 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11d, 802.11g, 802.11n, and 802.11ac Radio Usage Caution: Due to the fact that the frequencies used by 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11d, 802.11g, 802.11n, and 802.11ac wireless LAN devices may not yet be harmonized in all countries, 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11d, 802.11g, 802.11n, and 802.11ac products are designed for use only in specific countries, and are not allowed to be operated in countries other than those of designated use. As a user of these products, you are responsible for ensuring that the products are used only in the countries for which they were intended and for verifying that they are configured with the correct selection of frequency and channel for the country of use. The device transmit power control (TPC) interface is part of the Intel PROSet/Wireless WiFi Connection Utility Software. Operational restrictions for Equivalent Isotropic Radiated Power (EIRP) are provided by the system manufacturer. Any deviation from the permissible power and frequency settings for the country of use is an infringement of national law and may be punished as such. Wireless Interoperability The wireless adapter is designed to be interoperable with other wireless LAN products that are based on direct sequence spread spectrum (DSSS) radio technology and to comply with the following standards:

IEEE Std. 802.11b compliant Standard on Wireless LAN IEEE Std. 802.11g compliant Standard on Wireless LAN IEEE Std. 802.11a compliant Standard on Wireless LAN IEEE Std. 802.11n compliant Standard on Wireless LAN IEEE Std. 802.11ac draft compliant on Wireless LAN Wireless Fidelity certification, as defined by the Wi-Fi Alliance The Wireless Adapter and Your Health The wireless adapter, like other radio devices, emits radio frequency electromagnetic energy. The level of energy emitted by the wireless adapter, however, is less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by other wireless devices such as mobile phones. The wireless adapter operates within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety regs.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:49 PM]

Regulatory Information standards and recommendations. These standards and recommendations reflect the consensus of the scientific community and result from deliberations of panels and committees of scientists who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature. In some situations or environments, the use of the wireless adapter may be restricted by the proprietor of the building or responsible representatives of the applicable organization. Examples of such situations may include:

Using the wireless adapter on board airplanes, or Using the wireless adapter in any other environment where the risk of interference with other devices or services is perceived or identified as being harmful. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of wireless adapters in a specific organization or environment (an airport, for example), you are encouraged to ask for authorization to use the adapter before you turn it on. REGULATORY INFORMATION USA - Federal Communications Commission (FCC) This wireless adapter is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 and 5.470 to 5.75GHz frequency ranges. No configuration controls are provided for Intel wireless adapters allowing any change in the frequency of operations outside the FCC grant of authorization for U.S. operation according to Part 15.407 of the FCC rules. Intel wireless adapters are intended for OEM integrators only. Intel wireless adapters cannot be co-located with any other transmitter unless approved by the FCC. This wireless adapter complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation of the device is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: The radiated output power of the adapter is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the adapter should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, you should keep a distance of at least 20cm between you (or any other person in the vicinity), or the minimum separation distance as specified by the FCC grant conditions, and the antenna that is built into the computer. Details of the authorized configurations can be found at http://www.fcc.gov/oet/ea/

by entering the FCC ID number on the device. Class B Device Interference Statement This wireless adapter has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This wireless adapter generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If the wireless adapter is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, the wireless adapter may cause harmful interference to radio communications. There is no guarantee, however, that such interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this wireless adapter does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception

(which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on), the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by taking one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna of the equipment experiencing the interference. Increase the distance between the wireless adapter and the equipment experiencing the interference. Connect the computer with the wireless adapter to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the equipment experiencing the interference is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. NOTE: The adapter must be installed and used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions as described in the user documentation that comes with the product. Any other installation or use will violate FCC Part 15 regulations. regs.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:49 PM]

Regulatory Information Safety Approval Considerations This device has been safety approved as a component and is for use only in complete equipment where the acceptability of the combination is determined by the appropriate safety agencies. When installed, consideration must be given to the following:

It must be installed into a compliant host device meeting the requirement of UL/EN/IEC 60950-1 2nd edition including the general provisions of enclosure design 1.6.2 and specifically paragraph 1.2.6.2 (Fire Enclosure). The device shall be supplied by a SELV source when installed in the end-use equipment. A heating test shall be considered in the end-use product for meeting the requirement of UL/EN/IEC 60950-1 2nd edition. Low Halogen Applies only to brominated and chlorinated flame retardants (BFRs/CFRs) and PVC in the final product. Intel components as well as purchased components on the finished assembly meet JS-709 requirements, and the PCB /

substrate meet IEC 61249-2-21 requirements. The replacement of halogenated flame retardants and/or PVC may not be better for the environment. Canada Industry Canada (IC) This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Cet appareil se conforme aux normes Canada d'Industrie de RSS permis-exempt. L'utilisation est assujetti aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) cet appareil ne peut pas causer d'interfrences, et (2) cet appareil doit accepter des interfrences , y compris des interfrences qui peuvent causer desoprations non dsires de l'appareil. Caution: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15GHz to 5.25GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65 to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The maximum allowed antenna gain for use with this device is 6dBi in order to comply with the E.I.R.P limit for the 5.25- to 5.35 and 5.725 to 5.85GHz frequency range in point-to-point operation. To comply with RF exposure requirements all antennas should be located at a minimum distance of 20cm, or the minimum separation distance allowed by the module approval, from the body of all persons. Attention: l'utilisation d'un rseau sans fil IEEE802.11a est restreinte une utilisation en intrieur cause du fonctionnement dans la bande de frquence 5.15-5.25 GHz. Industry Canada requiert que ce produit soit utilis l'intrieur des btiments pour la bande de frquence 5.15-5.25 GHz afin de rduire les possibilits d'interfrences nuisibles aux canaux co-existants des systmes de transmission satellites. Les radars de puissances ont fait l'objet d'une allocation primaire de frquences dans les bandes 5.25-5.35 GHz et 5.65-5.85 GHz. Ces stations radar peuvent crer des interfrences avec ce produit et/ou lui tre nuisible. Le gain d'antenne maximum permissible pour une utilisation avec ce produit est de 6 dBi afin d'tre conforme aux limites de puissance isotropique rayonne quivalente (P.I.R.E.) applicable dans les bandes 5.25-5.35 GHz et 5.725-5.85 GHz en fonctionnement point--

point. Pour se conformer aux conditions d'exposition de RF toutes les antennes devraient tre localises une distance minimum de 20 cm, ou la distance de sparation minimum permise par l'approbation du module, du corps de toutes les personnes. Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power

(e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication. Selon les rglements de Canada d'Industrie, cet metteur de radio peut seulement fonctionner en utilisant une antenne du type et de gain maximum (ou moindre) que le gain approuv pour l'metteur par Canada d'Industrie. regs.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:49 PM]

Regulatory Information Pour rduire lesinterfrences radio potentielles avec les autres utilisateurs, le type d'antenne et son gain devraient tre choisis de faon ce que la puissance isotrope rayonne quivalente(P.I.R.E.) ne soit pas suprieure celle qui est ncessaire pour une communication russie. European Union The low band 5.15 - 5.35GHz is for indoor use only. This equipment complies with the essential requirements of the European Union directive 1999/5/EC. See Statements of European Union Compliance. European Union Declarations of Conformity To view the European Union Declaration of Conformity for your adapter, perform these steps. 1. Open this web site: http://developer.intel.com/design/litcentr/ce_docs/index.htm. 2. Under the Wireless Products menu select your adapter. 3. Click Go. To view additional regulatory information for your adapter, perform these steps:

1. Open this web site: http://www.intel.com/support/wireless/wlan/

2. Click on the link for your adapter. 3. Click Document and Guides. 4. Under Regulatory Information, click Regulatory documents for your adapter. Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment Directive (WEEE) Restriction of Hazardous Substances Directive (RoHS) Compliant All products described herein are compliant with the European Union's RoHS Directive. For CE Mark-Related Questions related to the wireless adapter, contact:

Intel Corporation Attn: Corporate Quality 2200 Mission College Blvd. Santa Clara, CA 95054-1549 USA Japan 5GHz Korea

. 5150-5250MHz . Mexico La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo regs.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:49 PM]

Regulatory Information no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. Morocco The operation of this product in the radio channel 2 (2417 MHz) is not authorized in the following cities: Agadir, Assa-Zag, Cabo Negro, Chaouen, Goulmima, Oujda, Tan Tan, Taourirt, Taroudant and Taza. The operation of this product in the radio channels 4, 5, 6 et 7 (2425 - 2442 MHz) is not authorized in the following cities: Aroport Mohamed V, Agadir, Aguelmous, Anza, Benslimane, Bni Hafida, Cabo Negro, Casablanca, Fs, Lakbab, Marrakech, Merchich, Mohammdia, Rabat, Sal, Tanger, Tan Tan, Taounate, Tit Mellil, Zag. Pakistan

"PTA APPROVED MODEL"

Taiwan 5.25-5.35 Singapore Radio Approvals To determine whether you are allowed to use your wireless network device in a specific country, please check to see if the radio type number that is printed on the identification label of your device is listed in the manufacturer's OEM Regulatory Guidance document. regs.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:49 PM]

Regulatory Information Modular Regulatory Certification Country Markings A list of countries requiring regulatory markings is available. Note that the lists include only countries requiring marking but not all certified countries. To find the regulatory country marking information for your adapter, perform these steps:

1. Open this web site: http://www.intel.com/support/wireless/wlan/

2. Click on the link for your adapter. 3. Click Document and Guides 4. Under Regulatory Information, click Regulatory documents for your adapter. Regulatory ID Due to the very small size of the 7265D2W (12x16), the marking has been placed in this user manual because the product label on the device is considered too small to be readable. USA: Model 7265D2W, FCC ID: PD97265D2 Canada: Model 7265D2W, IC: 1000M-7265D2 Japan: Model 7265D2W:

Korea: Model 7265D2W, MSIP-CRM-INT-7265D2W Taiwan: Model 7265D2W, China: Model 7265D2W, CMIIT ID: 2014AJ3467 (M) Australia: Model 7265D2W, Due to the very small size of the 17265NGW/13100NGW, the marking has been placed in this user manual because the product label on the device is considered too small to be readable. Singapore: Model 17265NGW/13100NGW:

regs.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:49 PM]

Regulatory Information INFORMATION FOR OEMS and HOST INTEGRATORS The guidelines described within this document are provided to OEM integrators installing Intel wireless adapters in notebook and tablet PC host platforms. Adherence to these requirements is necessary to meet the conditions of compliance with FCC rules, including RF exposure. When all antenna type and placement guidelines described herein are fulfilled the Intel wireless adapters may be incorporated into notebook and tablet PC host platforms with no further restrictions. If any of the guidelines described herein are not satisfied it may be necessary for the OEM or integrator to perform additional testing and/or obtain additional approval. The OEM or integrator is responsible to determine the required host regulatory testing and/or obtaining the required host approvals for compliance. Intel wireless adapters are intended for OEMs and host integrators only. The Intel wireless adapter FCC Grant of Authorization describes any limited conditions of modular approval. The Intel wireless adapters must be operated with an access point that has been approved for the country of operation. Changes or modification to Intel wireless adapters by OEMs, integrators or other third parties is not permitted. Any changes or modification to Intel wireless adapters by OEMs, integrators or other third parties will void authorization to operate the adapter. Antenna Type and Gains Only antennas of the same type and with equal or less gains as shown below may be used with the Intel wireless adapters. Other types of antennas and/or higher gain antennas may require additional authorization for operation. Antenna Type PIFA Antenna Location

(Main/Aux) 2.4GHz Peak Gain in dBi*

2.6GHz Peak Gain in dBi*

5.2GHz Peak Gain in dBi*

5.5GHz Peak Gain in dBi*

5.7GHz Peak Gain in dBi*

Main Aux MIMO 3.24 3.47 3.73 4.77 4.77

*All antenna gains include cable loss. Antenna Placement Within the Host Platform To ensure RF exposure compliance the antenna(s) used with the Intel wireless adapters must be installed in notebook or tablet PC host platforms to provide a minimum separation distance from all persons, in all operating modes and orientations of the host platform, with strict adherence to the table below. The antenna separation distance applies to both horizontal and vertical orientation of the antenna when installed in the host system. Wireless Adapter Intel Centrino Wireless-N 100 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 105 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 130 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 135 Minimum required antenna-to-user separation distance 9 mm 9 mm 8 mm 9 mm regs.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:49 PM]

Regulatory Information Intel Centrino Wireless-N 1000*

Intel Centrino Wireless-N 1030 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 2200 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 2230 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6200*

Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6205 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6230 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6235 Intel Centrino Ultimate-N 6300 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 7260 Intel Dual Band Wireless-N 7260 Intel Wireless-N 7260 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 3160 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 3165 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 7265 Intel Dual Band Wireless-N 7265 Intel Wireless-N 7265 Intel Tri-Band Wireless-AC 17265 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 8260

* This wireless adapter may be installed in mobile devices only

(requires > 20 cm antenna separation from the body of user). 20 mm 8 mm 9 mm 6 mm 20 mm 12 mm 12 mm 8 mm 13 mm 8 mm 8 mm 8 mm 8 mm 8 mm 8 mm 8 mm 8 mm 8 mm 8 mm For WiFi/Bluetooth combination adapters it is recommended that a 5 cm separation distance between transmitting antennas be provided within the host system to maintain an adequate separation ratio for simultaneous WiFi and Bluetooth transmission. For less than 5 cm separation the separation ratio must be verified according to FCC publication KDB 447498 for the specific adapter. Additional regulatory authorization process may be required if wishing to place the 60 GHz/802.11ad RFEM (antenna array) closer than 20 cm to the user. Simultaneous Transmission of Intel Wireless Adapters with Other Integrated or Plug-In Transmitters Based upon FCC Knowledge Database publication number 616217, when there are multiple transmitting devices installed in a host device, an RF exposure transmitting assessment shall be performed to determine the necessary application and test requirements. OEM integrators must identify all possible combinations of simultaneous transmission configurations for all transmitters and antennas installed in the host system. This includes transmitters installed in the host as mobile devices (>20 cm separation from user) and portable devices (<20 cm separation from user). OEM integrators should consult the actual FCC KDB 616217 document for all details in making this assessment to determine if any additional requirements for testing or FCC approval is necessary. Information To Be Supplied to the End User by the OEM or Integrator The following regulatory and safety notices must be published in documentation supplied to the end user of the product or system incorporating the Intel wireless adapter, in compliance with local regulations. Host system must be labeled with "Contains FCC ID: XXXXXXXX", FCC ID displayed on label. The wireless adapter must be installed and used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions as described in the user documentation that comes with the product. For country-specific approvals, see Radio Approvals. Intel Corporation is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modification of the devices included with the wireless adapter kit or the substitution or attachment of connecting regs.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:49 PM]

Regulatory Information cables and equipment other than that specified by Intel Corporation. The correction of interference caused by such unauthorized modification, substitution or attachment is the responsibility of the user. Intel Corporation and authorized resellers or distributors are not liable for any damage or violation of government regulations that may arise from the user failing to comply with these guidelines. Local Restriction of 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11n, and 802.11ad Radio Usage The following statement on local restrictions must be published as part of the compliance documentation for all 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11n, and 802.11ad products. Caution: Due to the fact that the frequencies used by 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11n, and 802.11ad wireless LAN devices may not yet be harmonized in all countries, 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g and 802.11n products are designed for use only in specific countries, and are not allowed to be operated in countries other than those of designated use. As a user of these products, you are responsible for ensuring that the products are used only in the countries for which they were intended and for verifying that they are configured with the correct selection of frequency and channel for the country of use. Any deviation from permissible settings and restrictions in the country of use could be an infringement of national law and may be punished as such. Statements of European Compliance Each of the adapters listed below comply with the essential requirements of the European Union directive 1999/5/EC. Intel Centrino Wireless-N 100 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 105 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 130 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 135 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 1000 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 1030 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 2200 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 2230 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6200 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6205 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6230 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6235 Intel Centrino Ultimate-N 6300 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 7260 Intel Dual Band Wireless-N 7260 Intel Wireless-N 7260 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 3160 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 3165 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 7265 Intel Dual Band Wireless-N 7265 Intel Wireless-N 7265 Intel Tri-Band Wireless-AC 17265 Intel Wireless Gigabit Sink W13100 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 8260 Back to Top Back to Contents Trademarks and Disclaimers regs.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:49 PM]

Specifications Back to Contents Specifications This section provides specification information for the family of Intel wireless adapters. The following list may not be all inclusive. Intel Centrino Wireless-N 100 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 105 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 130 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 135 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 1000 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 1030 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 2200 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 2230 Intel Centrino Wireless-N + WiMAX 6150 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6200 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6205 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6230 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6235 Intel Centrino Advanced-N + WiMAX 6250 Intel Centrino Ultimate-N 6300 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 7260 Intel Dual Band Wireless-N 7260 Intel Wireless-N 7260 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 3160 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 3165 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 7265 Intel Dual Band Wireless-N 7265 Intel Wireless-N 7265 Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 8260 Intel Tri-Band Wireless-AC 17265 Intel Wireless Gigabit Sink W13100 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 100, Intel Centrino Wireless-N 105, Intel Centrino Wireless-N 130 and Intel Centrino Wireless-N 135 Form Factor Dimensions PCI Express* Half-Mini Card Half-Mini Card: Width 1.049 in x Length 1.18 in x Height 0.18 in (26.64 mm x 30 mm x 4.5 mm) Hirose U.FL-R-SMT mates with cable connector U.FL-LP-066 On-board diversity Antenna Interface Connector Antenna Diversity Connector Interface 52-pin Mini Card edge connector Voltage Operating Temperature Humidity WiFi Frequency Modulation Frequency band 3.3 V 0 to +80 degrees Celsius 50% to 95% non-condensing (at temperatures of 25 C to 35 C) 2.4 GHz (802.11b/g/n) 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz (dependent on country) specs.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:51 PM]

Specifications Modulation Wireless Medium Channels IEEE 802.11n Data Rates IEEE 802.11g Data Rates IEEE 802.11b Data Rates Bluetooth Support BPSK, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM 2.4 GHz ISM: Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) All channels as defined by the relevant specification and country rules. MIMO Configuration: 1X1 CCK, DQPSK, DBPSK Tx/Rx: 150, 144, 135, 130, 120, 117, 115.5, 90, 86.667, 72.2, 65, 60, 57.8, 45, 43.3, 30, 28.9, 21.7, 15, 14.4, 7.2 Mbps 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps Intel Centrino Wireless-N 100: None Intel Centrino Wireless-N 105: None Intel Centrino Wireless-N 130: Bluetooth 2.1, 2.1 + EDR, 3.0, 3.0+HS Intel Centrino Wireless-N 135: Bluetooth 4.0 (Bluetooth Low-Energy and Bluetooth 3.0 +HS) General Operating Systems Windows* 7 (32-bit and 64-bit), Windows* 8 (32-bit and 64-bit), Windows* 8.1 (32-bit and Wi-Fi Alliance*

certification Cisco Compatible Extensions certification IEEE Feature Sets Architecture Security Product Safety 64-bit) Wi-Fi* certification for 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11n, WPA-Personal, WPA-Enterprise, WPA2-

Personal, WPA2-Enterprise, WMM, WPS Cisco Compatible Extensions, v4.0 IEEE 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11n, 802.11e, 802.11i, 802.11d, 802.11h Infrastructure or ad hoc (peer-to-peer) operating modes WPA-Personal, WPA2-Personal, WPA-Enterprise, WPA2-Enterprise, AES-CCMP 128-bit, WEP 128-bit and 64-bit; 802.1X: EAP-SIM, LEAP, PEAP, TKIP, EAP-FAST, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-

AKA UL, C-UL, CB (IEC/EN 60950-1) Intel Centrino Wireless-N 1000 WiFi / WiMAX Form Factor SKUs Dimensions Antenna Interface Connector Antenna Diversity Connector Interface Voltage Operating Temperature Humidity WiFi specs.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:51 PM]

PCI Express* Mini Card and Half-Mini Card Intel Centrino Wireless-N 1000 - 1X2 MC/HMC Mini Card: Width 2.0 in x Length 1.18 in x Height 0.18 in (50.80 mm x 30 mm x 4.5 mm) Half-Mini Card: Width 1.049 in x Length 1.18 in x Height 0.18 in (26.64 mm x 30 mm x 4.5 mm) Hirose U.FL-R-SMT mates with cable connector U.FL-LP-066 On-board diversity 52-pin Mini Card edge connector 3.3 V 0 to +80 degrees Celsius 50% to 90% non-condensing (at temperatures of 25 C to 35 C) Specifications Frequency Modulation Frequency band Modulation Wireless Medium Channels IEEE 802.11n Data Rates 300, 270, 243, 240, 180, 150, 144, 135, 130, 120, 117, 115.5, 90, 86.667, 72.2, 65, 2.4 GHz (802.11b/g/n) 2.41-2.474 GHz (dependent on country) BPSK, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM, CCK, DQPSK, DBPSK 2.4 GHz ISM: Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) All channels as defined by the relevant specification and country rules. 60, 57.8, 45, 43.3, 30, 28.9, 21.7, 15, 14.4, 7.2 Mbps IEEE 802.11g Data Rates 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps IEEE 802.11b Data Rates 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps WiFi General Operating Systems Wi-Fi Alliance*

certification Cisco Compatible Extensions certification WLAN Standard Architecture Security Encryption Product Safety Microsoft Windows* XP (32 and 64 bit) and Windows Vista* (32 and 64 bit), Ubuntu Linux*

Wi-Fi* certification for 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11n, WPA-Personal, WPA-Enterprise, WPA2-Personal, WPA2-Enterprise, WMM, WPS Cisco Compatible Extensions, v4.0 IEEE 802.11g, 802.11b, 802.11n, 802.11d, 802.11e, 802.11i, Infrastructure or ad hoc (peer-to-peer) operating modes WPA-Personal, WPA2-Personal, WPA-Enterprise, WPA2-Enterprise, 802.1X: EAP-SIM, LEAP, PEAP, EAP-FAST, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-AKA AES-CCMP 128-bit, WEP 128-bit and 64-bit, CKIP, TKIP UL, C-UL, CB (IEC/EN 60950-1) Intel Centrino Wireless-N 2200 and Intel Centrino Wireless-N 2230 Form Factor Dimensions PCI Express* Half-Mini Card Half-Mini Card: Width 1.049 in x Length 1.18 in x Height 0.18 in (26.64 mm x 30 mm x 4.5 mm) Hirose U.FL-R-SMT mates with cable connector U.FL-LP-066 On-board diversity 3.3 V 0 to +80 degrees Celsius Antenna Interface Connector Antenna Diversity Connector Interface 52-pin Mini Card edge connector Voltage Operating Temperature Humidity WiFi Frequency Modulation Frequency band Modulation Wireless Medium Channels IEEE 802.11n Data Rates 50% to 95% non-condensing (at temperatures of 25 C to 35 C) 2.4 GHz (802.11b/g/n) 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz (dependent on country) BPSK, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM 2.4 GHz ISM: Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) All channels as defined by the relevant specification and country rules. MIMO Configuration: 2X2 CCK, DQPSK, DBPSK Tx/Rx: 300, 150, 144, 135, 130, 120, 117, 115.5, 90, 86.667, 72.2, 65, 60, 57.8, 45, 43.3, specs.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:51 PM]

Specifications IEEE 802.11g Data Rates IEEE 802.11b Data Rates Bluetooth Support 30, 28.9, 21.7, 15, 14.4, 7.2 Mbps 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps Intel Centrino Wireless-N 2200: None Intel Centrino Wireless-N 2230: Bluetooth 4.0 (Bluetooth Low-Energy and Bluetooth 3.0 +HS) General Operating Systems Windows* 7 (32-bit and 64-bit), Windows* 8 (32-bit and 64-bit), Windows* 8.1 (32-bit and Wi-Fi Alliance*

certification Cisco Compatible Extensions certification IEEE Feature Sets Architecture Security Product Safety 64-bit) Wi-Fi* certification for 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11n, WPA-Personal, WPA-Enterprise, WPA2-

Personal, WPA2-Enterprise, WMM, WPS Cisco Compatible Extensions, v4.0 IEEE 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11n, 802.11e, 802.11i, 802.11d, 802.11h Infrastructure or ad hoc (peer-to-peer) operating modes WPA-Personal, WPA2-Personal, WPA-Enterprise, WPA2-Enterprise, AES-CCMP 128-bit, WEP 128-bit and 64-bit; 802.1X: EAP-SIM, LEAP, PEAP, TKIP, EAP-FAST, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-

AKA UL, C-UL, CB (IEC/EN 60950-1) Intel Centrino Wireless-N 1030 and Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6230 Form Factor Dimensions Antenna Interface Connector Antenna Diversity Network Standards Connector Interface Voltage Operating Temperature Humidity WiFi Network Standards PCI Express* Half-Mini Card Half-Mini Card: Width 1.049 in x Length 1.18 in x Height 0.18 in (26.64 mm x 30 mm x 4.5 mm) Hirose U.FL-R-SMT mates with cable connector U.FL-LP-066 On-board diversity 802.11a/b/g/n (varies by adapter) and Bluetooth 3.0 + HS 52-pin Mini Card edge connector 3.3 V 0 to +80 degrees Celsius 50% to 95% non-condensing (at temperatures of 25 C to 35 C) Intel Centrino Wireless-N 1030: 802.11b/g/n Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6230: 802.11a/g/n 5 GHz (802.11a/n) Frequency Modulation Frequency band 5.15 GHz - 5.85 GHz (dependent on country) Modulation Wireless BPSK, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM 5 GHz UNII: Orthogonal Frequency Division 2.4 GHz (802.11b/g/n) 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz (dependent on country) CCK, DQPSK, DBPSK 2.4 GHz ISM: Orthogonal Frequency Division specs.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:51 PM]

Specifications Medium Channels IEEE 802.11n Data Rates IEEE 802.11a Data Rates IEEE 802.11g Data Rates IEEE 802.11b Data Rates Bluetooth General Operating Systems Wi-Fi Alliance*

certification Multiplexing (OFDM) Multiplexing (OFDM) All channels as defined by the relevant specification and country rules. Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6230:

Tx/Rx (Mbps): 300, 270, 243, 240, 216.7, 195, 180, 173.3, 150, 144, 135, 130, 120, 117, 115.5, 90, 86.667, 72.2, 65, 60, 57.8, 45, 43.3, 30, 28.9, 21.7, 15, 14.4, 7.2 Intel Centrino Wireless-N 1030:

Rx (Mbps): 300, 270, 243, 240, 180 Rx/Tx (Mbps): 150, 144, 135, 130, 120, 117, 115.5, 90, 86.667, 72.2, 65, 60, 57.8, 45, 43.3, 30, 28.9, 21.7, 15, 14.4, 7.2 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps Bluetooth Version 3.0 + HS Microsoft Windows* XP (32-bit and 64-bit) Windows Vista* (32-bit and 64-bit) Windows* 7 (32-bit and 64-bit) Windows* 8 (32-bit and 64-bit) Windows* 8.1 (32-bit and 64-bit) Wi-Fi* certification for 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11a, 802.11h, 802.11d, WPA-Personal, WPA-

Enterprise, WPA2-Personal, WPA2-Enterprise, WPS, WMM, WMM Power Save, EAP-SIM, LEAP, PEAP, TKIP, EAP-FAST, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-AKA, P2P Cisco Compatible Extensions, v4.0 Cisco Compatible Extensions certification WLAN Standard IEEE 802.11g, 802.11b, 802.11a, 802.11n Architecture Security Infrastructure or ad hoc (peer-to-peer) operating modes WPA-Personal, WPA2-Personal, WPA-Enterprise, WPA2-Enterprise, AES-CCMP 128-bit, WEP 128-

bit and 64-bit; 802.1X: EAP-SIM, LEAP, PEAP, TKIP, EAP-FAST, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-AKA Product Safety UL, C-UL, CB (IEC/EN 60950-1) Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6235 Form Factor Dimensions Antenna Interface Connector Antenna Diversity Network Standards Connector Interface PCI Express* Half-Mini Card Half-Mini Card: Width 1.049 in x Length 1.18 in x Height 0.18 in (26.64 mm x 30 mm x 4.5 mm) Hirose U.FL-R-SMT mates with cable connector U.FL-LP-066 On-board diversity 802.11a/b/g/n and Bluetooth 4.0 52-pin Mini Card edge connector specs.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:51 PM]

50% to 95% non-condensing (at temperatures of 25 C to 35 C) 5 GHz (802.11a/n) 2.4 GHz (802.11b/g/n) 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz (dependent on country) CCK, DQPSK, DBPSK BPSK, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM 2.4 GHz ISM: Orthogonal Frequency Division 5 GHz UNII: Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) Multiplexing (OFDM) All channels as defined by the relevant specification and country rules. Tx/Rx (Mbps): 300, 270, 243, 240, 216.7, 195, 180, 173.3, 150, 144, 135, 130, 120, 117, 115.5, 90, 86.667, 72.2, 65, 60, 57.8, 45, 43.3, 30, 28.9, 21.7, 15, 14.4, 7.2 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps Specifications 3.3 V 0 to +80 degrees Celsius Voltage Operating Temperature Humidity Frequency Modulation Frequency band 5.15 GHz - 5.85 GHz (dependent on country) Modulation Wireless Medium Channels IEEE 802.11n Data Rates IEEE 802.11a Data Rates IEEE 802.11g Data Rates IEEE 802.11b Data Rates Bluetooth General Operating Systems Wi-Fi Alliance*

certification 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps Bluetooth Version 4.0 (3.0 +HS ) 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps Cisco Compatible Extensions certification WLAN Standard IEEE 802.11g, 802.11b, 802.11a, 802.11n Architecture Security Windows* 7 (32-bit and 64-bit), Windows* 8 (32-bit and 64-bit), Windows* 8.1 (32-bit and 64-

bit) Wi-Fi* certification for 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11a, 802.11h, 802.11d, WPA-Personal, WPA-

Enterprise, WPA2-Personal, WPA2-Enterprise, WPS, WMM, WMM Power Save, EAP-SIM, LEAP, PEAP, TKIP, EAP-FAST, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-AKA, P2P Cisco Compatible Extensions, v4.0 Infrastructure or ad hoc (peer-to-peer) operating modes WPA-Personal, WPA2-Personal, WPA-Enterprise, WPA2-Enterprise, AES-CCMP 128-bit, WEP 128-

bit and 64-bit; 802.1X: EAP-SIM, LEAP, PEAP, TKIP, EAP-FAST, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-AKA Product Safety UL, C-UL, CB (IEC/EN 60950-1) Intel Centrino Advanced-N + WiMAX 6250 and Intel Centrino Wireless-N + WiMAX 6150 Form Factor Dimensions Antenna Interface Connector Antenna Diversity Connector Interface Voltage PCI Express* Half-Mini Card Half-Mini Card: Width 1.049 in x Length 1.18 in x Height 0.18 in (26.64 mm x 30 mm x 4.5 mm) Hirose U.FL-R-SMT mates with cable connector U.FL-LP-066 On-board diversity 52-pin Mini Card edge connector 3.3 V specs.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:51 PM]

Specifications Operating Temperature Humidity WiFi Frequency Modulation 0 to +80 degrees Celsius 50% to 95% non-condensing (at temperatures of 25 C to 35 C) Intel Centrino Advanced-N + WiMAX 6250 Intel Centrino Wireless-N + WiMAX 6150 2.4 GHz (802.11b/g/n), 5 GHz (802.11a/n) Frequency band 5.15 GHz - 5.85 GHz (dependent on country) Modulation Wireless Medium Channels IEEE 802.11n Data Rates 2.4 GHz (802.11b/g/n) 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz (dependent on country) CCK, DQPSK, DBPSK BPSK, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM 2.4 GHz ISM: Orthogonal Frequency Division 5 GHz UNII: Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) Multiplexing (OFDM) All channels as defined by the relevant specification and country rules. Intel Centrino Wireless-N + WiMAX 6150 MIMO Configuration: 1X2 Rx: 300, 270, 243, 240, 180 Mbps Rx/Tx: 150, 144, 135, 130, 120, 117, 115.5, 90, 86.667, 72.2, 65, 60, 57.8, 45, 43.3, 30, 28.9, 21.7, 15, 14.4, 7.2 Mbps Intel Centrino Advanced-N + WiMAX 6250 MIMO Configuration: 2X2 Tx/Rx: 300, 270, 243, 240, 180, 150, 144, 135, 130, 120, 117, 115.5, 90, 86.667, 72.2, 65, 60, 57.8, 45, 43.3, 30, 28.9, 21.7, 15, 14.4, 7.2 Mbps 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps Microsoft Windows* XP (32-bit and 64-bit) Windows Vista* (32-bit and 64-bit) Windows* 7 (32-bit and 64-bit) Windows* 8 (32-bit and 64-bit) Windows* 8.1 (32-bit and 64-bit) Wi-Fi* certification for 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11a, 802.11h, 802.11d, WPA-Personal, WPA-

Enterprise, WPA2-Personal, WPA2-Enterprise, WMM, WMM Power Save, EAP-SIM, LEAP, PEAP, TKIP, EAP-FAST, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-AKA Cisco Compatible Extensions, v4.0 Intel Centrino Wireless-N + WiMAX 6150:

IEEE 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11n, 802.11e, 802.11i, 802.11h, 802.11d Intel Centrino Advanced-N + WiMAX 6250:

802.11a, IEEE 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11n, 802.11e, 802.11i, 802.11h, 802.11d Infrastructure or ad hoc (peer-to-peer) operating modes WPA-Personal, WPA2-Personal, WPA-Enterprise, WPA2-Enterprise, AES-CCMP 128-bit, WEP 128-

bit and 64-bit; 802.1X: EAP-SIM, LEAP, PEAP, TKIP, EAP-FAST, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-AKA UL, C-UL, CB (IEC/EN 60950-1) IEEE 802.11a Data Rates IEEE 802.11g Data Rates IEEE 802.11b Data Rates General Operating Systems Wi-Fi Alliance*

certification Cisco Compatible Extensions certification IEEE Feature Sets Architecture Security Product Safety specs.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:51 PM]

Specifications WiMAX General Operating Systems Standard Compliance WiMAX System Profile Feature set Microsoft Windows* XP (32-bit and 64-bit) Windows Vista* (32-bit and 64-bit) Windows* 7 (32-bit and 64-bit) Windows* 8 (32-bit and 64-bit) Windows* 8.1 (32-bit and 64-bit) 802.16e-2005 Corrigenda 2 (D4) Intel Centrino Wireless-N + WiMAX 6150:

Mobile WiMAX release 1, Wave II. Supports 3A and 1A/B profiles Intel Centrino Advanced-N + WiMAX 6250:

Mobile WiMAX release 1, Wave II. Supports 3A, 5A/C, 1A/B, and 5BL profiles Key Management Protocol (PKMv2) 128-bit CCMP (Counter-Mode/CBC-MAC) based on AES encryption Security Encryption WiMAX Frequency band Intel Centrino Wireless-N + WiMAX 6150: 2.3-2.4 GHz / 2.496-2.690 GHz Modulation Wireless Medium WiMAX Network Release Feature set Rate Performance RF Transmitter Output Power Intel Centrino Advanced-N + WiMAX 6250: 2.3-2.4 GHz / 2.496-2.690 GHz / 3.4-3.8 GHz UL - QPSK, 16 QAM Scalable OFDMA (SOFDMA): 512 and 1024 FFT Intel Centrino Wireless-N + WiMAX 6150:

Channel bandwidths: 5 and 10 MHz Intel Centrino Advanced-N + WiMAX 6250:

Channel bandwidths: 5, 7, 8.75 and 10 MHz DL - QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM Duplex mode: TDD operations sub-carrier permutation: PUSC SPWG/NWG Release 1.5 Intel Centrino Wireless-N + WiMAX 6150:

Up to 10 Mbps DL and 4 Mbps UL @ peak rate

(OTA performance, 10MHz channel) Intel Centrino Advanced-N + WiMAX 6250:

Up to 20 Mbps DL and 6 Mbps UL @ peak rate

(OTA performance, 10MHz channel) Compliance with Power class 2 Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6200, Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6205 and Intel Centrino Ultimate-N 6300 Form Factor Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6200, Intel Centrino Ultimate-N 6300:

PCI Express* Full-Mini Card and Half-Mini Card. Dimensions Antenna Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6205: PCI Express* Half-Mini Card. Full-Mini Card: Width 2.00 in x Length 1.18 in x Height 0.18 in (50.95 mm x 30 mm x 4.5 mm) Half-Mini Card: Width 1.049 in x Length 1.18 in x Height 0.18 in (26.64 mm x 30 mm x 4.5 mm) Hirose U.FL-R-SMT mates with cable connector U.FL-LP-066 specs.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:51 PM]

Specifications On-board diversity 52-pin Mini Card edge connector 3.3 V 0 to +80 degrees Celsius Interface Connector Antenna Diversity Connector Interface Voltage Operating Temperature Humidity Frequency Modulation Frequency band 5.15 GHz - 5.85 GHz (dependent on country) Modulation Wireless Medium Channels IEEE 802.11n Data Rates 50% to 95% non-condensing (at temperatures of 25 C to 35 C) 5 GHz (802.11a/n) 2.4 GHz (802.11b/g/n) 2.400 - 2.4835 GHz (dependent on country) CCK, DQPSK, DBPSK BPSK, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM 2.4 GHz ISM: Orthogonal Frequency Division 5 GHz UNII: Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) Multiplexing (OFDM) All channels as defined by the relevant specification and country rules. Intel Centrino Ultimate-N 6300:

Tx/Rx: 450, 405, 360, 300, 270, 243, 240, 216.7, 195, 180, 173.3, 150, 144, 135, 130, 120, 117, 115.5, 90, 86.667, 72.2, 65, 60, 57.8, 45, 43.3, 30, 28.9, 21.7, 15, 14.4, 7.2 Mbps Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6200, Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6205:

Tx/Rx: 300, 270, 243, 240, 180, 150, 144, 135, 130, 120, 117, 115.5, 90, 86.667, 72.2, 65, 60, 57.8, 45, 43.3, 30, 28.9, 21.7, 15, 14.4, 7.2 Mbps 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps Microsoft Windows* XP (32-bit and 64-bit) Windows Vista* (32-bit and 64-bit) Windows* 7 (32-bit and 64-bit) Windows* 8 (32-bit and 64-bit) Windows* 8.1 (32-bit and 64-bit) Wi-Fi* certification for 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11a, 802.11h, 802.11d, WPA-Personal, WPA-

Enterprise, WPA2-Personal, WPA2-Enterprise, WMM, WMM Power Save, EAP-SIM, LEAP, PEAP, TKIP, EAP-FAST, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-AKA Cisco Compatible Extensions, v4.0 IEEE 802.11a Data Rates IEEE 802.11g Data Rates IEEE 802.11b Data Rates General Operating Systems Wi-Fi Alliance*

certification Cisco Compatible Extensions certification WLAN Standard IEEE 802.11g, 802.11b, 802.11a, 802.11n Architecture Security Infrastructure or ad hoc (peer-to-peer) operating modes WPA-Personal, WPA2-Personal, WPA-Enterprise, WPA2-Enterprise, AES-CCMP 128-bit, WEP 128-

bit and 64-bit; 802.1X: EAP-SIM, LEAP, PEAP, TKIP, EAP-FAST, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, EAP-AKA UL, C-UL, CB (IEC/EN 60950-1) Product Safety specs.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:51 PM]

Specifications Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 7260 Half-Mini Card and M.2 (Next Generation Form Factor - NGFF) PCIe and USB 2.0 for both form factors Hirose U.FL-R-SMT mates with cable connector U.FL-LP-066 On-board diversity 802.11ac, 802.11abgn, 802.11d, 802.11e, 802.11i, 802.11h, 802.11w 0 to +80 degrees Celsius 50% to 95% non-condensing (at temperatures of 25 C to 35 C) 5GHz (802.11ac/n) 2.4GHz (802.11b/g/n) 5.15GHz - 5.85GHz (dependent on country) 2.400 - 2.4835GHz (dependent on country) BPSK, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM, 256 QAM 5GHz UNII: Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) All channels as defined by the relevant specification and country rules. Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 7260: 2 X 2 All data rates are theoretical maximums. Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 7260: Up to 867 Mbps CCK, DQPSK, DBPSK 2.4GHz ISM: Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) Tx/Rx (Mbps): 300, 270, 243, 240, 216.7, 195, 180, 173.3, 150, 144, 135, 130, 120, 117, 115.5, 90, 86.667, 72.2, 65, 60, 57.8, 45, 43.3, 30, 28.9, 21.7, 15, 14.4, 7.2 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps Dual Mode Bluetooth* 2.1, 2.1+EDR, 3.0, 3.0+HS, 4.0 (BLE) Windows* 7 (32-bit and 64-bit), Windows* 8 (32-bit and 64-bit), Windows* 8.1 (64-bit) Wi-Fi CERTIFIED* for 802.11ac, a/b/g, n, WMM*, WPA*, WPA2*, and WPS, WPS 2.0, Protected Management Frames. Wi-Fi Direct* for peer-to-peer device connections. Infrastructure and SoftAP; Supports simultaneous Client and SoftAP modes Cisco Compatible Extensions, v4.0 WPA and WPA2, 802.1X (EAP-TLS, TTLS, PEAP, LEAP, EAP-FAST), EAP-SIM, EAP-AKA PAP, CHAP, TLS, GTC, MS-CHAP*, MS-CHAPv2 64-bit and 128-bit WEP, AES-CCMP, TKIP WPA2, AES-CCMP Form Factors Electrical interfaces Antenna Interface Connector Antenna Diversity IEEE 802.11 Networking Standards Operating Temperature Humidity Frequency Modulation Frequency band Modulation Wireless Medium Channels Spatial streams Data Rates IEEE 802.11ac Data Rates IEEE 802.11n Data Rates IEEE 802.11a Data Rates IEEE 802.11g Data Rates IEEE 802.11b Data Rates Bluetooth General Operating Systems Wi-Fi Alliance*

certification Architecture Cisco Compatible Extensions certification Security Authentication Authentication Protocols Encryption Wi-Fi Direct*

Encryption and Authentication specs.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:51 PM]

Specifications Product Safety UL, C-UL, CB (IEC/EN 60950-1) Intel Dual Band Wireless-N 7260 Intel Wireless-N 7260 Half-Mini Card, M.2 (Next Generation Form Factor - NGFF) PCIe, USB 2.0 for both form factors Hirose U.FL-R-SMT mates with cable connector U.FL-LP-066 Form Factors Electrical interfaces Antenna Interface Connector Antenna Diversity On-board diversity IEEE 802.11 Networking Standards Intel Dual Band Wireless-N 7260 Model 7260HMW AN - 802.11agn, 2x2, Bluetooth 4.0, PCIe, USB, HMC Model 7260NGW AN - 802.11agn, 2x2, Bluetooth 4.0, PCIe, USB, M.2 Model 7260HMW NB - 802.11agn, 2x2, PCIe, USB, HMC Model 7260NGW NB - 802.11agn, 2x2, PCIe, USB, M.2 Intel Wireless-N 7260 Model 7260HMW BN - 802.11agn, 2x2, PCIe, USB, M.2 Model 7260NGW BN - 802.11bgn, 2x2, Bluetooth 4.0, PCIe, USB, M.2 0 to +80 degrees Celsius 50% to 95% non-condensing (at temperatures of 25 C to 35 C) 5GHz (802.11a/n) 2.4GHz (802.11b/g/n) 5.15GHz - 5.85GHz

(dependent on country) BPSK, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM 2.400 - 2.4835GHz (dependent on country) CCK, DQPSK, DBPSK Operating Temperature Humidity Frequency Modulation

(See above, not all bands supported by all adapters) Frequency band Modulation Wireless Medium 5GHz UNII: Orthogonal 2.4GHz ISM: Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) Channels 802.11n spatial streams Data Rates IEEE 802.11n Data Rates IEEE 802.11a Data Rates IEEE 802.11g Data Rates IEEE 802.11b Data Rates Bluetooth Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) All channels as defined by the relevant specification and country rules. All adapters: 2 X 2 spatial streams All data rates are theoretical maximums. Tx/Rx (Mbps): 300, 270, 243, 240, 216.7, 195, 180, 173.3, 150, 144, 135, 130, 120, 117, 115.5, 90, 86.667, 72.2, 65, 60, 57.8, 45, 43.3, 30, 28.9, 21.7, 15, 14.4, 7.2 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps Dual Mode Bluetooth* 2.1, 2.1+EDR, 3.0, 3.0+HS, 4.0 (BLE) supported by the following specs.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:51 PM]

Specifications adapters Model 7260HMW AN Model 7260NGW AN Model 7260NGW BN General Operating Systems Wi-Fi Alliance*

certification Architecture Cisco Compatible Extensions certification Security Authentication Authentication Protocols Encryption Wi-Fi Direct*

Encryption and Authentication Product Safety Windows* 7 (32-bit and 64-bit), Windows 8 (32-bit and 64-bit), Windows* 8.1 (64-bit) Wi-Fi CERTIFIED* for 802.11ac, a/b/g, n, WMM*, WPA*, WPA2*, and WPS, WPS 2.0, Protected Management Frames. Wi-Fi Direct* for peer-to-peer device connections. Infrastructure and SoftAP; Supports simultaneous Client and SoftAP modes Cisco Compatible Extensions, v4.0 WPA and WPA2, 802.1X (EAP-TLS, TTLS, PEAP, LEAP, EAP-FAST), EAP-SIM, EAP-AKA PAP, CHAP, TLS, GTC, MS-CHAP*, MS-CHAPv2 64-bit and 128-bit WEP, AES-CCMP, TKIP WPA2, AES-CCMP UL, C-UL, CB (IEC/EN 60950-1) Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 3160 Half-Mini Card and M.2 (Next Generation Form Factor - NGFF) PCIe and USB 2.0 for both form factors Hirose U.FL-R-SMT mates with cable connector U.FL-LP-066 On-board diversity 802.11ac, 802.11abgn, 802.11d, 802.11e, 802.11i, 802.11h, 802.11w Form Factors Electrical interfaces Antenna Interface Connector Antenna Diversity IEEE 802.11 Networking Standards Operating Temperature 0 to +80 degrees Celsius Humidity Frequency Modulation Frequency band Modulation Wireless Medium 50% to 90% non-condensing (at temperatures of 25 C to 35 C) 5GHz (802.11ac/n) 2.4GHz (802.11b/g/n) 5.15GHz - 5.85GHz (dependent on country) 2.400 - 2.4835GHz (dependent on country) BPSK, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM, 256 QAM 5GHz UNII: Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) All channels as defined by the relevant specification and country rules. Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 3160: 1 X 1 All data rates are theoretical maximums. Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 3160: Up to 433 Mbps CCK, DQPSK, DBPSK 2.4GHz ISM: Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) Tx/Rx (Mbps): 150, 144, 135, 130, 120, 117, 115.5, 90, 86.667, 72.2, 65, 60, 57.8, 45, 43.3, 30, 28.9, 21.7, 15, 14.4, 7.2 Channels Spatial streams Data Rates IEEE 802.11ac Data Rates IEEE 802.11n Data Rates specs.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:51 PM]

Specifications IEEE 802.11a Data Rates IEEE 802.11g Data Rates IEEE 802.11b Data Rates Bluetooth General Operating Systems Wi-Fi Alliance*

certification Architecture Cisco Compatible Extensions certification Security Authentication Authentication Protocols Encryption Wi-Fi Direct*

Encryption and Authentication Product Safety 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps Dual Mode Bluetooth* 2.1, 2.1+EDR, 3.0, 3.0+HS, 4.0 (BLE) Windows* 7 (32-bit and 64-bit), Windows 8 (32-bit and 64-bit), Windows* 8.1 (64-bit) Wi-Fi CERTIFIED* for 802.11ac, a/b/g, n, WMM*, WPA*, WPA2*, and WPS, WPS 2.0, Protected Management Frames. Wi-Fi Direct* for peer-to-peer device connections. Infrastructure and SoftAP; Supports simultaneous Client and SoftAP modes Cisco Compatible Extensions, v4.0 WPA and WPA2, 802.1X (EAP-TLS, TTLS, PEAP, LEAP, EAP-FAST), EAP-SIM, EAP-AKA PAP, CHAP, TLS, GTC, MS-CHAP*, MS-CHAPv2 64-bit and 128-bit WEP, AES-CCMP, TKIP WPA2, AES-CCMP UL, C-UL, CB (IEC/EN 60950-1) Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 3165 (Model 3165NGW) Form Factors Electrical interfaces Antenna Interface Connector Antenna Diversity IEEE 802.11 Networking Standards M.2 (Next Generation Form Factor - NGFF) PCIe and USB 2.0 Hirose U.FL-R-SMT mates with cable connector U.FL-LP-066 On-board diversity 802.11abgn, 802.11ac, 802.11d, 802.11e, 802.11i, 802.11h, 802.11w Operating Temperature 0 to +80 degrees Celsius Humidity Frequency Modulation Frequency band Modulation Wireless Medium 50% to 90% RH non-condensing (at temperatures of 25 C to 35 C) 5GHz (802.11ac/n) 2.4GHz (802.11b/g/n) 5.15GHz - 5.85GHz (dependent on country) 2.400 - 2.4835GHz (dependent on country) BPSK, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM, 256 QAM 5GHz UNII: Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) All channels as defined by the relevant specification and country rules. Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 3165: 1 X 1 All data rates are theoretical maximums. Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 3165: Up to 433 Mbps CCK, DQPSK, DBPSK 2.4GHz ISM: Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) Channels Spatial streams Data Rates IEEE 802.11ac Data Rates specs.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:51 PM]

Specifications IEEE 802.11n Data Rates IEEE 802.11a Data Rates IEEE 802.11g Data Rates IEEE 802.11b Data Rates Bluetooth General Operating Systems Wi-Fi Alliance*

certification Architecture Cisco Compatible Extensions certification Security Authentication Authentication Protocols Encryption Wi-Fi Direct*

Encryption and Authentication Product Safety Tx/Rx (Mbps): 150, 144, 135, 130, 120, 117, 115.5, 90, 86.667, 72.2, 65, 60, 57.8, 45, 43.3, 30, 28.9, 21.7, 15, 14.4, 7.2 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps Dual Mode Bluetooth* 2.1, 2.1+EDR, 3.0, 3.0+HS, 4.0 (BLE) Windows* 7 (32-bit and 64-bit), Windows* 8 (32-bit and 64-bit), Windows* 8.1 (64-bit) Wi-Fi CERTIFIED* for 802.11ac, a/b/g, n, WMM*, WPA*, WPA2*, and WPS, WPS 2.0, Protected Management Frames. Wi-Fi Direct* for peer-to-peer device connections. Infrastructure and SoftAP; Supports simultaneous Client and SoftAP modes Cisco Compatible Extensions, v4.0 WPA and WPA2, 802.1X (EAP-TLS, TTLS, PEAP, LEAP, EAP-FAST), EAP-SIM, EAP-AKA PAP, CHAP, TLS, GTC, MS-CHAP*, MS-CHAPv2 64-bit and 128-bit WEP, AES-CCMP, TKIP WPA2, AES-CCMP UL, C-UL, CB (IEC/EN 60950-1) Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 7265 (Model 7265NGW) M.2 (Next Generation Form Factor - NGFF) PCIe and USB 2.0 Hirose U.FL-R-SMT mates with cable connector U.FL-LP-066 On-board diversity 802.11abgn, 802.11ac, 802.11d, 802.11e, 802.11i, 802.11h, 802.11w 0 to +80 degrees Celsius 50% to 90% RH non-condensing (at temperatures of 25 C to 35 C) 5GHz (802.11ac/n) 2.4GHz (802.11b/g/n) 5.15GHz - 5.85GHz (dependent on country) 2.400 - 2.4835GHz (dependent on country) BPSK, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM, 256 QAM 5GHz UNII: Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) All channels as defined by the relevant specification and country rules. Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 7265: 2 X 2 CCK, DQPSK, DBPSK 2.4GHz ISM: Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) Form Factors Electrical interfaces Antenna Interface Connector Antenna Diversity IEEE 802.11 Networking Standards Operating Temperature Humidity Frequency Modulation Frequency band Modulation Wireless Medium Channels Spatial streams specs.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:51 PM]

Specifications Data Rates IEEE 802.11ac Data Rates IEEE 802.11n Data Rates IEEE 802.11a Data Rates IEEE 802.11g Data Rates IEEE 802.11b Data Rates Bluetooth General Operating Systems Wi-Fi Alliance*

certification Architecture Cisco Compatible Extensions certification Security Authentication Authentication Protocols Encryption Wi-Fi Direct*

Encryption and Authentication Product Safety All data rates are theoretical maximums. Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 7265: Up to 867 Mbps Tx/Rx (Mbps): 300, 270, 243, 240, 216.7, 195, 180, 173.3, 150, 144, 135, 130, 120, 117, 115.5, 90, 86.667, 72.2, 65, 60, 57.8, 45, 43.3, 30, 28.9, 21.7, 15, 14.4, 7.2 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps Dual Mode Bluetooth* 2.1, 2.1+EDR, 3.0, 3.0+HS, 4.0 (BLE) Windows* 7 (32-bit and 64-bit), Windows* 8 (32-bit and 64-bit), Windows* 8.1 (64-bit) Wi-Fi CERTIFIED* for 802.11ac, a/b/g, n, WMM*, WPA*, WPA2*, and WPS, WPS 2.0, Protected Management Frames. Wi-Fi Direct* for peer-to-peer device connections. Infrastructure and SoftAP; Supports simultaneous Client and SoftAP modes Cisco Compatible Extensions, v4.0 WPA and WPA2, 802.1X (EAP-TLS, TTLS, PEAP, LEAP, EAP-FAST), EAP-SIM, EAP-AKA PAP, CHAP, TLS, GTC, MS-CHAP*, MS-CHAPv2 64-bit and 128-bit WEP, AES-CCMP, TKIP WPA2, AES-CCMP UL, C-UL, CB (IEC/EN 60950-1) Intel Dual Band Wireless-N 7265 (Models 7265NGW AN and 7265NGW NB) Intel Wireless-N 7265 (Model 7265NGW BN) M.2 (Next Generation Form Factor - NGFF) PCIe, USB 2.0 Hirose U.FL-R-SMT mates with cable connector U.FL-LP-066 Form Factors Electrical interfaces Antenna Interface Connector Antenna Diversity On-board diversity IEEE 802.11 Networking Standards Intel Dual Band Wireless-N 7265 Model 7265NGW AN - 802.11agn, 2x2, Bluetooth 4.0, PCIe, USB, M.2 Model 7265NGW NB - 802.11agn, 2x2, PCIe, USB, M.2 Intel Wireless-N 7265 Model 7265NGW BN - 802.11bgn, 2x2, Bluetooth 4.0, PCIe, USB, M.2 Operating 0 to +80 degrees Celsius specs.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:51 PM]

Specifications Temperature Humidity Frequency Modulation

(See above, not all bands supported by all adapters) Frequency band Modulation 50% to 90% non-condensing (at temperatures of 25 C to 35 C) 5GHz (802.11a/n) 2.4GHz (802.11b/g/n) 5.15GHz - 5.85GHz

(dependent on country) BPSK, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM 2.400 - 2.4835GHz (dependent on country) CCK, DQPSK, DBPSK Wireless Medium 5GHz UNII: Orthogonal 2.4GHz ISM: Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) Channels 802.11n spatial streams Data Rates IEEE 802.11n Data Rates IEEE 802.11a Data Rates IEEE 802.11g Data Rates IEEE 802.11b Data Rates Bluetooth General Operating Systems Wi-Fi Alliance*

certification Architecture Cisco Compatible Extensions certification Security Authentication Authentication Protocols Encryption Wi-Fi Direct*

Encryption and Authentication Product Safety Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) All channels as defined by the relevant specification and country rules. All adapters: 2 X 2 spatial streams All data rates are theoretical maximums. Tx/Rx (Mbps): 300, 270, 243, 240, 216.7, 195, 180, 173.3, 150, 144, 135, 130, 120, 117, 115.5, 90, 86.667, 72.2, 65, 60, 57.8, 45, 43.3, 30, 28.9, 21.7, 15, 14.4, 7.2 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps Dual Mode Bluetooth* 2.1, 2.1+EDR, 3.0, 3.0+HS, 4.0 (BLE) supported by the following adapters Model 7265HMW AN Model 7265NGW AN Model 7265NGW BN Windows* 7 (32-bit and 64-bit), Windows 8 (32-bit and 64-bit), Windows* 8.1 (64-bit) Wi-Fi CERTIFIED* for 802.11ac, a/b/g, n, WMM*, WPA*, WPA2*, and WPS, WPS 2.0, Protected Management Frames. Wi-Fi Direct* for peer-to-peer device connections. Infrastructure and SoftAP; Supports simultaneous Client and SoftAP modes Cisco Compatible Extensions, v4.0 WPA and WPA2, 802.1X (EAP-TLS, TTLS, PEAP, LEAP, EAP-FAST), EAP-SIM, EAP-AKA PAP, CHAP, TLS, GTC, MS-CHAP*, MS-CHAPv2 64-bit and 128-bit WEP, AES-CCMP, TKIP WPA2, AES-CCMP UL, C-UL, CB (IEC/EN 60950-1) specs.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:51 PM]

Specifications Intel Tri-Band Wireless-AC 17265 (17265NGW/17265NGW LC) M.2 Type 3030 M.2 Key 1-DP: 2xPCIe, USB, DP. Interface to Intel Wireless Gigabit-Antenna M10041 Module using X-FL, and one dedicated for Bluetooth X.FL; Hirose U.FL-R-SMT mates with cable connector U.FL-LP-066 On-board diversity 802.11ac, 802.11ad, 802.11abgn, 802.11a, 802.11d, 802.11e, 802.11i, 802.11h, 802.11w 0 to +80 degrees Celsius 50% to 90% RH non-condensing (at temperatures of 25 C to 35 C) 60GHz (802.11ad) 5GHz (802.11ac/n) 2.4GHz (802.11b/g/n) 57GHz - 64GHz

(dependent on country) DPSK, BPSK, QPSK, 16 QAM, DMG control PHY, DMG SC PHY 5.15GHz - 5.85GHz (dependent on country) 2.400 - 2.4835GHz (dependent on country) CCK, DQPSK, DBPSK BPSK, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM, 256 QAM 5GHz UNII: Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing

(OFDM) All channels as defined by the relevant specification and country rules. Intel Tri-Band Wireless-AC 17265 2.4GHz ISM: Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing

(OFDM) 1, 2 and 3, subject to country rules N/A All data rates are theoretical maximums. Intel Tri-Band Wireless-AC 17265: Up to 867 Mbps 4620, 3850, 3080, 2503, 2310, 1925, 1540, 1251, 1155, 963, 770, 385 Mbps Tx/Rx (Mbps): 300, 270, 243, 240, 216.7, 195, 180, 173.3, 150, 144, 135, 130, 120, 117, 115.5, 90, 86.667, 72.2, 65, 60, 57.8, 45, 43.3, 30, 28.9, 21.7, 15, 14.4, 7.2 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps Dual Mode Bluetooth* 2.1, 2.1+EDR, 3.0, 3.0+HS, 4.0 (BLE) Microsoft Windows 7*, Microsoft Windows 8.1* with connected standby Wi-Fi CERTIFIED* for 802.11ac, a/b/g, n, WMM*, WPA*, WPA2*, and WPS, WPS 2.0, Protected Management Frames. Wi-Fi Direct* for peer-to-peer device connections. Infrastructure and SoftAP; Supports simultaneous Client and SoftAP modes Cisco Compatible Extensions, v4.0 Form Factors Electrical interfaces Antenna Interface Connector Antenna Diversity IEEE 802.11 Networking Standards Operating Temperature Humidity Frequency Modulation Frequency band Modulation Wireless Medium Channels Spatial streams Data Rates IEEE 802.11ac Data Rates IEEE 802.11ad Data Rates IEEE 802.11n Data Rates IEEE 802.11a Data Rates IEEE 802.11g Data Rates IEEE 802.11b Data Rates Bluetooth General Operating Systems Wi-Fi Alliance*

certification Architecture Cisco Compatible Extensions certification specs.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:51 PM]

Specifications Security Authentication Authentication Protocols Encryption Wi-Fi Direct*

Encryption and Authentication Product Safety WPA and WPA2, 802.1X (EAP-TLS, TTLS, PEAP, LEAP, EAP-FAST), EAP-SIM, EAP-AKA PAP, CHAP, TLS, GTC, MS-CHAP*, MS-CHAPv2 64-bit and 128-bit WEP, AES-CCMP, AES-CGMP, TKIP WPA2, AES-CCMP UL, C-UL, CB (IEC/EN 60950-1) Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 8260 Form Factors Electrical interfaces Antenna Interface Connector Antenna Diversity IEEE 802.11 Networking Standards Operating Temperature Humidity Frequency Modulation Frequency band Modulation Wireless Medium Channels Spatial streams Data Rates IEEE 802.11ac Data Rates IEEE 802.11n Data Rates IEEE 802.11a Data Rates IEEE 802.11g Data Rates IEEE 802.11b Data Rates Bluetooth General Operating Systems Wi-Fi Alliance*

certification Architecture specs.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:51 PM]

Half-Mini Card and M.2 (Next Generation Form Factor - NGFF) PCIe and USB 2.0 for both form factors Hirose U.FL-R-SMT mates with cable connector U.FL-LP-066 On-board diversity 802.11ac, 802.11abgn, 802.11d, 802.11e, 802.11i, 802.11h, 802.11w 0 to +80 degrees Celsius 50% to 95% non-condensing (at temperatures of 25 C to 35 C) 5GHz (802.11ac/n) 2.4GHz (802.11b/g/n) 5.15GHz - 5.85GHz (dependent on country) 2.400 - 2.4835GHz (dependent on country) BPSK, QPSK, 16 QAM, 64 QAM, 256 QAM 5GHz UNII: Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) All channels as defined by the relevant specification and country rules. Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 8260: 2 X 2 All data rates are theoretical maximums. Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 8260: Up to 867 Mbps CCK, DQPSK, DBPSK 2.4GHz ISM: Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) Tx/Rx (Mbps): 300, 270, 243, 240, 216.7, 195, 180, 173.3, 150, 144, 135, 130, 120, 117, 115.5, 90, 86.667, 72.2, 65, 60, 57.8, 45, 43.3, 30, 28.9, 21.7, 15, 14.4, 7.2 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, 6 Mbps 11, 5.5, 2, 1 Mbps Dual Mode Bluetooth* 2.1, 2.1+EDR, 3.0, 3.0+HS, 4.0 (BLE) Windows* 7 (32-bit and 64-bit), Windows* 8 (32-bit and 64-bit), Windows* 8.1 (64-bit) Wi-Fi CERTIFIED* for 802.11ac, a/b/g, n, WMM*, WPA*, WPA2*, and WPS, WPS 2.0, Protected Management Frames. Wi-Fi Direct* for peer-to-peer device connections. Infrastructure and SoftAP; Supports simultaneous Client and SoftAP modes Specifications Cisco Compatible Extensions certification Security Authentication Authentication Protocols Encryption Wi-Fi Direct*

Encryption and Authentication Product Safety Cisco Compatible Extensions, v4.0 WPA and WPA2, 802.1X (EAP-TLS, TTLS, PEAP, LEAP, EAP-FAST), EAP-SIM, EAP-AKA PAP, CHAP, TLS, GTC, MS-CHAP*, MS-CHAPv2 64-bit and 128-bit WEP, AES-CCMP, TKIP WPA2, AES-CCMP UL, C-UL, CB (IEC/EN 60950-1) Intel Wireless Gigabit Sink W13100 Form Factors Electrical interfaces Antenna Interface Connector Antenna Diversity IEEE 802.11 Networking Standards M.2 Type 3030 M.2 Key 1-DP: 2xPCIe, USB, DP. Interface to Intel Wireless Gigabit-Antenna M10041 Module using X-FL, and one dedicated for Bluetooth X.FL On-board diversity 802.11ac, 802.11ad, 802.11abgn, 802.11a, 802.11d, 802.11e, 802.11i, 802.11h, 802.11w 0 to +80 degrees Celsius 50% to 90% RH non-condensing (at temperatures of 25 C to 35 C) 60GHz (802.11ad) 57GHz - 64GHz (dependent on country) DPSK, BPSK, QPSK, 16 QAM, DMG control PHY, DMG SC PHY 1, 2 and 3, subject to country rules Intel Wireless Gigabit Sink W13100 All data rates are theoretical maximums. Operating Temperature Humidity Frequency Modulation Frequency band Modulation Wireless Medium Channels Spatial streams Data Rates IEEE 802.11ad Data Rates 4620, 3850, 3080, 2503, 2310, 1925, 1540, 1251, 1155, 963, 770, 385 Mbps General Operating Systems Architecture Cisco Compatible Extensions certification Security Authentication Authentication Protocols Encryption Wi-Fi Direct* Encryption and Authentication Product Safety WPA and WPA2, 802.1X (EAP-TLS, TTLS, PEAP, LEAP, EAP-FAST), EAP-SIM, EAP-AKA PAP, CHAP, TLS, GTC, MS-CHAP*, MS-CHAPv2 64-bit and 128-bit WEP, AES-CCMP, AES-CGMP, TKIP WPA2, AES-CCMP Microsoft Windows 7*, Microsoft Windows 8.1* with connected standby Infrastructure and SoftAP; Supports simultaneous Client and SoftAP modes Cisco Compatible Extensions, v4.0 UL, C-UL, CB (IEC/EN 60950-1) specs.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:51 PM]

Specifications Back to Top Back to Contents Trademarks and Disclaimers specs.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:51 PM]

Important Information Back to Contents Important Information Safety Information Third Party Software Notices Safety Information It is important that you read the safety information regarding your WiFi adapter. Please see the User's Guide for safety and regulatory notices. Third Party Software Notices Portions of Intel PROSet/Wireless WiFi Connection Utility include software under the following terms:

OpenSSL License Copyright (c) 1998-2006 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"

4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact openssl-

core@openssl.org. 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project. 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES

(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Original SSLeay License Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved. safety.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:52 PM]

Important Information This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscape's SSL. This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are adhered to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: "This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)"

The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the routines from the library being used are not cryptographic related. 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson

(tjh@cryptsoft.com)"

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG "AS IS:' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The license and distribution terms for any publicly available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution license [including the GNU Public License.]

zlib.h -- interface of the 'zlib' general purpose compression library, version 1.2.3, July 18th, 2005 Copyright (C) 1995-2005 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler This software is provided 'as-is', without any express or implied warranty. In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software. Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions:

1. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote the original software. If you use this software in a product, an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required. 2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented as being the original software. 3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution. Jean-loup Gailly jloup@gzip.org Mark Adler madler@alumni.caltech.edu safety.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:52 PM]

Important Information Adapter Driver Portions of the driver include software under the following terms:

WPA Supplicant Copyright (c) 2003-2007, Jouni Malinen <jkmaline@cc.hut.fi> and contributors. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. Neither the name of Jouni Malinen nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. __________ Copyright (c) 2001, Dr Brian Gladman <brg@gladman.me.uk>, Worcester, UK. All rights reserved. LICENSE TERMS The free distribution and use of this software in both source and binary form is allowed (with or without changes) provided that:

1. Distributions of this source code include the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer;

2. distributions in binary form include the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other associated materials;

3. the copyright holder's name is not used to endorse products built using this software without specific written permission. DISCLAIMER This software is provided 'as is' with no explicit or implied warranties in respect of its properties, including, but not limited to, correctness and fitness for purpose. Issue Date: 29/07/2002 This file contains the definitions required to use AES (Rijndael) in C. Portions Licensed from Devicescape Software, Inc. Intel PROSet/Wireless WiFi Connection Utility contains software licensed from Devicescape Software, Inc. Copyright

(c) 2004 - 2008 Devicescape Software, Inc. All rights reserved.

"Odd Button" Artistic License safety.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:52 PM]

Important Information Portions of this software contain the standard version of "Odd Button" licensed under the Artistic License. The source code for "Odd Button" may be found online at http://sourceforge.net/projects/oddbutton. Back to Top Back to Contents Trademarks and Disclaimers safety.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:52 PM]

Customer Support Back to Contents Customer Support Intel support is available online or by telephone. Available services include the most up-to-date product information, installation instructions about specific products, and troubleshooting tips. Online Support Technical Support: http://www.intel.com/support Network Product Support: http://www.intel.com/network Corporate Web Site: http://www.intel.com Back to Top Back to Contents Trademarks and Disclaimers support.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:53 PM]

Warranty Information Back to Contents Warranty Information One-Year Limited Hardware Warranty Limited Warranty In this warranty statement, the term "Product" applies to the wireless adapters listed in Specifications. Intel warrants to the purchaser of the Product that the Product, if properly used and installed, will be free from defects in material and workmanship and will substantially conform to Intels publicly available specifications for the Product for a period of one (1) year beginning on the date the Product was purchased in its original sealed packaging. SOFTWARE OF ANY KIND DELIVERED WITH OR AS PART OF THE PRODUCT IS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED "AS IS", SPECIFICALLY EXCLUDING ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS, IMPLIED (INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, NON-INFRINGEMENT OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE), provided however, that Intel warrants that the media on which the software is furnished will be free from defects for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of delivery. If such a defect appears within the warranty period, you may return the defective media to Intel for replacement or alternative delivery of the software at Intel's discretion and without charge. Intel does not warrant or assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness of any information, text, graphics, links or other items contained within the software. If the Product which is the subject of this Limited Warranty fails during the warranty period for reasons covered by this Limited Warranty, Intel, at its option, will:

REPAIR the Product by means of hardware and/or software; OR REPLACE the Product with another product, OR, if Intel is unable to repair or replace the Product, REFUND the then-current Intel price for the Product at the time a claim for warranty service is made to Intel under this Limited Warranty. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY, AND ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES THAT MAY EXIST UNDER APPLICABLE STATE, NATIONAL, PROVINCIAL OR LOCAL LAW, APPLY ONLY TO YOU AS THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER OF THE PRODUCT. Extent of Limited Warranty Intel does not warrant that the Product, whether purchased stand-alone or integrated with other products, including without limitation, semi-conductor components, will be free from design defects or errors known as "errata." Current characterized errata are available upon request. Further, this Limited Warranty does NOT cover: (i) any costs associated with the replacement or repair of the Product, including labor, installation or other costs incurred by you, and in particular, any costs relating to the removal or replacement of any Product soldered or otherwise permanently affixed to any printed circuit board or integrated with other products; (ii) damage to the Product due to external causes, including accident, problems with electrical power, abnormal, mechanical or environmental conditions, usage not in accordance with product instructions, misuse, neglect, accident, abuse, alteration, repair, improper or unauthorized installation or improper testing, or (iii) any Product which has been modified or operated outside of Intels publicly available specifications or where the original product identification markings (trademark or serial number) have been removed, altered or obliterated from the Product; or (iv) issues resulting from modification (other than by Intel) of software products provided or included in the Product, (v) incorporation of software products, other than those software products provided or included in the Product by Intel, or (vi) failure to apply Intel-supplied modifications or corrections to any software provided with or included in the Product. How to Obtain Warranty Service To obtain warranty service for the Product, you may contact your original place of purchase in accordance with its instructions or you may contact Intel. To request warranty service from Intel, you must contact the Intel Customer Support ("ICS") center in your region (http://www.intel.com/support/wireless/) within the warranty period during normal business hours (local time), excluding holidays and return the Product to the designated ICS center. Please be prepared to provide: (1) your name, mailing address, email address, telephone numbers and, in the USA, valid warranty.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:53 PM]

Warranty Information credit card information; (2) proof of purchase; (3) model name and product identification number found on the Product; and (4) an explanation of the problem. The Customer Service Representative may need additional information from you depending on the nature of the problem. Upon ICS's verification that the Product is eligible for warranty service, you will be issued a Return Material Authorization ("RMA") number and provided with instructions for returning the Product to the designated ICS center. When you return the Product to the ICS center, you must include the RMA number on the outside of the package. Intel will not accept any returned Product without an RMA number, or that has an invalid RMA number, on the package. You must deliver the returned Product to the designated ICS center in the original or equivalent packaging, with shipping charges pre-paid (within the USA), and assume the risk of damage or loss during shipment. Intel may elect to repair or replace the Product with either a new or reconditioned Product or components, as Intel deems appropriate. The repaired or replaced product will be shipped to you at the expense of Intel within a reasonable period of time after receipt of the returned Product by ICS. The returned Product shall become Intels property on receipt by ICS. The replacement product is warranted under this written warranty and is subject to the same limitations of liability and exclusions for ninety (90) days or the remainder of the original warranty period, whichever is longer. If Intel replaces the Product, the Limited Warranty period for the replacement Product is not extended. WARRANTY LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS THIS WARRANTY REPLACES ALL OTHER WARRANTIES FOR THE PRODUCT AND INTEL DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, COURSE OF DEALING AND USAGE OF TRADE. Some states (or jurisdictions) do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties so this limitation may not apply to you. ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE LIMITED WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD. Some states (or jurisdictions) do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so this limitation may not apply to you. LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY INTELS RESPONSIBILITY UNDER THIS OR ANY OTHER WARRANTY, IMPLIED OR EXPRESS, IS LIMITED TO REPAIR, REPLACEMENT OR REFUND, AS SET FORTH ABOVE. THESE REMEDIES ARE THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, INTEL IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY OR UNDER ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY (INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS, DOWNTIME, LOSS OF GOODWILL, DAMAGE TO OR REPLACEMENT OF EQUIPMENT AND PROPERTY, AND ANY COSTS OF RECOVERING, REPROGRAMMING, OR REPRODUCING ANY PROGRAM OR DATA STORED IN OR USED WITH A SYSTEM CONTAINING THE PRODUCT), EVEN IF INTEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some states (or jurisdictions) do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS THAT VARY BY STATE OR JURISDICTION. ANY AND ALL DISPUTES ARISING UNDER OR RELATED TO THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SHALL BE ADJUDICATED IN THE FOLLOWING FORUMS AND GOVERNED BY THE FOLLOWING LAWS: FOR THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA, CANADA, NORTH AMERICA AND SOUTH AMERICA, THE FORUM SHALL BE SANTA CLARA, CALIFORNIA, USA AND THE APPLICABLE LAW SHALL BE THAT OF THE STATE OF DELAWARE. FOR THE ASIA PACIFIC REGION (EXCEPT FOR MAINLAND CHINA), THE FORUM SHALL BE SINGAPORE AND THE APPLICABLE LAW SHALL BE THAT OF SINGAPORE. FOR EUROPE AND THE REST OF THE WORLD, THE FORUM SHALL BE LONDON AND THE APPLICABLE LAW SHALL BE THAT OF ENGLAND AND WALES IN THE EVENT OF ANY CONFLICT BETWEEN THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE VERSION AND ANY OTHER TRANSLATED VERSION(S)OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY (WITH THE EXCEPTION OF THE SIMPLIFIED CHINESE VERSION), THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE VERSION SHALL CONTROL. IMPORTANT! UNLESS OTHERWISE AGREED IN WRITING BY INTEL, THE INTEL PRODUCTS SOLD HEREUNDER ARE NOT DESIGNED, OR INTENDED FOR USE IN ANY MEDICAL, LIFE SAVING OR LIFE SUSTAINING SYSTEMS, TRANSPORTATION SYSTEMS, NUCLEAR SYSTEMS, OR FOR ANY OTHER MISSION CRITICAL APPLICATION IN WHICH THE FAILURE OF THE INTEL PRODUCT COULD CREATE A SITUATION WHERE PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH MAY OCCUR. WEEE warranty.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:53 PM]

Warranty Information Back to Top Back to Contents Trademarks and Disclaimers warranty.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:53 PM]

Glossary Back to Contents Glossary Term 802.11 802.11a 802.11b 802.11g 802.11n 802.1X AAA Server Definition The 802.11 standard refers to a family of specifications developed by the IEEE for wireless LAN technology. The 802.11 specifies an over-the-air interface between a wireless client and a base station or between two wireless clients and provides 1 or 2 Mbps transmission in the 2.4 GHz band using either frequency hopping spread spectrum (FHSS) or direct sequence spread spectrum (DSSS). The 802.11a standard specifies a maximum data transfer rate of 54 Mbps and an operating frequency of 5 GHz. The 802.11a standard uses the Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing

(OFDM) transmission method. Additionally, the 802.11a standard supports 802.11 features such as WEP encryption for security. 802.11b is an extension to 802.11 that applies to wireless networks and provides 11 Mbps transmission (with a fallback to 5.5, 2 and 1 Mbps) in the 2.4 GHz band. 802.11b uses only DSSS. Throughput data rate 5+ Mbps in the 2.4 GHz band. The 802.11g standard specifies a maximum data transfer rate of 54 Mbps, an operating frequency of 2.4GHz, and WEP encryption for security. 802.11g networks are also referred to as Wi-Fi*

networks. A task group of the IEEE 802.11 committee has defined a new draft specification that provides for increased throughput speeds of up to 540 Mbps. The specification provides for Multiple-Input-

Multiple-Output (MIMO) technology, or using multiple receivers and multiple transmitters in both the client and access point, to achieve improved performance. 802.1X is the IEEE Standard for Port-Based Network Access Control. This is used in conjunction with EAP methods to provide access control to wired and wireless networks. Authentication, Authorization and Accounting Server. A system to control access to computer resources and track user activity. A device that connects wireless devices to another network. For example, a wireless LAN, Internet modem or others. Access Point

(AP) Ad Hoc Network A communication configuration in which every computer has the same capabilities, and any AES-CCMP computer can initiate a communication session. Also known as a peer-to-peer network, a device to device network or a computer-to-computer network. Advanced Encryption Standard - Counter CBC-MAC Protocol is the new method for privacy protection of wireless transmissions specified in the IEEE 802.11i standard. AES-CCMP provides a stronger encryption method than TKIP. The AES algorithm is capable of using cryptographic keys of 128, 192, and 256 bits to encrypt and decrypt data in 128-bit blocks. AES-CCMP uses the AES block cipher, but restricts the key length to 128 bits. AES-CCMP incorporates two sophisticated cryptographic techniques (counter mode and CBC-MAC) to provide improved security between the mobile client and the access point. Available network Authentication Verifies the identity of a user logging onto a network. Passwords, digital certificates, smart cards and biometrics are used to prove the identity of the client to the network. Passwords and digital certificates are also used to identify the network to the client. One of the networks listed under Available networks on the Wireless Networks tab of the Wireless Network Connection Properties (Windows* XP environment). Any wireless network that is broadcasting and is within receiving range of the WiFi adapter appears on the list. Bit Error Rate. The ratio of errors to the total number of bits being sent in a data transmission from one location to another. The total number of bits (ones and zeros) per second that a network connection can support. Note that this bit rate will vary, under software control, with different signal path conditions. Bit Rate BER Broadcast SSID Used to allow an access point to respond to clients on a wireless network by sending probes. BSSID A unique identifier for each wireless client on a wireless network. The Basic Service Set Identifier

(BSSID) is the Ethernet MAC address of each adapter on the network. glossary.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:53 PM]

Glossary CA (Certificate Authority) CCX (Cisco Compatible eXtension) Certificate CKIP A corporate certification authority implemented on a server. In addition, Internet Explorer's certificate can import a certificate from a file. A trusted CA certificate is stored in the root store. Cisco Compatible Extensions Program ensures that devices used on Cisco wireless LAN infrastructure meet the security, management and roaming requirements. Used for client authentication. A certificate is registered on the authentication server (for example, RADIUS server) and used by the authenticator. Cisco Key Integrity Protocol (CKIP) is a Cisco proprietary security protocol for encryption in 802.11 media. CKIP uses a key message integrity check and message sequence number to improve 802.11 security in infrastructure mode. CKIP is Cisco's version of TKIP. Client computer The computer that gets its Internet connection by sharing either the host computer's connection DSSS EAP EAP-AKA EAP-FAST EAP-GTC EAP-OTP EAP-SIM or the access point's connection. Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum. Technology used in radio transmission. Incompatible with FHSS. Short for Extensible Authentication Protocol, EAP sits inside of Point-to-Point Protocol's (PPP) authentication protocol and provides a generalized framework for several different authentication methods. EAP is supposed to head off proprietary authentication systems and let everything from passwords to challenge-response tokens and public-key infrastructure certificates all work smoothly. EAP-AKA (Extensible Authentication Protocol Method for UMTS Authentication and Key Agreement) is an EAP mechanism for authentication and session key distribution, using the Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) Subscriber Identity Module (USIM). The USIM card is a special smart card used with cellular networks to validate a given user with the network. EAP-FAST, like EAP-TTLS and PEAP, uses tunneling to protect traffic. The main difference is that EAP-FAST does not use certificates to authenticate. Provisioning in EAP-FAST is negotiated solely by the client as the first communication exchange when EAP-FAST is requested from the server. If the client does not have a pre-shared secret Protected Access Credential (PAC), it can request to initiate a provisioning EAP-FAST exchange to dynamically obtain one from the server. EAP-FAST documents two methods to deliver the PAC: manual delivery through an out-of-band secure mechanism, and automatic provisioning. Manual delivery mechanisms can be any delivery mechanism that the administrator of the network feels is sufficiently secure for their network. Automatic provisioning establishes an encrypted tunnel to protect the authentication of the client and the delivery of the PAC to the client. This mechanism, while not as secure as a manual method may be, is more secure than the authentication method used in LEAP. The EAP-FAST method can be divided into two parts: provisioning, and authentication. The provisioning phase involves the initial delivery of the PAC to the client. This phase only needs to be performed once per client and user. The EAP-GTC (Generic Token Card) is similar to the EAP-OTP except with hardware token cards. The request contains a displayable message, and the response contains the string read from the hardware token card. EAP-OTP (One-Time Password) is similar to MD5, except it uses the OTP as the response. The request contains a displayable message. The OTP method is defined in RFC 2289. Extensible Authentication Protocol-Subscriber Identity Module (EAP-SIM) authentication can be used with:

Network Authentication types: Open, Shared, and WPA*-Enterprise, WPA2*-Enterprise. Data Encryption types: None, WEP and CKIP. A SIM card is a special smart card that is used by Global System for Mobile Communications

(GSM) based digital cellular networks. The SIM card is used to validate your credentials with the glossary.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:53 PM]

Glossary EAP-TLS EAP-TTLS Encryption FHSS network A type of authentication method that uses EAP and a security protocol called the Transport Layer Security (TLS). EAP-TLS uses certificates that use passwords. EAP-TLS authentication supports dynamic WEP key management. A type of authentication method that uses EAP and Tunneled Transport Layer Security (TTLS). EAP-TTLS uses a combination of certificates and another security method such as passwords. Scrambling data so that only the authorized recipient can read it. Usually a key is needed to interpret the data. Frequency-Hop Spread Spectrum. Technology used in radio transmission. Incompatible with DSSS. A capability that allows a number of people to view, modify, and print the same file(s) from different computers. The threshold at which the wireless adapter breaks the packet into multiple frames. This determines the packet size and affects the throughput of the transmission. A unit of frequency equal to 1,000,000,000 cycles per second. File and printer sharing Fragmentation threshold GHz

(Gigahertz) Host computer The computer that is directly connected to the Internet via a modem or network adapter. Infrastructure network A wireless network centered around an access point. In this environment, the access point not only provides communication with the wired network, but also mediates wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an organization involved in defining computing and communications standards. The address of a computer that is attached to a network. Part of the address designates which network the computer is on, and the other part represents the host identification. IEEE A high-speed, low-error data network covering a relatively small geographic area. A version of Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP). LEAP is a proprietary extensible authentication protocol developed by Cisco that provides a challenge-response authentication mechanism and dynamic key assignment. A hardwired address applied at the factory. It uniquely identifies network hardware, such as a wireless adapter, on a LAN or WAN. Internet Protocol (IP) address LAN (Local Area Network) LEAP (Light Extensible Authentication Protocol) MAC (Media Access Control) Address Mbps

(Megabits-per-

second) MHz

(Megahertz) MIC (Michael) Message Integrity Check (commonly called Michael). MS-CHAP Transmission speed of 1,000,000 bits per second. A unit of frequency equal to 1,000,000 cycles per second. An EAP mechanism used by the client. Microsoft Challenge Authentication Protocol (MS-CHAP) Version 2, is used over an encrypted channel to enable server validation. The challenge and response packets are sent over a non-exposed TLS encrypted channel. ns(Nanosecond) 1 billionth (1/1,000,000,000) of a second. OFDM Open authentication PEAP Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing. Allows any device network access. If encryption is not enabled on the network, any device that knows the Service Set Identifier (SSID) of the access point can gain access to the network. Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol (PEAP) is an Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) draft protocol sponsored by Microsoft, Cisco, and RSA Security. PEAP creates an encrypted tunnel similar to the tunnel used in secure web pages (SSL). Inside the encrypted tunnel, a number of other EAP authentication methods can be used to perform client authentication. PEAP requires a glossary.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:53 PM]

Glossary Peer-to-Peer mode Power save mode Preferred network RADIUS

(Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service) RF (Radio Frequency) Roaming RTS threshold Shared key SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) Silent mode TLS certificate on the RADIUS server, but unlike EAP-TLS there is no requirement to have a certificate on the client. PEAP has not been ratified by the IETF. The IETF is currently comparing PEAP and TTLS (Tunneled TLS) to determine an authentication standard for 802.1X authentication in 802.11 wireless systems. PEAP is an authentication type designed to take advantage of server-

side EAP-Transport Layer Security (EAP-TLS) and to support various authentication methods, including user passwords and one-time passwords, and Generic Token Cards. A wireless network structure that allows wireless clients to communicate directly with each other without using an access point. The state in which the radio is periodically powered down to conserve power. When the portable computer is in Power Save mode, received packets are stored in the access point until the wireless adapter wakes up. One of the networks that has been configured. Such networks are listed under Preferred networks on the Wireless Networks tab of the Wireless Network Connection Properties (Windows* XP environment). RADIUS is an authentication and accounting system that verifies user's credentials and grants access to requested resources. The international unit for measuring frequency is Hertz (Hz), which is equivalent to the older unit of cycles per second. One MegaHertz (MHz) is one million Hertz. One GigaHertz (GHz) is one billion Hertz. For reference: the standard US electrical power frequency is 60 Hz, the AM broadcast radio frequency band is 0.55 -1.6 MHz, the FM broadcast radio frequency band is 88-

108 MHz, and microwave ovens typically operate at 2.45 GHz. Movement of a wireless node between two micro cells. Roaming usually occurs in infrastructure networks built around multiple access points. Current wireless network roaming is only supported in the same subnet of a network. The number of frames in the data packet at or above which an RTS/CTS (request to send/clear to send) handshake is turned on before the packet is sent. The default value is 2347. An encryption key known only to the receiver and sender of data. This is also referred to as a pre-

shared key. A SIM card is used to validate credentials with the network. A SIM card is a special smart card used by GSM-based digital cellular networks. Silent Mode Access Points or Wireless Routers have been configured to not broadcast the SSID for the wireless network. This makes it necessary to know the SSID in order to configure the wireless profile to connect to the access point or wireless router. Single Sign On Single Sign On feature set allows the 802.1X credentials to match your Windows log on user name SSID (Service Set Identifier) stealth TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) and password credentials for wireless network connections. SSID or network name is a value that controls access to a wireless network. The SSID for your wireless network card must match the SSID for any access point that you want to connect with. If the value does not match, you are not granted access to the network. Each SSID may be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long and is case-sensitive. A stealth access point is one that has the capability and is configured to not broadcast its SSID. This is the WiFi network name that appears when a DMU (Device Management Utility, such as Intel PROSet/Wireless WiFi Connection Utility) scans for available wireless networks. Although this can enhance wireless network security, it is commonly considered a weak security feature. To connect to a stealth access point, a user must specifically know the SSID and configure their DMU accordingly. The feature is not a part of the 802.11 specification, and is known by differing names by various vendors: closed mode, private network, SSID broadcasting. Temporal Key Integrity protocol improves data encryption. Wi-Fi Protected Access* uses its TKIP. TKIP provides important data encryption enhancements including a re-keying method. TKIP is part of the IEEE 802.11i encryption standard for wireless networks. TKIP is the next generation of WEP, the Wired Equivalency Protocol, which is used to secure 802.11 wireless networks. TKIP provides per packet key mixing, a message integrity check and a re-keying mechanism, thus glossary.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:53 PM]

Glossary TLS (Transport Layer Security) TTLS (Tunneled Transport Layer Security) WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) WEP Key Wi-Fi*

(Wireless Fidelity) WiMAX fixing the flaws of WEP. A type of authentication method using the Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) and a security protocol called the Transport Layer Security (TLS). EAP-TLS uses certificates which use passwords. EAP-TLS authentication supports dynamic WEP key management. The TLS protocol is intended to secure and authenticate communications across a public network through data encryption. The TLS Handshake Protocol allows the server and client to provide mutual authentication and to negotiate an encryption algorithm and cryptographic keys before data is transmitted. These settings define the protocol and the credentials used to authenticate a user. In TTLS, the client uses EAP-TLS to validate the server and create a TLS-encrypted channel between the client and server. The client can use another authentication protocol. Typically password-based protocols challenge over this encrypted channel to enable server validation. The challenge and response packets are sent over a non-exposed TLS encrypted channel. TTLS implementations today support all methods defined by EAP, as well as several older methods (CHAP, PAP, MS-

CHAP and MS-CHAP-V2). TTLS can easily be extended to work with new protocols by defining new attributes to support new protocols. Wired Equivalent Privacy, 64- and 128-bit (64-bit is sometimes referred to as 40-bit). This is a low-level encryption technique designed to give the user about the same amount of privacy that he would expect from a LAN. WEP is a security protocol for wireless local area networks (WLANs) defined in the 802.11b standard. WEP is designed to provide the same level of security as that of a wired LAN. WEP aims to provide security by data over radio waves so that it is protected as it is transmitted from one end point to another. Either a pass phrase or hexadecimal key. The pass phrase must be 5 ASCII characters for 64-bit WEP or 13 ASCII characters for 128-bit WEP. For pass phrases, 0-9, a-z, A-Z, and ~!@#$%^&*()_+|`-={}|[]\:";'<>?,./ are all valid characters. The hex key must be 10 hexadecimal characters (0-9, A-F) for 64-bit WEP or 26 hexadecimal characters (0-9, A-F) for 128-bit WEP. Is meant to be used generically when referring of any type to 802.11 network, whether 802.11b, 802.11a, or dual-band. WiMAX, the Worldwide Interoperability for Microwave Access, is a telecommunications technology aimed at providing wireless data over long distances in a variety of ways, from point-to-point links to full mobile cellular type access. It is based on the IEEE 802.16 standard. The name WiMAX was created by the WiMAX Forum, which was formed in June 2001 to promote conformance and interoperability of the standard. The forum describes WiMAX as "a standards-

based technology enabling the delivery of last mile wireless broadband access as an alternative to cable and DSL."

Wireless router A stand-alone wireless hub that allows any computer that has a wireless network adapter to communicate with another computer within the same network and to connect to the Internet. A type of local-area network that uses high-frequency radio waves rather than wires to communicate between nodes. This is a security enhancement that strongly increases the level of data protection and access control to a wireless network. WPA is an interim standard that will be replaced with the IEEE's 802.11i standard upon its completion. WPA consists of RC4 and TKIP and provides support for BSS (Infrastructure) mode only. WPA and WPA2 are compatible. This is the second generation of WPA that complies with the IEEE TGi specification. WPA2 consists of AES encryption, pre-authentication and PMKID caching. It provides support for BSS

(Infrastructure) mode and IBSS (ad hoc) mode. WPA and WPA2 are compatible. WPA2* (Wi-Fi Protected Access 2) WPA-Enterprise Wi-Fi Protected Access-Enterprise applies to corporate users. A new standards-based, interoperable security technology for wireless LAN (subset of IEEE 802.11i draft standard) that encrypts data sent over radio waves. WPA is a Wi-Fi standard that was designed to improve upon the security features of WEP as follows:

Improved data encryption through the temporal key integrity protocol (TKIP). TKIP uses a glossary.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:53 PM]

WLAN (Wireless Local-Area Network) WPA* (Wi-Fi Protected Access) Glossary hashing algorithm to scramble the encryption keys and adds an integrity-checking feature to ensure that the keys have not been tampered with. User authentication, which is generally missing in WEP, through the extensible authentication protocol (EAP). WEP regulates access to a wireless network based on a computer's hardware-specific MAC address, which is relatively simple to be sniffed out and stolen. EAP is built on a more secure public-key encryption system to ensure that only authorized network users can access the network. WPA is an interim standard that will be replaced with the IEEE's 802.11i standard upon its completion. WPA-Personal Wi-Fi Protected Access-Personal provides a level of security in the small network or home WPA-PSK (Wi-Fi Protected-

Access Pre-

Shared Key) environment. WPA-PSK mode does not use an authentication server. It can be used with the data encryption types WEP or TKIP. WPA-PSK requires configuration of a pre-shared key (PSK). You must enter a pass phrase or 64 hex characters for a pre-shared key of length 256-bits. The data encryption key is derived from the PSK. Back to Top Back to Contents Trademarks and Disclaimers glossary.htm[4/10/2015 2:35:53 PM]

E11646 First Edition July 2016 E-Manual COPYRIGHT INFORMATION No part of this manual, including the products and software described in it, may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form or by any means, except documentation kept by the purchaser for backup purposes, without the express written permission of ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. (ASUS). ASUS PROVIDES THIS MANUAL AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL ASUS, ITS DIRECTORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES

(INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF USE OR DATA, INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS AND THE LIKE), EVEN IF ASUS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES ARISING FROM ANY DEFECT OR ERROR IN THIS MANUAL OR PRODUCT. Products and corporate names appearing in this manual may or may not be registered trademarks or copyrights of their respective companies, and are used only for identification or explanation and to the owners benefit, without intent to infringe. SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL ARE FURNISHED FOR INFORMATIONAL USE ONLY, AND ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE, AND SHOULD NOT BE CONSTRUED AS A COMMITMENT BY ASUS. ASUS ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY FOR ANY ERRORS OR INACCURACIES THAT MAY APPEAR IN THIS MANUAL, INCLUDING THE PRODUCTS AND SOFTWARE DESCRIBED IN IT. Copyright 2016 ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY Circumstances may arise where because of a default on ASUS part or other liability, you are entitled to recover damages from ASUS. In each such instance, regardless of the basis on which you are entitled to claim damages from ASUS, ASUS is liable for no more than damages for bodily injury (including death) and damage to real property and tangible personal property; or any other actual and direct damages resulted from omission or failure of performing legal duties under this Warranty Statement, up to the listed contract price of each product. ASUS will only be responsible for or indemnify you for loss, damages or claims based in contract, tort or infringement under this Warranty Statement. This limit also applies to ASUS suppliers and its reseller. It is the maximum for which ASUS, its suppliers, and your reseller are collectively responsible. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES IS ASUS LIABLE FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING: (1) THIRD-PARTY CLAIMS AGAINST YOU FOR DAMAGES; (2) LOSS OF, OR DAMAGE TO, YOUR RECORDS OR DATA; OR (3) SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR INDIRECT DAMAGES OR FOR ANY ECONOMIC CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS), EVEN IF ASUS, ITS SUPPLIERS OR YOUR RESELLER IS INFORMED OF THEIR POSSIBILITY. SERVICE AND SUPPORT Visit our multi-language website at https://www.asus.com/support/

2 Notebook PC E-Manual Table of Contents About this manual .....................................................................................................7 Conventions used in this manual .............................................................................8 Icons ....................................................................................................................................8 Typography .......................................................................................................................8 Safety precautions .....................................................................................................9 Using your Notebook PC ..............................................................................................9 Caring for your Notebook PC .....................................................................................10 Proper disposal ................................................................................................................11 Chapter 1: Hardware Setup Getting to know your Notebook PC ...................................................................14 Top View .............................................................................................................................14 Bottom ................................................................................................................................18 Right Side ..........................................................................................................................19 Left Side .............................................................................................................................22 Chapter 2: Using your Notebook PC Getting started ...........................................................................................................24 Charge your Notebook PC ...........................................................................................24 Lift to open the display panel ....................................................................................26 Press the power button ................................................................................................26 Using the touchpad .......................................................................................................27 Using the keyboard ...................................................................................................34 Function keys ...................................................................................................................34 Windows 10 keys ..........................................................................................................35 3 Notebook PC E-Manual Chapter 3: Working with Windows 10 Starting for the first time .........................................................................................38 Start menu ...................................................................................................................39 Windows apps ..........................................................................................................41 Working with Windows apps....................................................................................42 Customizing Windows apps .....................................................................................42 Task view .......................................................................................................................45 Snap feature ................................................................................................................46 Snap hotspots ..................................................................................................................46 Action Center ..............................................................................................................48 Other keyboard shortcuts ......................................................................................49 Connecting to wireless networks ........................................................................51 Wi-Fi .....................................................................................................................................51 Bluetooth ...........................................................................................................................52 Airplane mode .................................................................................................................53 Turning your Notebook PC off ..............................................................................54 Putting your Notebook PC to sleep ....................................................................55 Chapter 4: Power-On Self-Test (POST) The Power-On Self-Test (POST) .............................................................................58 Using POST to access BIOS and Troubleshoot......................................................58 BIOS ................................................................................................................................58 Accessing BIOS ................................................................................................................58 BIOS Settings ....................................................................................................................59 Recovering your system ..........................................................................................69 Performing a recovery option ....................................................................................70 4 Notebook PC E-Manual Tips and FAQs Useful tips for your Notebook PC ........................................................................74 Hardware FAQs ...........................................................................................................75 Software FAQs .............................................................................................................78 Appendices DVD-ROM Drive Information ......................................................................................82 Blu-ray ROM Drive Information .................................................................................84 Internal Modem Compliancy .....................................................................................84 Overview ............................................................................................................................85 Network Compatibility Declaration .........................................................................85 Non-Voice Equipment ...................................................................................................85 Federal Communications Commission Interference Statement ...................88 FCC Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure Caution Statement .................................89 RF Exposure Information (SAR) ..................................................................................89 RF Exposure warning .....................................................................................................89 CE Mark Warning .............................................................................................................90 RF Exposure information (SAR) - CE .........................................................................90 IC Radiation Exposure Statement for Canada ......................................................91 Dclaration dIndustrie Canada relative lexposition aux ondes radio ....92 Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure Information ........................................................93 Informations concernant lexposition aux tilizeive radio (RF) ........................94 Radiation Exposure Statement ..................................................................................95 Dclaration d'exposition aux radiations.................................................................95 Wireless Operation Channel for Different Domains ...........................................96 France Restricted Wireless Frequency Bands .......................................................96 UL Safety Notices ............................................................................................................98 Power Safety Requirement ..........................................................................................99 TV Notices .........................................................................................................................99 5 Notebook PC E-Manual REACH .................................................................................................................................99 Macrovision Corporation Product Notice ..............................................................99 Prevention of Hearing Loss .........................................................................................99 Nordic Lithium Cautions (for lithium-ion batteries) ...........................................100 Optical Drive Safety Information ..............................................................................101 CTR 21 Approval (for Notebook PC with built-in Modem) ..............................102 ENERGY STAR complied product ..............................................................................104 Global Environmental Regulation Compliance and Declaration ..................104 ASUS Recycling/Takeback Services ..........................................................................105 Rechargeable Battery Recycling Service in North America.............................105 Regional notice for California .....................................................................................105 Regional notice for Singapore ...................................................................................105 Regional notice for India ..............................................................................................106 Notices for removable batteries ................................................................................106 Avis concernant les batteries remplaables..........................................................106 National Telecommunications Commission of the Philippines .....................106 6 Notebook PC E-Manual About this manual This manual provides information about the hardware and software features of your Notebook PC, organized through the following chapters:

Chapter 1: Hardware Setup This chapter details the hardware components of your Notebook PC. Chapter 2: Using your Notebook PC This chapter shows you how to use the different parts of your Notebook PC. Chapter 3: Working with Windows 10 This chapter provides an overview of using Windows 10 in your Notebook PC. Chapter 4: Power-On Self-Test (POST) This chapter shows you how to use POST to change the settings of your Notebook PC. Tips and FAQs This section presents some recommended tips, hardware FAQs, and software FAQs you can refer to for maintaining and fixing common issues with your Notebook PC. Appendices This section includes notices and safety statements for your Notebook PC. 7 Notebook PC E-Manual Conventions used in this manual To highlight key information in this manual, some text are presented as follows:

IMPORTANT! This message contains vital information that must be followed to complete a task. NOTE: This message contains additional information and tips that can help complete tasks. WARNING! This message contains important information that must be followed to keep you safe while performing tasks and prevent damage to your Notebook PC's data and components. Icons The icons below indicate the devices you can use for completing a series of tasks or procedures on your Notebook PC.

= Use the touchpad.

= Use the keyboard. Typography Bold

= This indicates a menu or an item that must be selected. Italic

= This indicates sections that you can refer to in this manual. 8 Notebook PC E-Manual Safety precautions Using your Notebook PC This Notebook PC should only be used in environments with ambient temperatures between 5C (41F) and 35C (95F). Refer to the rating label on the bottom of your Notebook PC and ensure that your power adapter complies with this rating. Do not leave your Notebook PC on your lap or near any part of your body to prevent discomfort or injury from heat exposure. Do not use damaged power cords, accessories, and other peripherals with your Notebook PC. While powered on, ensure that you do not carry or cover your Notebook PC with any materials that can reduce air circulation. Do not place your Notebook PC on uneven or unstable work surfaces. You can send your Notebook PC through x-ray machines (used on items placed on conveyor belts), but do not expose them to magnetic detectors and wands. Contact your airline provider to learn about related in-flight services that can be used and restrictions that must be followed when using your Notebook PC in-flight. 9 Notebook PC E-Manual Caring for your Notebook PC Disconnect the AC power and remove the battery pack (if applicable) before cleaning your Notebook PC. Use a clean cellulose sponge or chamois cloth dampened with a solution of nonabrasive detergent and a few drops of warm water. Remove any extra moisture from your Notebook PC using a dry cloth. Do not use strong solvents such as thinners, benzene, or other chemicals on or near your Notebook PC. Do not place objects on top of your Notebook PC. Do not expose your Notebook PC to strong magnetic or electrical fields. Do not use or expose your Notebook PC near liquids, rain, or moisture. Do not expose your Notebook PC to dusty environments. Do not use your Notebook PC near gas leaks. 10 Notebook PC E-Manual Proper disposal Do not throw your Notebook PC in municipal waste. This product has been designed to enable proper reuse of parts and recycling. The symbol of the crossed out wheeled bin indicates that the product

(electrical, electronic equipment and mercury-

containing button cell battery) should not be placed in municipal waste. Check local regulations for disposal of electronic products. Do not throw the battery in municipal waste. The symbol of the crossed out wheeled bin indicates that the battery should not be placed in municipal waste. 11 Notebook PC E-Manual 12 Notebook PC E-Manual Chapter 1:

Hardware Setup 13 Notebook PC E-Manual Getting to know your Notebook PC Top View NOTE: The keyboard's layout may vary per region or country. The Notebook view may also vary in appearance depending on the Notebook PC model. 14 Notebook PC E-Manual Array microphones The array microphones feature echo canceling, noise suppression, and beam forming functions for better voice recognition and audio recording. Ambient light sensor The ambient light sensor detects the amount of ambient light in your environment. It allows the system to automatically adjust the brightness of the display depending on the ambient light condition. Camera The built-in camera allows you to take pictures or record videos using your Notebook PC. Camera indicator The camera indicator lights up when the built-in camera is in use. Display panel This high-definition display panel provides excellent viewing features for photos, videos, and other multimedia files on your Notebook PC. Airplane mode indicator This indicator lights up when the Airplane mode in your Notebook PC is enabled. NOTE: When enabled, the Airplane mode disables all wireless connectivity. 15 Notebook PC E-Manual Keyboard The keyboard provides full-sized QWERTY keys with a comfortable travel depth for typing. It also enables you to use the function keys, allows quick access to Windows, and controls other multimedia functions. NOTE: The keyboard layout differs by model or territory. Capital lock indicator This indicator lights up when the capital lock function is activated. Using capital lock allows you to type capitalized letters

(such as A, B, C) using your Notebook PCs keyboard. Touchpad The touchpad allows the use of multi-gestures to navigate onscreen, providing an intuitive user experience. It also simulates the functions of a regular mouse. NOTE: For more details, refer to the Using the touchpad section in this manual. 16 Notebook PC E-Manual Power button Press the power button to turn your Notebook PC on or off. You can also use the power button to put your Notebook PC to sleep or hibernate mode and wake it up from sleep or hibernate mode. In the event that your Notebook PC becomes unresponsive, press and hold the power button for at least four (4) seconds until your Notebook PC shuts down. Power indicator The power indicator lights up when the Notebook PC is turned on and blinks slowly when the Notebook PC is in sleep mode. Fingerprint sensor (on selected models) This built-in fingerprint sensor captures your fingerprint and uses it as biometric authentication for logging on to your Notebook PCs system. 17 Notebook PC E-Manual Bottom NOTE: The bottom side may vary in appearance depending on model. WARNING! The bottom of the Notebook PC can get warm to hot while in use or while charging the battery pack. When working on your Notebook PC, do not place it on surfaces that can block the vents. IMPORTANT! Battery time varies by usage and by the specifications for this Notebook PC. The battery pack cannot be disassembled. Audio speakers The built-in audio speakers allow you to hear audio straight from your Notebook PC. Audio features are software-controlled. 18 Notebook PC E-Manual Right Side Status indicators The status indicators help identify the current hardware status of your Notebook PC. Power indicator The power indicator lights up when the Notebook PC is turned on and blinks slowly when the Notebook PC is in sleep mode. Two-color battery charge indicator The two-color LED provides a visual indication of the batterys charge status. Refer to the following table for details:

19 Notebook PC E-Manual Color Solid Green Solid Orange Blinking Orange Lights off Status The Notebook PC is plugged to a power source and the battery power is between 95% and 100%. The Notebook PC is plugged to a power source, charging its battery, and the battery power is less than 95%. The Notebook PC is running on battery mode and the battery power is less than 10%. The Notebook PC is running on battery mode and the battery power is between 10% to 100%. Micro HDMI port This port is for the micro HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) connector and is HDCP compliant for HD DVD, Blu-ray, and other protected content playback. USB Type-C port The USB (Universal Serial Bus) Type-C port provides a transfer rate of up to 5 Gbit/s and is backward compatible to USB 2.0. NOTE: Transfer rate of this port may vary per model. 20 Notebook PC E-Manual USB 3.0 port with USB Charger+

The USB 3.0 (Universal Serial Bus 3.0) port provides a transfer rate of up to 5 Gbit/s and is backward compatible to USB 2.0. The icon indicates this ports USB Charger+ feature which allows you to quick-charge mobile devices. Power (DC) input port Insert the bundled power adapter into this port to charge the battery pack and supply power to your Notebook PC. WARNING! The adapter may become warm to hot while in use. Do not cover the adapter and keep it away from your body while it is connected to a power source. IMPORTANT! Use only the bundled power adapter to charge the battery pack and supply power to your Notebook PC. 21 Notebook PC E-Manual Left Side USB 3.0 port The USB 3.0 (Universal Serial Bus 3.0) port provides a transfer rate of up to 5 Gbit/s and is backward compatible to USB 2.0. Headphone/Headset jack This port allows you to connect amplified speakers or headphones. You can also use this port to connect your headset. NOTE: This port does not support three-conductor 3.5 mm microphones. Memory card reader This built-in memory card reader supports SD and SDXC card formats. 22 Notebook PC E-Manual Chapter 2:

Using your Notebook PC 23 Notebook PC E-Manual Getting started Charge your Notebook PC A. B. Plug the AC power adapter into a 100V~240V power source. Connect the DC power connector into your Notebook PCs power

(DC) input port. Charge the Notebook PC for 3 hours before using it in battery mode for the first time. NOTE: The power adapter may vary in appearance, depending on models and your region. IMPORTANT!

Power adapter information:

Input voltage: 100-240Vac Input frequency: 50/60Hz Rating output current: 2.37A max. (45W) Rating output voltage: 19V 24 Notebook PC E-Manual IMPORTANT!

Locate the input/output rating label on your Notebook PC and ensure that it matches the input/output rating information on your power adapter. Some Notebook PC models may have multiple rating output currents based on the available SKU. Ensure that your Notebook PC is connected to the power adapter before turning it on for the first time. We strongly recommend that you use a grounded wall socket while using your Notebook PC on power adapter mode. The socket outlet must be easily accessible and near your Notebook PC. To disconnect your Notebook PC from its main power supply, unplug your Notebook PC from the power socket. WARNING!

Read the following precautions for your Notebook PCs battery:

Only ASUS-authorized technicians should remove the battery inside the device (for non-removable battery only). The battery used in this device may present a risk of fire or chemical burn if removed or disassembled. Follow the warning labels for your personal safety. Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Do not dispose of in fire. Never attempt to short-circuit your Notebook PCs battery. Never attempt to disassemble and reassemble the battery

(for non-removable battery only). Discontinue usage if leakage is found. The battery and its components must be recycled or disposed of properly. Keep the battery and other small components away from children. 25 Notebook PC E-Manual Lift to open the display panel Press the power button 26 Notebook PC E-Manual Using the touchpad Moving the pointer You can tap anywhere on the touchpad to activate its pointer, then slide your finger on the touchpad to move the pointer onscreen. Slide horizontally Slide vertically Slide diagonally 27 Notebook PC E-Manual One-finger gestures Tap/Double-tap Tap an app to select it. Double-tap an app to launch it. Drag and drop Double-tap an item, then slide the same finger without lifting it off the touchpad. To drop the item to its new location, lift your finger from the touchpad. 28 Notebook PC E-Manual Left-click Right-click Click an app to select it. Double-click an app to launch it. Click this button to open the right-

click menu. NOTE: The areas inside the dotted line represent the locations of the left mouse button and the right mouse button on the touchpad. Two-finger gestures Tap Tap two fingers on the touchpad to simulate the right-click function. 29 Notebook PC E-Manual Two-finger scroll (up/down) Two-finger scroll (left/right) Slide two fingers to scroll up or down. Slide two fingers to scroll left or right. Zoom out Zoom in Bring together your two fingers on the touchpad. Spread apart your two fingers on the touchpad. 30 Notebook PC E-Manual Drag and drop Select an item then press and hold the left button. Using your other finger, slide on the touchpad to drag the item, lift your finger off the button to drop the item. Three-finger gestures Tap Tap three fingers on the touchpad to invoke Cortana. 31 Notebook PC E-Manual Swipe left/Swipe right If you opened multiple apps, swipe three fingers left or right to switch between these apps. Swipe up Swipe down Swipe up to see an overview of all the apps currently opened. Swipe down to show the desktop. 32 Notebook PC E-Manual Four-finger gestures Tap Tap four fingers on the touchpad to invoke Action Center. Customizing your touchpad 1. 2. 3. Launch All settings from the Action Center. Select Devices, then select Mouse & touchpad. Adjust the settings to your preference. 33 Notebook PC E-Manual Using the keyboard Function keys The function keys on your Notebook PCs keyboard can trigger the following commands:

Puts the Notebook PC into Sleep mode Turns Airplane mode on or off NOTE: When enabled, the Airplane mode disables all wireless connectivity. Decreases brightness for the backlit keyboard*

Increases brightness for the backlit keyboard*

Decreases display brightness Increases display brightness

* On selected models 34 Notebook PC E-Manual Turns the display panel on or off Toggles the display mode NOTE: Ensure that the second display is connected to your Notebook PC. Enables or disables the touchpad Turns the speaker on or off Turns the speaker volume down Turns the speaker volume up Launches the ASUS Touchpad Handwriting*

* On selected models Windows 10 keys There are two special Windows keys on your Notebook PCs keyboard used as below:

Launches the Start menu Displays the drop-down menu 35 Notebook PC E-Manual 36 Notebook PC E-Manual Chapter 3:

Working with Windows 10 37 Notebook PC E-Manual Starting for the first time When you start your Notebook PC for the first time, a series of screens appear to guide you in configuring your Windows 10 operating system. To start your Notebook PC for the first time:

1. 2. 3. 4. Press the power button on your Notebook PC. Wait for a few minutes until the setup screen appears. From the setup screen, pick your region and a language to use on your Notebook PC. Carefully read the License Terms. Select I accept. Follow the onscreen instructions to configure the following basic items:

Personalize Get online Settings Your account 5. After configuring the basic items, Windows 10 proceeds to install your apps and preferred settings. Ensure that your Notebook PC is kept powered on during the setup process. 6. Once the setup process is complete, the Desktop appears. NOTE: The screenshots in this chapter are for reference only. 38 Notebook PC E-Manual Start menu The Start menu is the main gateway to your Notebook PCs programs, Windows apps, folders, and settings. Change account settings, lock, or sign out from your account Launch an app from the Start screen Launch Taskview Launch an app from the taskbar Launch Search Launch the Start menu Launch All apps Shut down, restart, or put your Notebook PC to sleep Launch Settings Launch File Explorer You can use the Start menu to do these common activities:

Start programs or Windows apps Open commonly used programs or Windows apps Adjust Notebook PC settings Get help with the Windows operating system Turn off your Notebook PC Log off from Windows or switch to a different user account 39 Notebook PC E-Manual Launching the Start menu Position your mouse pointer over the Start button in the lower-left corner of your desktop then click it. Press the Windows logo key on your keyboard. Opening programs from the Start menu One of the most common uses of the Start menu is opening programs installed on your Notebook PC. Position your mouse pointer over the program then click to launch it. Use the arrow keys to browse through the programs. Press to launch it. NOTE: Select All apps at the bottom of the left pane to display a full list of programs and folders on your Notebook PC in alphabetical order. 40 Notebook PC E-Manual Windows apps These are apps pinned on the right pane of the Start menu and displayed in tiled-format for easy access. NOTE: Some Windows apps require signing in to your Microsoft account before they are fully launched. 41 Notebook PC E-Manual Working with Windows apps Use your Notebook PCs touchpad or keyboard to launch, customize, and close apps. Launching Windows apps from the Start menu Position your mouse pointer over the app then click to launch it. Use the arrow keys to browse through the apps. Press to launch an app. Customizing Windows apps You can move, resize, unpin, or pin apps to the taskbar from the Start menu using the following steps:

Moving apps Position your mouse pointer over the app, then drag and drop the app to a new location. 42 Notebook PC E-Manual Resizing apps Position your mouse pointer over the app and right-click it, then click Resize and select an app tile size. Use the arrow keys to navigate to the app. Press then select Resize and select an app tile size.

, Unpinning apps Position your mouse pointer over the app and right-click it, then click Unpin from Start. Use the arrow keys to navigate to the app. Press then select Unpin from Start.

, 43 Notebook PC E-Manual Pinning apps to the taskbar Position your mouse pointer over the app and right-click it, then click Pin to taskbar. Use the arrow keys to navigate to the app. Press then select Pin to taskbar.

, Pinning more apps to the Start menu From All apps, position your mouse pointer over the app you want to add to the Start menu and right-click it, then click Pin to Start. From All apps, press add to the Start menu, then select Pin to Start. on the app that you want to 44 Notebook PC E-Manual Task view Quickly switch between opened apps and programs using the task view feature, you can also use task view to switch between desktops. Launching task view Position your mouse pointer over the taskbar and click it. icon on the Press on your keyboard. 45 Notebook PC E-Manual Snap feature The Snap feature displays apps side-by-side, allowing you to work or switch between apps. Snap hotspots You can drag and drop apps to these hotspots to snap them into place. 46 Notebook PC E-Manual Using Snap 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. Launch the app you wish to snap. Drag the title bar of your app and drop the app to the edge of the screen to snap. Launch another app and repeat the above steps to snap another app. Launch the app you wish to snap. Press and hold the keys to snap the app. key, then use the arrow Launch another app and repeat the above steps to snap another app. 47 Notebook PC E-Manual Action Center Action Center consolidates notifications from apps and presents a single place where you can interact with them. It also has a really useful Quick Actions section at the bottom. Launching Action Center Position your mouse pointer over the taskbar and click it. icon on the Press on your keyboard. 48 Notebook PC E-Manual Other keyboard shortcuts Using the keyboard, you can also use the following shortcuts to help you launch applications and navigate Windows 10.

\

Launches Start menu Launches Action Center Launches the desktop Launches the File Explorer Opens the Share panel Launches Settings Launches Connect panel Activates the Lock screen Minimizes all currently active windows 49 Notebook PC E-Manual Launches Search Launches Project panel Opens the Run window Opens Ease of Access Center Opens the context menu of the Start button Launches the magnifier icon and zooms in your screen Zooms out your screen Opens Narrator Settings 50 Notebook PC E-Manual Connecting to wireless networks Wi-Fi Access emails, surf the Internet, and share applications via social networking sites using your Notebook PCs Wi-Fi connection. IMPORTANT! Airplane mode disables this feature. Ensure that Airplane mode is turned off before enabling the Wi-Fi connection of your Notebook PC. Connecting Wi-Fi Connect your Notebook PC to a Wi-Fi network by using the following steps:

1. 2. 3. 4. Select the icon from the taskbar. Select the icon to enable Wi-Fi. Select an access point from the list of available Wi-Fi connections. Select Connect to start the network connection. NOTE: You may be prompted to enter a security key to activate the Wi-Fi connection. 51 Notebook PC E-Manual Bluetooth Use Bluetooth to facilitate wireless data transfers with other Bluetooth-

enabled devices. IMPORTANT! Airplane mode disables this feature. Ensure that Airplane mode is turned off before enabling the Bluetooth connection of your Notebook PC. Pairing with other Bluetooth-enabled devices You need to pair your Notebook PC with other Bluetooth-enabled devices to enable data transfers. Connect your devices by using the following steps:

1. 2. 3. Launch Settings from the Start menu. Select Devices, then select Bluetooth to search for Bluetooth-enabled devices. Select a device from the list. Compare the passcode on your Notebook PC with the passcode sent to your chosen device. If they are the same, select Yes to successfully pair your Notebook PC with the device. NOTE: For some Bluetooth-enabled devices, you may be prompted to key in the passcode of your Notebook PC. 52 Notebook PC E-Manual Airplane mode Airplane mode disables wireless communication, allowing you to use your Notebook PC safely while in-flight. NOTE: Contact your airline provider to learn about related in-flight services that can be used and restrictions that must be followed when using your Notebook PC in-flight. Turning Airplane mode on 1. 2. Launch Action Center from the taskbar. Select the icon to enable Airplane mode. Press

. Turning Airplane mode off 1. 2. Launch Action Center from the taskbar. Select the icon to disable Airplane mode. Press

. 53 Notebook PC E-Manual Turning your Notebook PC off You can turn off your Notebook PC by doing either of the following procedures:

Launch the Start menu, then select Shut down to do a normal shutdown.

>

From the log-in screen, select

> Shut down. to launch Shut down Press Windows. Select Shut down from the drop-down list then select OK. If your Notebook PC is unresponsive, press and hold the power button for at least four (4) seconds until your Notebook PC turns off. 54 Notebook PC E-Manual Putting your Notebook PC to sleep To put your Notebook PC to Sleep mode:

Launch the Start menu, then select Sleep to put your Notebook PC to sleep.

>

From the log-in screen, select

> Sleep. Press Select Sleep from the drop-down list then select OK. to launch Shut down Windows. NOTE: You can also put your Notebook PC to Sleep mode by pressing the power button once. 55 Notebook PC E-Manual 56 Notebook PC E-Manual Chapter 4:

Power-On Self-Test (POST) 57 Notebook PC E-Manual The Power-On Self-Test (POST) The POST (Power-On Self-Test) is a series of software-controlled diagnostic tests that run when you turn on or restart your Notebook PC. The software that controls the POST is installed as a permanent part of the Notebook PCs architecture. Using POST to access BIOS and Troubleshoot During POST, you can access the BIOS settings or run troubleshooting options using the function keys of your Notebook PC. You may refer to the following information for more details. BIOS The BIOS (Basic Input and Output System) stores system hardware settings that are needed for system startup in the Notebook PC. The default BIOS settings apply to most conditions of your Notebook PC. Do not change the default BIOS settings except in the following circumstances:

An error message appears onscreen during system bootup and requests you to run the BIOS Setup. You have installed a new system component that requires further BIOS settings or updates. WARNING! Using inappropriate BIOS settings may result to system instability or boot failure. We strongly recommend that you change the BIOS settings only with the help of a trained service personnel. Accessing BIOS Restart your Notebook PC then press during POST. 58 Notebook PC E-Manual BIOS Settings NOTE: The BIOS screens in this section are for reference only. The actual screens may differ by model and territory. Boot This menu allows you to set your boot option priorities. You may refer to the following procedures when setting your boot priority. 1. On the Boot screen, select Boot Option #1. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Boot Security Save & Exit Boot Configuration Fast Boot [Enabled]

Launch CSM [Disabled]

Driver Option Priorities Boot Option Priorities Boot Option #1 [Windows Boot Manager]

Add New Boot Option Delete Boot Option Sets the system boot order

: Select Screen

: Select Item Enter: Select

+/ : Change Opt. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC : Exit Version 2.16.1243 Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. 59 Notebook PC E-Manual 2. Press and select a device as the Boot Option #1. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Boot Security Save & Exit Boot Configuration Fast Boot [Enabled]

Launch CSM [Disabled]

Driver Option Priorities Boot Option Priorities Boot Option #1 [Windows Boot Manager]

Add New Boot Option Delete Boot Option Boot Option #1 Windows Boot Manager Disabled Sets the system boot order

: Select Screen

: Select Item Enter: Select

+/ : Change Opt. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC : Exit Version 2.16.1243 Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. 60 Notebook PC E-Manual Security This menu allows you to set up the administrator and user password of your Notebook PC. It also allows you to control the access to your Notebook PCs hard disk drive, input/output (I/O) interface, and USB interface. NOTE:

If you install a User Password, you will be prompted to input this before entering your Notebook PC's operating system. If you install an Administrator Password, you will be prompted to input this before entering BIOS. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Boot Security Save & Exit Password Description If ONLY the Administrators password is set, then this only limits access to Setup and is only asked for when entering Setup. If ONLY the users password is set, then this is a power on password and must be entered to boot or enter Setup. In Setup, the User will have Administrator rights. Administrator Password Status NOT INSTALLED User Password Status NOT INSTALLED Administrator Password User Password HDD Password Status : NOT INSTALLED Set Master Password Set User Password I/O Interface Security System Mode state User Secure Boot state Enabled Secure Boot Control [Enabled]

Key Management Set Administrator Password. The password length must be in the following range:

Minimum length 3 Maximum length 20 Must type with character:

a-z, 0-9

: Select Screen

: Select Item Enter: Select

+/ : Change Opt. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC : Exit Version 2.16.1243 Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. 61 Notebook PC E-Manual To set the password:

1. 2. 3. On the Security screen, select Administrator Password or User Password. Type in a password then press

. Re-type to confirm the password then press

. To clear the password:

On the Security screen, select Administrator Password or User Password. Type in the current password then press

. Leave the Create New Password field blank then press

. Select Yes in the confirmation box then press

. 1. 2. 3. 4. 62 Notebook PC E-Manual I/O Interface Security In the Security menu, you can access I/O Interface Security to lock or unlock some interface functions of your Notebook PC. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Boot Security Save & Exit I/O Interface Security LAN Network Interface [UnLock]

Wireless Network Interface [UnLock]

HD AUDIO Interface [UnLock]

USB Interface Security LAN Network interface Lock UnLock If Locked, LAN controller will be disabled.

: Select Screen

: Select Item Enter: Select

+/ : Change Opt. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC : Exit Version 2.16.1243 Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. To lock an interface:

1. On the Security screen, select I/O Interface Security. 2. Select an interface you would like to lock then press

. 3. Select Lock. 63 Notebook PC E-Manual USB Interface Security Through the I/O Interface Security menu, you can also access USB Interface Security to lock or unlock ports and devices. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Boot Security Save & Exit USB Interface Security USB Interface [UnLock]

External Ports [UnLock]

CMOS Camera [UnLock]

Card Reader [UnLock]

USB interface Lock UnLock If Locked, all USB device will be disabled

: Select Screen

: Select Item Enter: Select

+/ : Change Opt. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC : Exit Version 2.16.1243 Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. To lock the USB interface:

1. On the Security screen, select I/O Interface Security > USB Interface Security. 2. Select an interface that you would like to lock then select Lock. NOTE: Setting the USB Interface to Lock also locks and hides the External Ports and other devices included under USB Interface Security. 64 Notebook PC E-Manual Set Master Password In the Security menu, you can use Set Master Password to set up a password-enabled access to your hard disk drive. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Boot Security Save & Exit Password Description If ONLY the Administrators password is set, then this only limits access to Setup and is only asked for when entering Setup. If ONLY the users password is set, then this is a power on password and must be entered to boot or enter Setup. In Setup, the User will have Administrator rights. Administrator Password Status NOT INSTALLED User Password Status NOT INSTALLED Administrator Password User Password HDD Password Status : NOT INSTALLED Set Master Password Set User Password I/O Interface Security Set HDD Master Password.

***Advisable to Power Cycle System after Setting Hard Disk Passwords***

: Select Screen

: Select Item Enter: Select

+/ : Change Opt. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC : Exit Version 2.16.1243 Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. To set the HDD password:

1. On the Security screen, select Set Master Password. 2. Type in a password then press

. 3. 4. Re-type to confirm the password then press

. Select Set User Password then repeat the previous steps to set up the user password. 65 Notebook PC E-Manual Save & Exit To keep your configuration settings, select Save Changes and Exit before exiting the BIOS. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Boot Security Save & Exit Save Changes and Exit Discard Changes and Exit Save Options Save Changes Discard Changes Restore Defaults Boot Override Windows Boot Manager Launch EFI Shell from filesystem device Exit system setup after saving the changes.

: Select Screen

: Select Item Enter: Select

+/ : Change Opt. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC : Exit Version 2.16.1243 Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. 66 Notebook PC E-Manual To update the BIOS:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Verify the Notebook PCs exact model then download the latest BIOS file for your model from the ASUS website. Save a copy of the downloaded BIOS file to a flash disk drive. Connect your flash disk drive to your Notebook PC. Restart your Notebook PC then press during POST. From the BIOS menu, select Advanced > Start Easy Flash, then press

. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Boot Security Save & Exit Start Easy Flash Internal Pointing Device [Enabled]

Wake on Lid Open [Enabled]

Power Off Energy Saving [Enabled]

SATA Configuration Graphics Configuration Intel (R) Anti-Theft Technology Corporation USB Configuration Network Stack Press Enter to run the utility to select and update BIOS.

: Select Screen

: Select Item Enter: Select

+/ : Change Opt. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC : Exit Version 2.16.1243 Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. 67 Notebook PC E-Manual 6. Locate your downloaded BIOS file in the flash disk drive then press

. ASUSTek EasyFlash Utility FLASH TYPE : Generic Flash Type Current BIOS Platform : UX330 Version : 101 Build Date : Oct 26 2015 Build Time : 11:51:05 New BIOS Platform : Unknown Version : Unknown Build Date : Unknown Build Time : Unknown 0 EFI

<DIR>

FSO FS1 FS2 FS3 FS4

[] : Switch [] : Choose [q] : Exit [Enter] : Enter/Execute 7. After the BIOS update process, select Exit > Restore Defaults to restore the system to its default settings. 68 Notebook PC E-Manual Recovering your system Using recovery options on your Notebook PC allows you to restore the system to its original state or simply refresh its settings to help improve performance. IMPORTANT!

Backup all your data files before doing any recovery option on your Notebook PC. Note down important customized settings such as network settings, user names, and passwords to avoid data loss. Ensure that your Notebook PC is plugged in to a power source before resetting your system. Windows 10 allows you to do any of the following recovery options:

Keep my files - This option allows you refresh your Notebook PC without affecting personal files (photos, music, videos, documents). Using this option, you can restore your Notebook PC to its default settings and delete other installed apps. Remove everything - This option resets your Notebook PC to its factory settings. You must backup your data before doing this option. 69 Notebook PC E-Manual Go back to an earlier build - This option allows you to go back to an earlier build. Use this option if this build is not working for you. Advanced startup - Using this option allows you to perform other advanced recovery options on your Notebook PC such as:

-

-

Using a USB drive, network connection or Windows recovery DVD to startup your Notebook PC. Using Troubleshoot to enable any of these advanced recovery options: System Restore, System Image Recovery, Startup Repair, Command Prompt, UEFI Firmware Settings, and Startup Settings. Performing a recovery option Refer to the following steps if you want to access and use any of the available recovery options for your Notebook PC. 1. Launch Settings and select Update and security. 70 Notebook PC E-Manual 2. Under the Update and security option, select Recovery then select the recovery option you would like to perform. 71 Notebook PC E-Manual 72 Notebook PC E-Manual Tips and FAQs 73 Notebook PC E-Manual Useful tips for your Notebook PC To help you maximize the use of your Notebook PC, maintain its system performance, and ensure all your data are kept secured, here are some useful tips that you can follow:

Update Windows periodically to ensure that your applications have the latest security settings. Use an anti-virus software to protect your data and keep this updated too. Unless absolutely necessary, refrain from using force shutdown to turn off your Notebook PC. Always backup your data and make it a point to create a backup data in an external storage drive. Refrain from using the Notebook PC at extremely high temperatures. If you are not going to use your Notebook PC for a long period of time (at least a month), we recommend that you take out the battery if the battery is removable. Disconnect all external devices and ensure you have the following items prior to resetting your Notebook PC:

-

-

-

-

Product key for your operating systems and other installed applications Backup data Log in ID and password Internet connection information 74 Notebook PC E-Manual Hardware FAQs 1. A black dot, or sometimes a colored dot, appears onscreen when I turn on the Notebook PC. What should I do?

Although these dots normally appear onscreen, they will not affect your system. If the incident continues and subsequently affects system performance, consult an authorized ASUS service center. 2. My display panel has an uneven color and brightness. How can I fix this?

The color and brightness of your display panel may be affected by the angle and current position of your Notebook PC. The brightness and color tone of your Notebook PC may also vary per model. You may use the function keys or the display settings in your operating system to adjust the appearance of your display panel. 3. How can I maximize my Notebook PC s battery life?

You can try doing any of the following suggestions:

Use the function keys to adjust the display brightness. If you are not using any Wi-Fi connection, switch your system into Airplane mode. Disconnect unused USB devices. Close unused applications, especially those that take up too much system memory. 75 Notebook PC E-Manual 4. My battery charge indicator does not light up. Whats wrong?

Check whether the power adapter or battery pack is attached correctly. You may also disconnect the power adapter or battery pack, wait for a minute, then reconnect them again to the power outlet and Notebook PC. If the problem still exists, contact your local ASUS service center for assistance. 5. Why is my touchpad not working?

Press to enable your touchpad. 6. When I play audio and video files, why cant I hear any sound from my Notebook PCs audio speakers?

You can try doing any of the following suggestions:

Press to turn up the speaker volume. Check if your speakers were set to mute. Check if a headphone jack is connected to your Notebook PC and remove it. 7. What should I do if my Notebook PCs power adapter gets lost or my battery stops working?

Contact your local ASUS service center for assistance. 76 Notebook PC E-Manual 8. My Notebook PC cannot do keystrokes correctly because my cursor keeps on moving. What should I do?

Make sure that nothing accidentally touches or presses on your touchpad while you type on the keyboard. You can also disable your touchpad by pressing

. 9. Instead of showing letters, pressing the U, I, and O keys on my keyboard displays numbers. How can I change this?

Press the key or

(on selected models) on your Notebook PC to turn off this feature and use the said keys for inputting letters. 77 Notebook PC E-Manual Software FAQs 1. When I turn on my Notebook PC, the power indicator lights up but nothing appears on my screen. What can I do to fix this?

You can try doing any of the following suggestions:

Force shutdown your Notebook PC by pressing the power button for at least four (4) seconds. Check if the power adapter and battery pack are inserted correctly then turn on your Notebook PC. If the problem still exists, contact your local ASUS service center for assistance. 2. What should I do when my screen displays this message:

Remove disks or other media. Press any key to restart.?

You can try doing any of the following suggestions:

Remove all connected USB devices then restart your Notebook PC. Remove any optical discs that are left inside the optical drive then restart. If the problem still exists, your Notebook PC might have a memory storage problem. Contact your local ASUS service center for assistance. 3. My Notebook PC boots slower than usual and my operating system lags. How can I fix this?

Delete the applications you recently installed or were not included with your operating system package then restart your system. 78 Notebook PC E-Manual 4. My Notebook PC does not boot up. How can I fix this?

You can try doing any of the following suggestions:

Remove all connected devices to your Notebook PC then restart your system. If the problem still exists, contact your local ASUS service center for assistance. 5. Why cant my Notebook PC wake up from sleep mode?

You need to press the power button to resume your last working state. Your system might have completely used up its battery power. Connect the power adapter to your Notebook PC and connect to a power outlet then press the power button. 79 Notebook PC E-Manual 80 Notebook PC E-Manual Appendices 81 Notebook PC E-Manual DVD-ROM Drive Information The DVD-ROM drive allows you to view and create your own CDs and DVDs. You can purchase an optional DVD viewer software to view DVD titles. NOTE: The DVD-ROM Drive is available on selected models. Regional Playback Information Playback of DVD movie titles involves decoding MPEG2 video, digital AC3 audio and decryption of CSS protected content. CSS (sometimes called copy guard) is the name given to the content protection scheme adopted by the motion picture industry to satisfy a need to protect against unlawful content duplication. Although the design rules imposed on CSS licensors are many, one rule that is most relevant is playback restrictions on regionalized content. In order to facilitate geographically staggered movie releases, DVD video titles are released for specific geographic regions as defined in Region Definitions below. Copyright laws require that all DVD movies be limited to a particular region (usually coded to the region at which it is sold). While DVD movie content may be released for multiple regions, CSS design rules require that any system capable of playing CSS encrypted content must only be capable of playing one region. IMPORTANT! The region setting may be changed up to five times using the viewer software, then it can only play DVD movies for the last region setting. Changing the region code after that will require factory resetting which is not covered by warranty. If resetting is desired, shipping and resetting costs will be at the expense of the user. 82 Notebook PC E-Manual Region Definitions Region 1 Canada, US, US Territories Region 2 Czech, Egypt, Finland, France, Germany, Gulf States, Hungary, Iceland, Iran, Iraq, Ireland, Italy, Japan, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Saudi Arabia, Scotland, South Africa, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Syria, Turkey, UK, Greece, Former Yugoslav Republics, Slovakia Region 3 Burma, Indonesia, South Korea, Malaysia, Philippines, Singapore, Taiwan, Thailand, Vietnam Region 4 Australia, Caribbean (Except US Territories), Central America, New Zealand, Pacific Islands, South America Region 5 CIS, India, Pakistan, Rest of Africa, Russia, North Korea Region 6 China 83 Notebook PC E-Manual Blu-ray ROM Drive Information The Blu-ray ROM Drive allows you to view HD (High-Definition) videos and other disc file formats such as DVDs and CDs. NOTE: The Blue-ray ROM Drive is available on selected models. Region Definitions Region A North, Central and South American countries, and their territories; Taiwan, Hong Kong, Macao, Japan, Korea (South and North), South East Asian countries and their territories. Region B European, African, and South West Asian countries and their territories; Australia and New Zealand. Region C Central, South Asian, Eastern European countries and their territories; China and Mongolia. NOTE: Refer to Blu-ray Disc website at www.blu-raydisc.com/en/Technical/FAQs/Blu-

rayDiscforVideo.aspx for more details. Internal Modem Compliancy The Notebook PC with internal modem model complies with JATE (Japan), FCC

(US, Canada, Korea, Taiwan), and CTR21. The internal modem has been approved in accordance with Council Decision 98/482/EC for pan-European single terminal connection to the public switched telephone network (PSTN). However due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in different countries, the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network termination point. In the event of problems you should contact your equipment supplier in the first instance. 84 Notebook PC E-Manual Overview On 4th August 1998 the European Council Decision regarding the CTR 21 has been published in the Official Journal of the EC. The CTR 21 applies to all non voice terminal equipment with DTMF-dialling which is intended to be connected to the analogue PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network). CTR 21 (Common Technical Regulation) for the attachment requirements for connection to the analogue public switched telephone networks of terminal equipment (excluding terminal equipment supporting the voice telephony justified case service) in which network addressing, if provided, is by means of dual tone multi-frequency signalling. Network Compatibility Declaration Statement to be made by the manufacturer to the Notified Body and the vendor:

This declaration will indicate the networks with which the equipment is designed to work and any notified networks with which the equipment may have inter-

working difficulties. Statement to be made by the manufacturer to the user: This declaration will indicate the networks with which the equipment is designed to work and any notified networks with which the equipment may have inter-working difficulties. The manufacturer shall also associate a statement to make it clear where network compatibility is dependent on physical and software switch settings. It will also advise the user to contact the vendor if it is desired to use the equipment on another network. Up to now the Notified Body of CETECOM issued several pan-European approvals using CTR 21. The results are Europes first modems which do not require regulatory approvals in each individual European country. Non-Voice Equipment Answering machines and loud-speaking telephones can be eligible as well as modems, fax machines, auto-dialers and alarm systems. Equipment in which the end-to-end quality of speech is controlled by regulations (e.g. handset telephones and in some countries also cordless telephones) is excluded. 85 Notebook PC E-Manual This table shows the countries currently under the CTR21 standard. Applied Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Still Pending No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes Yes Yes More Testing No No Not Applicable Yes No No No No Not Applicable No No Still Pending No No No Yes No Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable No No No Country Austria1 Belgium Czech Republic Denmark1 Finland France Germany Greece Hungary Iceland Ireland Italy Israel Lichtenstein Luxemburg The Netherlands1 Norway Poland Portugal Spain Sweden Switzerland United Kingdom 86 Notebook PC E-Manual This information was copied from CETECOM and is supplied without liability. For updates to this table, you may visit http://www.cetecom.de/technologies/ctr_21. html. 1 National requirements will apply only if the equipment may use pulse dialling

(manufacturers may state in the user guide that the equipment is only intended to support DTMF signalling, which would make any additional testing superfluous). In The Netherlands additional testing is required for series connection and caller ID facilities. 87 Notebook PC E-Manual Federal Communications Commission Interference Statement This device complies with FCC Rules Part 15. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission

(FCC) rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. WARNING! The use of a shielded-type power cord is required in order to meet FCC emission limits and to prevent interference to the nearby radio and television reception. It is essential that only the supplied power cord be used. Use only shielded cables to connect I/O devices to this equipment. You are cautioned that changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void your authority to operate the equipment.

(Reprinted from the Code of Federal Regulations #47, part 15.193, 1993. Washington DC: Office of the Federal Register, National Archives and Records Administration, U.S. Government Printing Office.) 88 Notebook PC E-Manual FCC Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure Caution Statement WARNING! Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate this equipment. The manufacture declares that this device is limited to Channels 1 through 11 in the 2.4GHz frequency by specified firmware controlled in the USA. This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. To maintain compliance with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, please avoid direct contact to the transmitting antenna during transmitting. End users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This device operates within a 5.15-5.25 GHz frequency range and is restricted for indoor use only. Outdoor operation within 5150-5250 MHz is prohibited. RF Exposure Information (SAR) This device meets the governments requirements for exposure to radio waves. This device is designed and manufactured not to exceed the emission limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S. Government. The exposure standard employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6 W/kg. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions accepted by the FCC with the EUT transmitting at the specified power level in different channels. RF Exposure warning This equipment complies with FCC RF exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. The equipment must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. 89 Notebook PC E-Manual CE Mark Warning This device complies with the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC (replaced in 2017 by RED 2014/53/EU), the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC (replaced in April 2016 by 2014/30/

EU), and the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC (replaced in April 2016 by 2014/35/

EU) issued by the Commission of the European Community. Countries where the device will be sold to:

AT EE IT NO BE ES IS PL BG FI LI PT CH FR LT RO CY GB LU SE CZ GR LV SI DE HU MT SK DK IE NL TR RF Exposure information (SAR) - CE This device meets the EU requirements (1999/519/EC) on the limitation of exposure of the general public to electromagnetic fields by way of health protection. The limits are part of extensive recommendations for the protection of the general public. These recommendations have been developed and checked by independent scientific organizations through regular and thorough evaluations of scientific studies. The unit of measurement for the European Councils recommended limit for mobile devices is the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR), and the SAR limit is 2.0 W/Kg averaged over 10 gram of body tissue. It meets the requirements of the International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP). For next-to-body operation, this device has been tested and meets the ICNRP exposure guidelines and the European Standard EN 50566 and EN 62209-2. SAR is measured with the device directly contacted to the body while transmitting at the highest certified output power level in all frequency bands of the mobile device. 90 Notebook PC E-Manual IC Radiation Exposure Statement for Canada This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. To maintain compliance with IC RF exposure compliance requirements, please avoid direct contact to the transmitting antenna during transmitting. End users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause interference and This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. To prevent radio interference to the licensed service (i.e. co-channel Mobile Satellite systems) this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing. This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B) 91 Notebook PC E-Manual Dclaration dIndustrie Canada relative lexposition aux ondes radio Cet appareil est conforme aux limites dexposition aux radiations dIndustrie Canada dfinies pour un environnement non-contrl. Pour maintenir la conformit avec les exigences dexposition RF dIC, veuillez viter tout contact direct avec lantenne pendant lmission. Les utilisateurs finaux doivent suivre les instructions de fonctionnement spcifiques pour satisfaire la conformit aux expositions RF. Son utilisation est sujette aux deux conditions suivantes:

Cet appareil ne peut pas causer dinterfrence, et Cet appareil doit accepter toute interfrence, y compris les interfrences qui pourraient causer un fonctionnement non souhait de lappareil. Pour viter les interfrences radio avec le service sous licence (cest -dire le partage de canal avec les systmes de tlphonie satellite), cet appareil est destin tre utilis en intrieur et loin des fentres pour fournir un blindage maximal. Tout appareil (ou son antenne dmission) qui est install en extrieur est sujet cette licence. Le present appareil est conforme aux CNR dIndustrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B) 92 Notebook PC E-Manual Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure Information The radiated output power of the Wireless Device is below the Industry Canada

(IC) radio frequency exposure limits. The Wireless Device should be used in such a manner such that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. This device has been evaluated for and shown compliant with the IC Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) limits when operated in portable exposure conditions. Caution:

(i) the device for operation in the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems;

(ii) the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5470-5725 MHz shall comply with the e.i.r.p. limit; and

(iii) the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5825 MHz shall comply with the e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non point-to-

point operation as appropriate.

(iv) Users should also be advised that high-power radars are allocated as primary users (i.e. priority users) of the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5650-5850 MHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices. 93 Notebook PC E-Manual Informations concernant lexposition aux tilizeive radio (RF) La puissance de sortie mise par lappareil de sans tilize infrieure la limite dexposition aux tilizeive radio dIndustry Canada (IC). Utilisez lappareil de sans fil de faon tilizei les contacts humains lors du fonctionnement normal. Ce tilizeive a t valu pour et dmontr conforme la Taux IC dabsorption spcifique (SAR) des limites lorsquil est tilize dans des conditions dexposition portatifs. Avertissement:

Le guide dutilisation des dispositifs pour rseaux locaux doit inclure des instructions prcises sur les restrictions susmentionnes, notamment:

(i) les dispositifs fonctionnant dans la bande 5150-5250 MHz sont rservs uniquement pour une utilisation lintrieur afin de rduire les risques de brouillage prjudiciable aux systmes de satellites mobiles utilisant les mmes canaux;

(ii) le gain maximal dantenne permis pour les dispositifs utilisant les bandes 5250-

5350 MHz et 5470-5725 MHz doit se conformer la limite de p.i.r.e.;

(iii) le gain maximal dantenne permis (pour les dispositifs utilisant la bande 5725-

5825 MHz) doit se conformer la limite de p.i.r.e. spcifie pour lexploitation point point et non point point, selon le cas.

(iv) De plus, les utilisateurs devraient aussi tre aviss que les utilisateurs de radars de haute puissance sont dsigns utilisateurs principaux (c.--d., quils ont la priorit) pour les bandes 5250-5350 MHz et 5650-5850 MHz et que ces radars pourraient causer du brouillage et/ou des dommages aux dispositifs LAN-EL. 94 Notebook PC E-Manual Radiation Exposure Statement The product comply with the Canada portable RF exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment and are safe for intended operation as described in this manual. The further RF exposure reduction can be achieved if the product can be kept as far as possible from the user body or set the device to lower output power if such function is available. Dclaration d'exposition aux radiations Le produit est conforme aux limites d'exposition pour les appareils portables RF pour les Etats-Unis et le Canada tablies pour un environnement non contrl. Le produit est sr pour un fonctionnement tel que dcrit dans ce manuel. La rduction aux expositions RF peut tre augmente si l'appareil peut tre conserv aussi loin que possible du corps de l'utilisateur ou que le dispositif est rgl sur la puissance de sortie la plus faible si une telle fonction est disponible. 95 Notebook PC E-Manual Wireless Operation Channel for Different Domains N. America 2.412-2.462 GHz Japan 2.412-2.484 GHz Europe ETSI 2.412-2.472 GHz Ch01 through CH11 Ch01 through Ch14 Ch01 through Ch13 France Restricted Wireless Frequency Bands Some areas of France have a restricted frequency band. The worst case maximum authorized power indoors are:

10mW for the entire 2.4 GHz band (2400 MHz2483.5 MHz) 100mW for frequencies between 2446.5 MHz and 2483.5 MHz NOTE: Channels 10 through 13 inclusive operate in the band 2446.6 MHz to 2483.5 MHz. There are few possibilities for outdoor use: on private property or on the private property of public persons, use is subject to a preliminary authorization procedure by the Ministry of Defense, with maximum authorized power of 100mW in the 2446.52483.5 MHz band. Use outdoors on public property is not permitted. In the departments listed below, for the entire 2.4 GHz band:

Maximum authorized power indoors is 100mW Maximum authorized power outdoors is 10mW 96 Notebook PC E-Manual Departments in which the use of the 24002483.5 MHz band is permitted with an EIRP of less than 100mW indoors and less than 10mW outdoors:

01 Ain 02 Aisne 05 Hautes Alpes 08 Ardennes 11 Aude 24 Dordogne 32 Gers 41 Loir et Cher 55 Meuse 60 Oise 12 Aveyron 25 Doubs 36 Indre 45 Loiret 58 Nivre 61 Orne 03 Allier 09 Arige 16 Charente 26 Drme 37 Indre et Loire 50 Manche 59 Nord 63 Puy du Dme 64 Pyrnes Atlantique 66 Pyrnes Orientales 67 Bas Rhin 68 Haut Rhin 70 Haute Sane 71 Sane et Loire 75 Paris 88 Vosges 94 Val de Marne 82 Tarn et Garonne 84 Vaucluse 89 Yonne 90 Territoire de Belfort This requirement is likely to change over time, allowing you to use your wireless LAN card in more areas within France. Please check with ART for the latest information (www.arcep.fr). NOTE: Your WLAN Card transmits less than 100mW, but more than 10mW. 97 Notebook PC E-Manual UL Safety Notices Required for UL 1459 covering telecommunications (telephone) equipment intended to be electrically connected to a telecommunication network that has an operating voltage to ground that does not exceed 200V peak, 300V peak-to-peak, and 105V rms, and installed or used in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70). When using the Notebook PC modem, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons, including the following:

DO NOT use the Notebook PC near water, for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool. DO NOT use the Notebook PC during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. DO NOT use the Notebook PC in the vicinity of a gas leak. Required for UL 1642 covering primary (non-rechargeable) and secondary

(rechargeable) lithium batteries for use as power sources in products. These batteries contain metallic lithium, or a lithium alloy, or a lithium ion, and may consist of a single electrochemical cell or two or more cells connected in series, parallel, or both, that convert chemical energy into electrical energy by an irreversible or reversible chemical reaction. DO NOT dispose the Notebook PC battery pack in a fire, as they may explode. Check with local codes for possible special disposal instructions to reduce the risk of injury to persons due to fire or explosion. DO NOT use power adapters or batteries from other devices to reduce the risk of injury to persons due to fire or explosion. Use only UL certified power adapters or batteries supplied by the manufacturer or authorized retailers. 98 Notebook PC E-Manual Power Safety Requirement Products with electrical current ratings up to 6A and weighing more than 3Kg must use approved power cords greater than or equal to: H05VV-F, 3G, 0.75mm2 or H05VV-F, 2G, 0.75mm2. TV Notices Note to CATV System InstallerCable distribution system should be grounded

(earthed) in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 70, the National Electrical Code (NEC), in particular Section 820.93, Grounding of Outer Conductive Shield of a Coaxial Cable installation should include bonding the screen of the coaxial cable to the earth at the building entrance. REACH Complying with the REACH (Registration, Evaluation, Authorization, and Restriction of Chemicals) regulatory framework, we publish the chemical substances in our products at ASUS REACH website at http://csr.asus.com/english/REACH.htm. Macrovision Corporation Product Notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S.A. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Prevention of Hearing Loss To prevent possible hearing damage, do not listen at high volume levels for long periods. 99 Notebook PC E-Manual Nordic Lithium Cautions (for lithium-ion batteries) CAUTION! Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturers instructions. (English) ATTENZIONE! Rischio di esplosione della batteria se sostituita in modo errato. Sostituire la batteria con un una di tipo uguale o equivalente consigliata dalla fabbrica. Non disperdere le batterie nellambiente. (Italian) VORSICHT! Explosionsgefahr bei unsachgemen Austausch der Batterie. Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einem vom Hersteller empfohlenem hnlichen Typ. Entsorgung gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers. (German) ADVARSELI! Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig hndtering. Udskiftning m kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levr det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandren. (Danish) VARNING! Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Anvnd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera anvnt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion. (Swedish) VAROITUS! Paristo voi rjht, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan sousittelemaan tyyppiin. Hvit kytetty paristo valmistagan ohjeiden mukaisesti. (Finnish) ATTENTION! Il y a danger dexplosion sil y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du mre type ou dun type quivalent recommand par le constructeur. Mettre au rebut les batteries usages conformment aux instructions du fabricant. (French) ADVARSEL! Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri. Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten. Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner. (Norwegian)

(Japanese)

!

. (Russian) 100 Notebook PC E-Manual Optical Drive Safety Information Laser Safety Information CD-ROM Drive Safety Warning CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT WARNING! To prevent exposure to the optical drives laser, do not attempt to disassemble or repair the optical drive by yourself. For your safety, contact a professional technician for assistance. Service warning label WARNING! INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN. DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS. CDRH Regulations The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration implemented regulations for laser products on August 2, 1976. These regulations apply to laser products manufactured from August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein or in the laser product installation guide may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Coating Notice IMPORTANT! To provide electrical insulation and maintain electrical safety, a coating is applied to insulate the device except on the areas where the I/O ports are located. 101 Notebook PC E-Manual CTR 21 Approval (for Notebook PC with built-in Modem) Danish Dutch English Finnish French 102 Notebook PC E-Manual German Greek Italian Portuguese Spanish Swedish 103 Notebook PC E-Manual ENERGY STAR complied product ENERGY STAR is a joint program of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and the U.S. Department of Energy helping us all save money and protect the environment through energy efficient products and practices. All ASUS products with the ENERGY STAR logo comply with the ENERGY STAR standard, and the power management feature is enabled by default. The monitor and computer are automatically set to sleep after 10 and 30 minutes of user inactivity. To wake your computer, click the mouse or press any key on the keyboard. Please visit http://www.energystar.gov/powermanagement for detail information on power management and its benefits to the environment. In addition, please visit http://www.energystar.gov for detail information on the ENERGY STAR joint program. NOTE: Energy Star is NOT supported on FreeDOS and Linux-based operating systems. Global Environmental Regulation Compliance and Declaration ASUS follows the green design concept to design and manufacture our products, and makes sure that each stage of the product life cycle of ASUS product is in line with global environmental regulations. In addition, ASUS disclose the relevant information based on regulation requirements. Please refer to http://csr.asus.com/english/Compliance.htm for information disclosure based on regulation requirements ASUS is complied with:

Japan JIS-C-0950 Material Declarations EU REACH SVHC Korea RoHS 104 Notebook PC E-Manual ASUS Recycling/Takeback Services ASUS recycling and takeback programs come from our commitment to the highest standards for protecting our environment. We believe in providing solutions for you to be able to responsibly recycle our products, batteries, other components as well as the packaging materials. Please go to http://csr.asus.com/

english/Takeback.htm for detailed recycling information in different regions. Rechargeable Battery Recycling Service in North America For US and Canada customers, you can call 1-800-822-8837

(toll-free) for recycling information of your ASUS products rechargeable batteries. Regional notice for California WARNING! This product may contain chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects or other reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. Regional notice for Singapore Complies with IDA Standards DB103778 This ASUS product complies with IDA Standards. 105 Notebook PC E-Manual Regional notice for India This product complies with the India E-waste (Management and Handling) Rule 2011 and prohibits use of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls (PBBs) and polybrominated diphenyl ethers (PBDEs) in concentrations exceeding 0.1% by weight in homogenous materials and 0.01% by weight in homogenous materials for cadmium, except for the exemptions listed in Schedule-II of the Rule. Notices for removable batteries Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. The battery and its component must be recycled or disposed of properly. Avis concernant les batteries remplaables La batterie de lordinateur portable peut prsenter un risque dincendie ou de brlure si celle-ci est retire ou dsassemble. La batterie et ses composants doivent tre recycls de faon approprie. National Telecommunications Commission of the Philippines This ASUS product complies with NTC Standards. No. ESD-XXXXXXXX 106 Notebook PC E-Manual 107 Notebook PC E-Manual 108 Notebook PC E-Manual

E11288 Revised Edition V2 January 2016 E-Manual COPYRIGHT INFORMATION No part of this manual, including the products and software described in it, may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form or by any means, except documentation kept by the purchaser for backup purposes, without the express written permission of ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. (ASUS). ASUS PROVIDES THIS MANUAL AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL ASUS, ITS DIRECTORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES

(INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF USE OR DATA, INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS AND THE LIKE), EVEN IF ASUS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES ARISING FROM ANY DEFECT OR ERROR IN THIS MANUAL OR PRODUCT. Products and corporate names appearing in this manual may or may not be registered trademarks or copyrights of their respective companies, and are used only for identification or explanation and to the owners benefit, without intent to infringe. SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL ARE FURNISHED FOR INFORMATIONAL USE ONLY, AND ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE, AND SHOULD NOT BE CONSTRUED AS A COMMITMENT BY ASUS. ASUS ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY FOR ANY ERRORS OR INACCURACIES THAT MAY APPEAR IN THIS MANUAL, INCLUDING THE PRODUCTS AND SOFTWARE DESCRIBED IN IT. Copyright 2016 ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY Circumstances may arise where because of a default on ASUS part or other liability, you are entitled to recover damages from ASUS. In each such instance, regardless of the basis on which you are entitled to claim damages from ASUS, ASUS is liable for no more than damages for bodily injury (including death) and damage to real property and tangible personal property; or any other actual and direct damages resulted from omission or failure of performing legal duties under this Warranty Statement, up to the listed contract price of each product. ASUS will only be responsible for or indemnify you for loss, damages or claims based in contract, tort or infringement under this Warranty Statement. This limit also applies to ASUS suppliers and its reseller. It is the maximum for which ASUS, its suppliers, and your reseller are collectively responsible. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES IS ASUS LIABLE FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING: (1) THIRD-PARTY CLAIMS AGAINST YOU FOR DAMAGES; (2) LOSS OF, OR DAMAGE TO, YOUR RECORDS OR DATA; OR (3) SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR INDIRECT DAMAGES OR FOR ANY ECONOMIC CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS), EVEN IF ASUS, ITS SUPPLIERS OR YOUR RESELLER IS INFORMED OF THEIR POSSIBILITY. SERVICE AND SUPPORT Visit our multi-language website at https://www.asus.com/support 2 Notebook PC E-Manual Table of Contents About this manual .....................................................................................................7 Conventions used in this manual .............................................................................8 Icons ....................................................................................................................................8 Typography .......................................................................................................................8 Safety precautions .....................................................................................................9 Using your Notebook PC ..............................................................................................9 Caring for your Notebook PC .....................................................................................10 Proper disposal ................................................................................................................11 Chapter 1: Hardware Setup Getting to know your Notebook PC ...................................................................14 Top View .............................................................................................................................14 Bottom ................................................................................................................................18 Right Side ..........................................................................................................................19 Left Side .............................................................................................................................21 Chapter 2: Using your Notebook PC Getting started ...........................................................................................................24 Charge your Notebook PC ...........................................................................................24 Lift to open the display panel ....................................................................................26 Press the power button ................................................................................................26 Gestures for the touch screen panel and touchpad .....................................27 Using touch screen panel gestures ..........................................................................27 Using the touchpad .......................................................................................................30 Using the keyboard ...................................................................................................34 Function keys ...................................................................................................................34 Windows 10 keys ..........................................................................................................35 Multimedia control keys...............................................................................................36 Using the numeric keypad ..........................................................................................37 Using the touch screen panel as a tablet ..........................................................38 3 Notebook PC E-Manual Chapter 3: Working with Windows 10 Starting for the first time .........................................................................................40 Start menu ...................................................................................................................41 Windows apps ..........................................................................................................43 Working with Windows apps....................................................................................44 Customizing Windows apps .....................................................................................44 Task view .......................................................................................................................47 Snap feature ................................................................................................................48 Snap hotspots ..................................................................................................................48 Action Center ..............................................................................................................50 Other keyboard shortcuts ......................................................................................51 Connecting to wireless networks ........................................................................53 Wi-Fi .....................................................................................................................................53 Bluetooth ..........................................................................................................................54 Airplane mode .................................................................................................................55 Connecting to wired networks .............................................................................56 Configuring a dynamic IP/PPPoE network connection ....................................56 Configuring a static IP network connection .........................................................57 Turning your Notebook PC off ..............................................................................58 Putting your Notebook PC to sleep ....................................................................59 Chapter 4: Power-On Self-Test (POST) The Power-On Self-Test (POST) .............................................................................62 Using POST to access BIOS and Troubleshoot......................................................62 BIOS ................................................................................................................................62 Accessing BIOS ................................................................................................................62 BIOS Settings ....................................................................................................................63 Recovering your system ..........................................................................................73 Performing a recovery option ....................................................................................74 4 Notebook PC E-Manual Tips and FAQs Useful tips for your Notebook PC ........................................................................78 Hardware FAQs ...........................................................................................................79 Software FAQs .............................................................................................................82 Appendices Blu-ray ROM Drive Information (on selected models).......................................86 Internal Modem Compliancy .....................................................................................86 Overview ............................................................................................................................87 Network Compatibility Declaration .........................................................................87 Non-Voice Equipment ..................................................................................................87 Federal Communications Commission Interference Statement ...................89 FCC Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure Caution Statement .................................90 RF Exposure Information (SAR) ..................................................................................91 RF Exposure warning ....................................................................................................91 CE Mark Warning .............................................................................................................92 RF Exposure information (SAR) - CE ........................................................................92 IC Radiation Exposure Statement for Canada ......................................................93 Dclaration dIndustrie Canada relative lexposition aux ondes radio ...94 Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure Information .......................................................95 Informations concernant lexposition aux tilizeive radio (RF) ........................96 Wireless Operation Channel for Different Domains ...........................................97 France Restricted Wireless Frequency Bands .......................................................97 UL Safety Notices ............................................................................................................99 Power Safety Requirement ..........................................................................................100 TV Notices .........................................................................................................................100 REACH .................................................................................................................................100 Macrovision Corporation Product Notice ..............................................................100 5 Notebook PC E-Manual Prevention of Hearing Loss .........................................................................................100 Nordic Lithium Cautions (for lithium-ion batteries) ...........................................101 Optical Drive Safety Information ..............................................................................102 CTR 21 Approval (for Notebook PC with built-in Modem) ..............................103 ENERGY STAR complied product ..............................................................................105 Global Environmental Regulation Compliance and Declaration ..................106 ASUS Recycling/Takeback Services ..........................................................................106 Rechargeable Battery Recycling Service in North America.............................106 Regional notice for California .....................................................................................106 Regional notice for Singapore ...................................................................................107 Regional notice for India ..............................................................................................107 Notices for removable batteries ................................................................................107 Avis concernant les batteries remplaables..........................................................107 6 Notebook PC E-Manual About this manual This manual provides information about the hardware and software features of your Notebook PC, organized through the following chapters:

Chapter 1: Hardware Setup This chapter details the hardware components of your Notebook PC. Chapter 2: Using your Notebook PC This chapter shows you how to use the different parts of your Notebook PC. Chapter 3: Working with Windows 10 This chapter provides an overview of using Windows 10 in your Notebook PC. Chapter 4: Power-On Self-Test (POST) This chapter shows you how to use POST to change the settings of your Notebook PC. Tips and FAQs This section presents some recommended tips, hardware FAQs, and software FAQs you can refer to for maintaining and fixing common issues with your Notebook PC. Appendices This section includes notices and safety statements for your Notebook PC. 7 Notebook PC E-Manual Conventions used in this manual To highlight key information in this manual, some text are presented as follows:

IMPORTANT! This message contains vital information that must be followed to complete a task. NOTE: This message contains additional information and tips that can help complete tasks. WARNING! This message contains important information that must be followed to keep you safe while performing tasks and prevent damage to your Notebook PC's data and components. Icons The icons below indicate the devices you can use for completing a series of tasks or procedures on your Notebook PC.

= Use the touch screen panel.

= Use the touchpad.

= Use the keyboard. Typography Bold

= This indicates a menu or an item that must be selected. Italic

= This indicates sections that you can refer to in this manual. 8 Notebook PC E-Manual Safety precautions Using your Notebook PC This Notebook PC should only be used in environments with ambient temperatures between 5C (41F) and 35C (95F). Refer to the rating label on the bottom of your Notebook PC and ensure that your power adapter complies with this rating. Do not leave your Notebook PC on your lap or near any part of your body to prevent discomfort or injury from heat exposure. Do not use damaged power cords, accessories, and other peripherals with your Notebook PC. While powered on, ensure that you do not carry or cover your Notebook PC with any materials that can reduce air circulation. Do not place your Notebook PC on uneven or unstable work surfaces. You can send your Notebook PC through x-ray machines (used on items placed on conveyor belts), but do not expose them to magnetic detectors and wands. Contact your airline provider to learn about related in-flight services that can be used and restrictions that must be followed when using your Notebook PC in-flight. 9 Notebook PC E-Manual Caring for your Notebook PC Disconnect the AC power and remove the battery pack (if applicable) before cleaning your Notebook PC. Use a clean cellulose sponge or chamois cloth dampened with a solution of nonabrasive detergent and a few drops of warm water. Remove any extra moisture from your Notebook PC using a dry cloth. Do not use strong solvents such as thinners, benzene, or other chemicals on or near your Notebook PC. Do not place objects on top of your Notebook PC. Do not expose your Notebook PC to strong magnetic or electrical fields. Do not use or expose your Notebook PC near liquids, rain, or moisture. Do not expose your Notebook PC to dusty environments. Do not use your Notebook PC near gas leaks. 10 Notebook PC E-Manual Proper disposal Do not throw your Notebook PC in municipal waste. This product has been designed to enable proper reuse of parts and recycling. The symbol of the crossed out wheeled bin indicates that the product

(electrical, electronic equipment and mercury-

containing button cell battery) should not be placed in municipal waste. Check local regulations for disposal of electronic products. Do not throw the battery in municipal waste. The symbol of the crossed out wheeled bin indicates that the battery should not be placed in municipal waste. 11 Notebook PC E-Manual 12 Notebook PC E-Manual Chapter 1:

Hardware Setup 13 Notebook PC E-Manual Getting to know your Notebook PC Top View NOTE: The keyboard's layout may vary per region or country. The Notebook view may also vary in appearance depending on the Notebook PC model. 14 Notebook PC E-Manual Camera The built-in camera allows you to take pictures or record videos using your Notebook PC. Camera indicator The camera indicator lights up when the built-in camera is in use. Microphone The built-in microphone can be used for video conferencing, voice narrations, or simple audio recording. 360-adjustable touch screen panel Your Notebook PCs touch screen panel can be adjusted all the way into a 360 angle. This feature allows you to quickly turn your device from a Notebook PC into a touch-enabled tablet PC. This high-definition touch screen panel provides excellent viewing features for photos, videos, and other multimedia files on your Notebook PC. It also allows you to operate it using touch screen gestures. NOTE: For more details on how to turn your Notebook PC into a tablet device, refer to the Using the touch screen panel as a tablet section in this manual. Keyboard The keyboard provides full-sized QWERTY keys with a comfortable travel depth for typing. It also enables you to use the function keys, allows quick access to Windows, and controls other multimedia functions. NOTE: The keyboard layout differs by model or territory. 15 Notebook PC E-Manual Touchpad The touchpad allows the use of multi-gestures to navigate onscreen, providing an intuitive user experience. It also simulates the functions of a regular mouse. NOTE: For more details, refer to the Using the touchpad section in this manual. Status Indicators The status indicators help identify the current hardware status of your Notebook PC. Airplane mode indicator This indicator lights up when the Airplane mode in your Notebook PC is enabled. NOTE: When enabled, the Airplane mode disables all wireless connectivity. Capital lock indicator This indicator lights up when the capital lock function is activated. Using capital lock allows you to type capitalized letters (such as A, B, C) using your Notebook PCs keyboard. Number lock indicator This indicator lights up when the number lock function is activated. This allows you to use some of the keys on your keyboard for numeric input. 16 Notebook PC E-Manual Numeric keypad The numeric keypad toggles between these two functions: for numeric input and as pointer direction keys. NOTE: For more details, refer to the Using the numeric keypad section in this manual. 17 Notebook PC E-Manual Bottom NOTE: The bottom side may vary in appearance depending on model. WARNING! The bottom of the Notebook PC can get warm to hot while in use or while charging the battery pack. When working on your Notebook PC, do not place it on surfaces that can block the vents. IMPORTANT! Battery time varies by usage and by the specifications for this Notebook PC. The battery pack cannot be disassembled. Audio speakers The built-in audio speaker allows you to hear audio straight from the Notebook PC. The audio features of this Notebook PC are software-controlled. 18 Notebook PC E-Manual Right Side Headphone/Headset/Microphone jack This port allows you to connect amplified speakers or headphones. You can also use this port to connect your headset or an external microphone. USB Type-C port The USB (Universal Serial Bus) Type-C port provides a transfer rate of up to 5 Gbit/s and is backward compatible to USB 2.0. NOTE: Transfer rate of this port may vary per model. USB 3.0 port This USB 3.0 (Universal Serial Bus 3.0) port provides a transfer rate of up to 5 Gbit/s and is backward compatible to USB 2.0. HDMI port This port is for the HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) connector and is HDCP compliant for HD DVD, Blu-ray, and other protected content playback. LAN port Insert the network cable into this port to connect to a local area network. 19 Notebook PC E-Manual Power (DC) input port Insert the bundled power adapter into this port to charge the battery pack and supply power to your Notebook PC. WARNING! The adapter may become warm to hot while in use. Do not cover the adapter and keep it away from your body while it is connected to a power source. IMPORTANT! Use only the bundled power adapter to charge the battery pack and supply power to your Notebook PC. 20 Notebook PC E-Manual Left Side Security slot This security slot allows you to secure your Notebook PC using compatible Notebook PC security products. USB 2.0 port This USB (Universal Serial Bus) port is compatible with USB 2.0 or USB 1.1 devices such as keyboards, pointing devices, flash disk drives, external HDDs, speakers, cameras and printers. Status Indicators The status indicators help identify the current hardware status of your Notebook PC. Drive activity indicator This indicator lights up when your Notebook PC is accessing the internal storage drives. Two-color battery charge indicator The two-color LED provides a visual indication of the batterys charge status. Refer to the following table for details:

21 Notebook PC E-Manual Color Solid Green Solid Orange Blinking Orange Lights off Status The Notebook PC is plugged to a power source and the battery power is between 95% and 100%. The Notebook PC is plugged to a power source, charging its battery, and the battery power is less than 95%. The Notebook PC is running on battery mode and the battery power is less than 10%. The Notebook PC is running on battery mode and the battery power is between 10% to 100%. Volume button This button turns the volume up or down on your Notebook PC. Power button Press the power button to turn your Notebook PC on or off. You can also use the power button to put your Notebook PC to sleep or hibernate mode and wake it up from sleep or hibernate mode. In the event that your Notebook PC becomes unresponsive, press and hold the power button for at least four (4) seconds until your Notebook PC shuts down. Memory card reader This built-in memory card reader supports SD and SDHC card formats. 22 Notebook PC E-Manual Chapter 2:

Using your Notebook PC 23 Notebook PC E-Manual Getting started Charge your Notebook PC A. B. Plug the AC power adapter into a 100V~240V power source. Connect the DC power connector into your Notebook PCs power

(DC) input port. Charge the Notebook PC for 3 hours before using it in battery mode for the first time. NOTE: The power adapter may vary in appearance, depending on models and your region. IMPORTANT!

Power adapter information:

Input voltage: 100-240Vac Input frequency: 50-60Hz Rating output current: 2.37A (45W)* / 3.42A (65W)*

Rating output voltage: 19V

*on selected models only 24 Notebook PC E-Manual IMPORTANT!

Locate the input/output rating label on your Notebook PC and ensure that it matches the input/output rating information on your power adapter. Some Notebook PC models may have multiple rating output currents based on the available SKU. Ensure that your Notebook PC is connected to the power adapter before turning it on for the first time. We strongly recommend that you use a grounded wall socket while using your Notebook PC on power adapter mode. The socket outlet must be easily accessible and near your Notebook PC. To disconnect your Notebook PC from its main power supply, unplug your Notebook PC from the power socket. WARNING!

Read the following precautions for your Notebook PCs battery:

Only ASUS-authorized technicians should remove the battery inside the device. The battery used in this device may present a risk of fire or chemical burn if removed or disassembled. Follow the warning labels for your personal safety. Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Do not dispose of in fire. Never attempt to short-circuit your Notebook PCs battery. Never attempt to disassemble and reassemble the battery. Discontinue usage if leakage is found. The battery and its components must be recycled or disposed of properly. Keep the battery and other small components away from children. 25 Notebook PC E-Manual Lift to open the display panel Press the power button 26 Notebook PC E-Manual Gestures for the touch screen panel and touchpad Gestures allow you to launch programs and access the settings of your Notebook PC. Refer to the following illustrations when using hand gestures on your touch screen panel and touchpad. NOTE: The following screenshots are for reference only. The touch screen panels appearance may vary depending on model. Using touch screen panel gestures The gestures allow you to launch programs and access the settings of your Notebook PC. The functions can be activated by using the hand gestures on your Notebook PCs touch screen panel. Left edge swipe Right edge swipe Swipe from the left edge of the screen to launch Task view. Swipe from the right edge of the screen to launch Action Center. 27 Notebook PC E-Manual Tap/Double-tap Press and hold Tap an app to select it. Double-tap an app to launch it. Press and hold to open the right-

click menu. Zoom in Zoom out Spread apart your two fingers on the touch screen panel. Bring together your two fingers on the touch screen panel. 28 Notebook PC E-Manual Finger slide Drag Slide your finger to scroll up and down and slide your finger to pan the screen left or right. Drag to create a selection box around multiple items. Drag and drop an item to move it to a new location. 29 Notebook PC E-Manual Using the touchpad Moving the pointer You can tap anywhere on the touchpad to activate its pointer, then slide your finger on the touchpad to move the pointer onscreen. Slide horizontally Slide vertically Slide diagonally 30 Notebook PC E-Manual

One-finger gestures Tap/Double-tap Tap an app to select it. Double-tap an app to launch it. Drag and drop Double-tap an item, then slide the same finger without lifting it off the touchpad. To drop the item to its new location, lift your finger from the touchpad. 31 Notebook PC E-Manual Left-click Right-click Click an app to select it. Double-click an app to launch it. Click this button to open the right-

click menu. NOTE: The areas inside the dotted line represent the locations of the left mouse button and the right mouse button on the touchpad. Two-finger gestures Two-finger scroll (up/down) Two-finger scroll (left/right) Slide two fingers to scroll up or down. Slide two fingers to scroll left or right. 32 Notebook PC E-Manual Zoom out Zoom in Bring together your two fingers on the touchpad. Spread apart your two fingers on the touchpad. Drag and drop Select an item then press and hold the left button. Using your other finger, slide on the touchpad to drag the item, lift your finger off the button to drop the item. 33 Notebook PC E-Manual Using the keyboard Function keys The function keys on your Notebook PCs keyboard can trigger the following commands:

Puts the Notebook PC into Sleep mode Turns Airplane mode on or off NOTE: When enabled, the Airplane mode disables all wireless connectivity. Decreases display brightness Increases display brightness Turns the display panel on or off Toggles the display mode NOTE: Ensure that the second display is connected to your Notebook PC. 34 Notebook PC E-Manual Enables or disables the touchpad Turns the speaker on or off Turns the speaker volume down Turns the speaker volume up Windows 10 keys There are two special Windows keys on your Notebook PCs keyboard used as below:

Launches the Start menu Displays the drop-down menu 35 Notebook PC E-Manual Multimedia control keys The multimedia control keys allow you to control multimedia files, such as audios and videos, when played in your Notebook PC. in combination with the arrow keys on your Notebook PC, Press illustrated as below. Stop Play or pause Skip to previous track or rewind Skip to next track or fast forward 36 Notebook PC E-Manual Using the numeric keypad NOTE: The numeric keypad layout may differ by model or territory but the usage procedures remain the same. A numeric keypad is available on selected Notebook PC models. You can use this keypad for numeric input or as pointer direction keys. Press to toggle between using the keypad as number keys or as pointer direction keys. 37 Notebook PC E-Manual Using the touch screen panel as a tablet To use your Notebook PCs touch screen panel as a tablet device, you may adjust it all the way into a 360 angle as shown below. Notebook PC mode Adjust to a 360 angle Tablet mode 38 Notebook PC E-Manual Chapter 3:

Working with Windows 10 39 Notebook PC E-Manual Starting for the first time When you start your Notebook PC for the first time, a series of screens appear to guide you in configuring your Windows 10 operating system. To start your Notebook PC for the first time:

1. 2. 3. 4. Press the power button on your Notebook PC. Wait for a few minutes until the setup screen appears. From the setup screen, pick your region and a language to use on your Notebook PC. Carefully read the License Terms. Select I accept. Follow the onscreen instructions to configure the following basic items:

Personalize Get online Settings Your account 5. After configuring the basic items, Windows 10 proceeds to install your apps and preferred settings. Ensure that your Notebook PC is kept powered on during the setup process. 6. Once the setup process is complete, the Desktop appears. NOTE: The screenshots in this chapter are for reference only. 40 Notebook PC E-Manual Start menu The Start menu is the main gateway to your Notebook PCs programs, Windows apps, folders, and settings. Change account settings, lock, or sign out from your account Launch an app from the Start screen Launch Taskview Launch an app from the taskbar Launch Search Launch the Start menu Launch All apps Shut down, restart, or put your Notebook PC to sleep Launch Settings Launch File Explorer You can use the Start menu to do these common activities:

Start programs or Windows apps Open commonly used programs or Windows apps Adjust Notebook PC settings Get help with the Windows operating system Turn off your Notebook PC Log off from Windows or switch to a different user account 41 Notebook PC E-Manual Launching the Start menu Tap the Start button your desktop. in the lower-left corner of Position your mouse pointer over the Start button in the lower-left corner of your desktop then click it. Press the Windows logo key on your keyboard. Opening programs from the Start menu One of the most common uses of the Start menu is opening programs installed on your Notebook PC. Tap the program to launch it. Position your mouse pointer over the program then click to launch it. Use the arrow keys to browse through the programs. Press to launch it. NOTE: Select All apps at the bottom of the left pane to display a full list of programs and folders on your Notebook PC in alphabetical order. 42 Notebook PC E-Manual Windows apps These are apps pinned on the right pane of the Start menu and displayed in tiled-format for easy access. NOTE: Some Windows apps require signing in to your Microsoft account before they are fully launched. 43 Notebook PC E-Manual Working with Windows apps Use your Notebook PCs touch screen, touchpad, or keyboard to launch, customize, and close apps. Launching Windows apps from the Start menu Tap the app to launch it. Position your mouse pointer over the app then click to launch it. Use the arrow keys to browse through the apps. Press to launch an app. Customizing Windows apps You can move, resize, unpin, or pin apps to the taskbar from the Start menu using the following steps:

Moving apps Press and hold the app, then drag and drop it to a new location. Position your mouse pointer over the app, then drag and drop the app to a new location. 44 Notebook PC E-Manual Resizing apps Press and hold the app, then tap tile size. and select an app Position your mouse pointer over the app and right-click it, then click Resize and select an app tile size. Use the arrow keys to navigate to the app. Press then select Resize and select an app tile size.

, Unpinning apps Press and hold the app, then tap the icon. Position your mouse pointer over the app and right-click it, then click Unpin from Start. Use the arrow keys to navigate to the app. Press then select Unpin from Start.

, 45 Notebook PC E-Manual Pinning apps to the taskbar Press and hold the app, then tap Pin to taskbar. Position your mouse pointer over the app and right-click it, then click Pin to taskbar. Use the arrow keys to navigate to the app. Press then select Pin to taskbar.

, Pinning more apps to the Start menu From All apps, press and hold the app you want to add to the Start menu, then tap Pin to Start. From All apps, position your mouse pointer over the app you want to add to the Start menu and right-click it, then click Pin to Start. From All apps, press add to the Start menu, then select Pin to Start. on the app that you want to 46 Notebook PC E-Manual Task view Quickly switch between opened apps and programs using the task view feature, you can also use task view to switch between desktops. Launching task view Tap the edge of the screen. icon on the taskbar or swipe form the left Position your mouse pointer over the taskbar and click it. icon on the Press on your keyboard. 47 Notebook PC E-Manual Snap feature The Snap feature displays apps side-by-side, allowing you to work or switch between apps. Snap hotspots You can drag and drop apps to these hotspots to snap them into place. 48 Notebook PC E-Manual Using Snap or 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. Launch the app you wish to snap. Drag the title bar of your app and drop the app to the edge of the screen to snap. Launch another app and repeat the above steps to snap another app. Launch the app you wish to snap. Press and hold the keys to snap the app. key, then use the arrow Launch another app and repeat the above steps to snap another app. 49 Notebook PC E-Manual Action Center Action Center consolidates notifications from apps and presents a single place where you can interact with them. It also has a really useful Quick Actions section at the bottom. Launching Action Center Click the edge of the screen. icon on the taskbar or swipe from the right Position your mouse pointer over the taskbar and click it. icon on the Press on your keyboard. 50 Notebook PC E-Manual Other keyboard shortcuts Using the keyboard, you can also use the following shortcuts to help you launch applications and navigate Windows 10.

\

Launches Start menu Launches Action Center Launches the desktop Launches the File Explorer Opens the Share panel Launches Settings Launches Connect panel Activates the Lock screen Minimizes all currently active windows 51 Notebook PC E-Manual Launches Search Launches Project panel Opens the Run window Opens Ease of Access Center Opens the context menu of the Start button Launches the magnifier icon and zooms in your screen Zooms out your screen Opens Narrator Settings 52 Notebook PC E-Manual Connecting to wireless networks Wi-Fi Access emails, surf the Internet, and share applications via social networking sites using your Notebook PCs Wi-Fi connection. IMPORTANT! Airplane mode disables this feature. Ensure that Airplane mode is turned off before enabling the Wi-Fi connection of your Notebook PC. Connecting Wi-Fi Connect your Notebook PC to a Wi-Fi network by using the following steps:

or 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the icon from the taskbar. Select the icon to enable Wi-Fi. Select an access point from the list of available Wi-Fi connections. Select Connect to start the network connection. NOTE: You may be prompted to enter a security key to activate the Wi-Fi connection. 53 Notebook PC E-Manual Bluetooth Use Bluetooth to facilitate wireless data transfers with other Bluetooth-

enabled devices. IMPORTANT! Airplane mode disables this feature. Ensure that Airplane mode is turned off before enabling the Bluetooth connection of your Notebook PC. Pairing with other Bluetooth-enabled devices You need to pair your Notebook PC with other Bluetooth-enabled devices to enable data transfers. Connect your devices by using the following steps:

1. 2. 3. or Launch Settings from the Start menu. Select Devices, then select Bluetooth to search for Bluetooth-enabled devices. Select a device from the list. Compare the passcode on your Notebook PC with the passcode sent to your chosen device. If they are the same, select Yes to successfully pair your Notebook PC with the device. NOTE: For some bluetooth-enabled devices, you may be prompted to key in the passcode of your Notebook PC. 54 Notebook PC E-Manual Airplane mode Airplane mode disables wireless communication, allowing you to use your Notebook PC safely while in-flight. NOTE: Contact your airline provider to learn about related in-flight services that can be used and restrictions that must be followed when using your Notebook PC in-flight. Turning Airplane mode on 1. 2. or Launch Action Center from the taskbar. Select the icon to enable Airplane mode. Press

. Turning Airplane mode off 1. 2. or Launch Action Center from the taskbar. Select the icon to disable Airplane mode. Press

. 55 Notebook PC E-Manual Connecting to wired networks You can also connect to wired networks, such as local area networks and broadband Internet connection, using your Notebook PCs LAN port. NOTE: Contact your Internet Service Provider (ISP) for details or your network administrator for assistance in setting up your Internet connection. To configure your settings, refer to the following procedures. IMPORTANT! Ensure that a network cable is connected between your Notebook PCs LAN port and a local area network before performing the following actions. Configuring a dynamic IP/PPPoE network connection or 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Launch Settings. Select Network & Internet. Select Ethernet > Network and Sharing Center. Select your LAN then select Properties. Select Internet Protocol Version 4(TCP/IPv4) then select Properties. Select Obtain an IP address automatically then select OK. NOTE: Proceed to the next steps if you are using PPPoE connection. 56 Notebook PC E-Manual 7. 8. 9. 10. Return to the Network and Sharing Center window then select Set up a new connection or network. Select Connect to the Internet then select Next. Select Broadband (PPPoE). Type your User name, Password, and Connection name then select Connect. 11. Select Close to finish the configuration. 12. 13. on the taskbar then select the Select connection you just created. Type your user name and password then select Connect to start connecting to the Internet. Configuring a static IP network connection or 1. 2. 3. 4. Repeat steps 1 to 5 under Configuring a dynamic IP/PPPoE network connection Select Use the following IP address. Type the IP address, Subnet mask and Default gateway from your service provider. If needed, you can also type the preferred DNS server address and alternate DNS server address then select OK. 57 Notebook PC E-Manual Turning your Notebook PC off You can turn off your Notebook PC by doing either of the following procedures:

or Launch the Start menu, then select Shut down to do a normal shutdown.

>

From the log-in screen, select

> Shut down. to launch Shut Down Press Windows. Select Shut down from the drop-down list then select OK. If your Notebook PC is unresponsive, press and hold the power button for at least four (4) seconds until your Notebook PC turns off. 58 Notebook PC E-Manual Putting your Notebook PC to sleep To put your Notebook PC to Sleep mode:

or Launch the Start menu, then select Sleep to put your Notebook PC to sleep.

>

From the log-in screen, select

> Sleep. Press Select Sleep from the drop-down list then select OK. to launch Shut Down Windows. NOTE: You can also put your Notebook PC to Sleep mode by pressing the power button once. 59 Notebook PC E-Manual 60 Notebook PC E-Manual Chapter 4:

Power-On Self-Test (POST) 61 Notebook PC E-Manual The Power-On Self-Test (POST) The POST (Power-On-Self-Test) is a series of software-controlled diagnostic tests that run when you turn on or restart your Notebook PC. The software that controls the POST is installed as a permanent part of the Notebook PCs architecture. Using POST to access BIOS and Troubleshoot During POST, you can access the BIOS settings or run troubleshooting options using the function keys of your Notebook PC. You may refer to the following information for more details. BIOS The BIOS (Basic Input and Output System) stores system hardware settings that are needed for system startup in the Notebook PC. The default BIOS settings apply to most conditions of your Notebook PC. Do not change the default BIOS settings except in the following circumstances:

An error message appears onscreen during system bootup and requests you to run the BIOS Setup. You have installed a new system component that requires further BIOS settings or updates. WARNING! Using inappropriate BIOS settings may result to system instability or boot failure. We strongly recommend that you change the BIOS settings only with the help of a trained service personnel. Accessing BIOS Restart your Notebook PC then press during POST. 62 Notebook PC E-Manual BIOS Settings NOTE: The BIOS screens in this section are for reference only. The actual screens may differ by model and territory. Boot This menu allows you to set your boot option priorities. You may refer to the following procedures when setting your boot priority. 1. On the Boot screen, select Boot Option #1. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Boot Security Save & Exit Boot Configuration Fast Boot [Enabled]

Launch CSM [Disabled]

Driver Option Priorities Boot Option Priorities Boot Option #1 [Windows Boot Manager]

Add New Boot Option Delete Boot Option Sets the system boot order

: Select Screen

: Select Item Enter: Select

+/ : Change Opt. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC : Exit Version 2.16.1243 Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. 63 Notebook PC E-Manual 2. Press and select a device as the Boot Option #1. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Boot Security Save & Exit Boot Configuration Fast Boot [Enabled]

Launch CSM [Disabled]

Sets the system boot order Driver Option Priorities Boot Option #1 Boot Option Priorities Windows Boot Manager Boot Option #1 [Windows Boot Manager]

Disabled Add New Boot Option Delete Boot Option

: Select Screen

: Select Item Enter: Select

+/ : Change Opt. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC : Exit Version 2.16.1243 Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. 64 Notebook PC E-Manual Security This menu allows you to set up the administrator and user password of your Notebook PC. It also allows you to control the access to your Notebook PCs hard disk drive, input/output (I/O) interface, and USB interface. NOTE:

If you install a User Password, you will be prompted to input this before entering your Notebook PC's operating system. If you install an Administrator Password, you will be prompted to input this before entering BIOS. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Boot Security Save & Exit Password Description If ONLY the Administrators password is set, then this only limits access to Setup and is only asked for when entering Setup. If ONLY the users password is set, then this is a power on password and must be entered to boot or enter Setup. In Setup, the User will have Administrator rights. Administrator Password Status NOT INSTALLED User Password Status NOT INSTALLED Administrator Password User Password HDD Password Status : NOT INSTALLED Set Master Password Set User Password I/O Interface Security System Mode state User Secure Boot state Enabled Secure Boot Control [Enabled]

Key Management Set Administrator Password. The password length must be in the following range:

Minimum length 3 Maximum length 20

: Select Screen

: Select Item Enter: Select

+/ : Change Opt. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC : Exit Version 2.16.1243 Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Version 2.16.1243 Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. 65 Notebook PC E-Manual To set the password:

1. 2. 3. On the Security screen, select Administrator Password or User Password. Type in a password then press

. Re-type to confirm the password then press

. To clear the password:

On the Security screen, select Administrator Password or User Password. Type in the current password then press

. Leave the Create New Password field blank then press

. Select Yes in the confirmation box then press

. 1. 2. 3. 4. 66 Notebook PC E-Manual I/O Interface Security In the Security menu, you can access I/O Interface Security to lock or unlock some interface functions of your Notebook PC. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Security I/O Interface Security LAN Network Interface [UnLock]

Wireless Network Interface [UnLock]

HD AUDIO Interface [UnLock]

USB Interface Security LAN Network Interface Lock UnLock If Locked, LAN controller will be disabled.

: Select Screen

: Select Item Enter: Select

+/ : Change Opt. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC : Exit Version 2.16.1243 Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. To lock an interface:

1. On the Security screen, select I/O Interface Security. 2. Select an interface you would like to lock then press

. 3. Select Lock. 67 Notebook PC E-Manual USB Interface Security Through the I/O Interface Security menu, you can also access USB Interface Security to lock or unlock ports and devices. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Security USB Interface Security USB Interface [UnLock]

If Locked, all USB device will be disabled External Ports [UnLock]

CMOS Camera [UnLock]

Card Reader [UnLock]

USB Interface Lock UnLock

: Select Screen

: Select Item Enter: Select

+/ : Change Opt. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC : Exit Version 2.16.1243 Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. To lock the USB interface:

1. On the Security screen, select I/O Interface Security > USB Interface Security. 2. Select an interface that you would like to lock then select Lock. NOTE: Setting the USB Interface to Lock also locks and hides the External Ports and other devices included under USB Interface Security. 68 Notebook PC E-Manual Set Master Password In the Security menu, you can use Set Master Password to set up a password-enabled access to your hard disk drive. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Boot Security Save & Exit Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2011 American Megatrends, Inc. Password Description Set HDD Master Password. If ONLY the Administrators password is set,then this only limits access to Setup

***Advisable to and is only asked for when entering Setup. Power Cycle System If ONLY the users password is set, then after Setting Hard this is a power on password and must be Disk Passwords***

entered to boot or enter Setup. In Setup, the User will have Administrator rights. Administrator Password Status NOT INSTALLED User Password Status NOT INSTALLED Administrator Password User Password HDD Password Status : NOT INSTALLED Set Master Password Set User Password I/O Interface Security

: Select Screen

: Select Item Enter: Select

+/ : Change Opt. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC : Exit Version 2.16.1243 Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. To set the HDD password:

1. On the Security screen, select Set Master Password. 2. Type in a password then press

. 3. 4. Re-type to confirm the password then press

. Select Set User Password then repeat the previous steps to set up the user password. 69 Notebook PC E-Manual Save & Exit To keep your configuration settings, select Save Changes and Exit before exiting the BIOS. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Boot Security Save & Exit Save Changes and Exit Discard Changes and Exit Save Options Save Changes Discard Changes Restore Defaults Boot Override Windows Boot Manager Launch EFI Shell from filesystem device Exit system setup after saving the changes.

: Select Screen

: Select Item Enter: Select

+/ : Change Opt. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC : Exit Version 2.16.1243 Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. 70 Notebook PC E-Manual To update the BIOS:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Verify the Notebook PCs exact model then download the latest BIOS file for your model from the ASUS website. Save a copy of the downloaded BIOS file to a flash disk drive. Connect your flash disk drive to your Notebook PC. Restart your Notebook PC then press during POST. From the BIOS menu, Select Advanced > Start Easy Flash, then press

. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2012 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Boot Security Save & Exit Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2011 American Megatrends, Inc. Start Easy Flash Internal Pointing Device [Enabled]

Wake on Lid Open [Enabled]

Power Off Energy Saving [Enabled]

SATA Configuration Graphics Configuration Intel (R) Anti-Theft Technology Corporation USB Configuration Network Stack Press Enter to run the utility to select and update BIOS.

: Select Screen

: Select Item Enter: Select

+/ : Change Opt. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC : Exit Version 2.16.1243 Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. 71 Notebook PC E-Manual 6. Locate your downloaded BIOS file in the flash disk drive then press

. ASUSTek Easy Flash Utility FLASH TYPE: Generic Flash Type New BIOS Platform: Unknown Version: Unknown Build Date: Unknown Build Time: Unknown Current BIOS Platform: TP501 Version: 101 Build Date: Jan 26 2015 Build Time: 11:51:05 FSO FS1 FS2 FS3 FS4 0 EFI

<DIR>

[]: Switch []: Choose [q]: Exit [Enter]: Enter/Execute 7. After the BIOS update process, select Exit > Restore Defaults to restore the system to its default settings. 72 Notebook PC E-Manual Recovering your system Using recovery options on your Notebook PC allows you to restore the system to its original state or simply refresh its settings to help improve performance. IMPORTANT!

Backup all your data files before doing any recovery option on your Notebook PC. Note down important customized settings such as network settings, user names, and passwords to avoid data loss. Ensure that your Notebook PC is plugged in to a power source before resetting your system. Windows 10 allows you to do any of the following recovery options:

Keep my files - This option allows you refresh your Notebook PC without affecting personal files (photos, music, videos, documents). Using this option, you can restore your Notebook PC to its default settings and delete other installed apps. Remove everything - This option resets your Notebook PC to its factory settings. You must backup your data before doing this option. 73 Notebook PC E-Manual Go back to an earlier build - This option allows you to go back to an earlier build. Use this option if this build is not working for you. Advanced startup - Using this option allows you to perform other advanced recovery options on your Notebook PC such as:

-

-

Using a USB drive, network connection or Windows recovery DVD to startup your Notebook PC. Using Troubleshoot to enable any of these advanced recovery options: System Restore, System Image Recovery, Startup Repair, Command Prompt, UEFI Firmware Settings, and Startup Settings. Performing a recovery option Refer to the following steps if you want to access and use any of the available recovery options for your Notebook PC. 1. Launch Settings and select Update and security. 74 Notebook PC E-Manual 2. Under the Update and security option, select Recovery then select the recovery option you would like to perform. 75 Notebook PC E-Manual 76 Notebook PC E-Manual Tips and FAQs 77 Notebook PC E-Manual Useful tips for your Notebook PC To help you maximize the use of your Notebook PC, maintain its system performance, and ensure all your data are kept secured, here are some useful tips that you can follow:

Update Windows periodically to ensure that your applications have the latest security settings. Use an anti-virus software to protect your data and keep this updated too. Unless absolutely necessary, refrain from using force shutdown to turn off your Notebook PC. Always backup your data and make it a point to create a backup data in an external storage drive. Refrain from using the Notebook PC at extremely high temperatures. If you are not going to use your Notebook PC for a long period of time (at least a month), we recommend that you take out the battery if the battery is removable. Disconnect all external devices and ensure you have the following items prior to resetting your Notebook PC:

-

-

-

-

Product key for your operating systems and other installed applications Backup data Log in ID and password Internet connection information 78 Notebook PC E-Manual Hardware FAQs 1. A black dot, or sometimes a colored dot, appears onscreen when I turn on the Notebook PC. What should I do?

Although these dots normally appear onscreen, they will not affect your system. If the incident continues and subsequently affects system performance, consult an authorized ASUS service center. 2. My display panel has an uneven color and brightness. How can I fix this?

The color and brightness of your display panel may be affected by the angle and current position of your Notebook PC. The brightness and color tone of your Notebook PC may also vary per model. You may use the function keys or the display settings in your operating system to adjust the appearance of your display panel. 3. How can I maximize my Notebook PC s battery life?

You can try doing any of the following suggestions:

Use the function keys to adjust the display brightness. If you are not using any Wi-Fi connection, switch your system into Airplane mode. Disconnect unused USB devices. Close unused applications, especially those that take up too much system memory. 79 Notebook PC E-Manual 4. My battery charge indicator does not light up. Whats wrong?

Check whether the power adapter or battery pack is attached correctly. You may also disconnect the power adapter or battery pack, wait for a minute, then reconnect them again to the power outlet and Notebook PC. If the problem still exists, contact your local ASUS service center for assistance. 5. Why is my touchpad not working?

Press to enable your touchpad. 6. When I play audio and video files, why cant I hear any sound from my Notebook PCs audio speakers?

You can try doing any of the following suggestions:

Press to turn up the speaker volume. Check if your speakers were set to mute. Check if a headphone jack is connected to your Notebook PC and remove it. 7. What should I do if my Notebook PCs power adapter gets lost or my battery stops working?

Contact your local ASUS service center for assistance. 80 Notebook PC E-Manual 8. My Notebook PC cannot do keystrokes correctly because my cursor keeps on moving. What should I do?

Make sure that nothing accidentally touches or presses on your touchpad while you type on the keyboard. You can also disable your touchpad by pressing

. 9. Instead of showing letters, pressing the U, I, and O keys on my keyboard displays numbers. How can I change this?

Press the key or

(on selected models) on your Notebook PC to turn off this feature and use the said keys for inputting letters. 81 Notebook PC E-Manual Software FAQs 1. When I turn on my Notebook PC, the power indicator lights up but nothing appears on my screen. What can I do to fix this?

You can try doing any of the following suggestions:

Force shutdown your Notebook PC by pressing the power button for at least four (4) seconds. Check if the power adapter and battery pack are inserted correctly then turn on your Notebook PC. If the problem still exists, contact your local ASUS service center for assistance. 2. What should I do when my screen displays this message:

Remove disks or other media. Press any key to restart.?

You can try doing any of the following suggestions:

Remove all connected USB devices then restart your Notebook PC. Remove any optical discs that are left inside the optical drive then restart. If the problem still exists, your Notebook PC might have a memory storage problem. Contact your local ASUS service center for assistance. 3. My Notebook PC boots slower than usual and my operating system lags. How can I fix this?

Delete the applications you recently installed or were not included with your operating system package then restart your system. 82 Notebook PC E-Manual 4. My Notebook PC does not boot up. How can I fix this?

You can try doing any of the following suggestions:

Remove all connected devices to your Notebook PC then restart your system. If the problem still exists, contact your local ASUS service center for assistance. 5. Why cant my Notebook PC wake up from sleep mode?

You need to press the power button to resume your last working state. Your system might have completely used up its battery power. Connect the power adapter to your Notebook PC and connect to a power outlet then press the power button. 83 Notebook PC E-Manual 84 Notebook PC E-Manual Appendices 85 Notebook PC E-Manual Blu-ray ROM Drive Information The Blu-ray ROM Drive allows you to view high definition (HD) videos and other disc file formats such as DVDs and CDs. NOTE: The Blue-ray ROM Drive is available on selected models. Region Definitions Region A North, Central and South American countries, and their territories; Taiwan, Hong Kong, Macao, Japan, Korea (South and North), South East Asian countries and their territories. Region B European, African, and South West Asian countries and their territories; Australia and New Zealand. Region C Central, South Asian, Eastern European countries and their territories; China and Mongolia. NOTE: Refer to Blu-ray Disc website at www.blu-raydisc.com/en/Technical/FAQs/Blu-

rayDiscforVideo.aspx for more details. Internal Modem Compliancy The Notebook PC with internal modem model complies with JATE (Japan), FCC

(US, Canada, Korea, Taiwan), and CTR21. The internal modem has been approved in accordance with Council Decision 98/482/EC for pan-European single terminal connection to the public switched telephone network (PSTN). However due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in different countries, the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network termination point. In the event of problems you should contact your equipment supplier in the first instance. 86 Notebook PC E-Manual Overview On 4th August 1998 the European Council Decision regarding the CTR 21 has been published in the Official Journal of the EC. The CTR 21 applies to all non voice terminal equipment with DTMF-dialling which is intended to be connected to the analogue PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network). CTR 21 (Common Technical Regulation) for the attachment requirements for connection to the analogue public switched telephone networks of terminal equipment (excluding terminal equipment supporting the voice telephony justified case service) in which network addressing, if provided, is by means of dual tone multi-frequency signalling. Network Compatibility Declaration Statement to be made by the manufacturer to the Notified Body and the vendor:

This declaration will indicate the networks with which the equipment is designed to work and any notified networks with which the equipment may have inter-

working difficulties. Statement to be made by the manufacturer to the user: This declaration will indicate the networks with which the equipment is designed to work and any notified networks with which the equipment may have inter-working difficulties. The manufacturer shall also associate a statement to make it clear where network compatibility is dependent on physical and software switch settings. It will also advise the user to contact the vendor if it is desired to use the equipment on another network. Up to now the Notified Body of CETECOM issued several pan-European approvals using CTR 21. The results are Europes first modems which do not require regulatory approvals in each individual European country. Non-Voice Equipment Answering machines and loud-speaking telephones can be eligible as well as modems, fax machines, auto-dialers and alarm systems. Equipment in which the end-to-end quality of speech is controlled by regulations (e.g. handset telephones and in some countries also cordless telephones) is excluded. 87 Notebook PC E-Manual This table shows the countries currently under the CTR21 standard. Country Austria1 Belgium Czech Republic Denmark1 Finland France Germany Greece Hungary Iceland Ireland Italy Israel Lichtenstein Luxemburg The Netherlands1 Norway Poland Portugal Spain Sweden Switzerland United Kingdom More Testing No No Not Applicable Yes No No No No Not Applicable No No Still Pending No No No Yes No Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable No No No Applied Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Still Pending No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes Yes Yes 88 Notebook PC E-Manual This information was copied from CETECOM and is supplied without liability. For updates to this table, you may visit http://www.cetecom.de/technologies/ctr_21. html 1 National requirements will apply only if the equipment may use pulse dialling

(manufacturers may state in the user guide that the equipment is only intended to support DTMF signalling, which would make any additional testing superfluous). In The Netherlands additional testing is required for series connection and caller ID facilities. Federal Communications Commission Interference Statement This device complies with FCC Rules Part 15. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission

(FCC) rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. 89 Notebook PC E-Manual Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. WARNING! The use of a shielded-type power cord is required in order to meet FCC emission limits and to prevent interference to the nearby radio and television reception. It is essential that only the supplied power cord be used. Use only shielded cables to connect I/O devices to this equipment. You are cautioned that changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void your authority to operate the equipment.

(Reprinted from the Code of Federal Regulations #47, part 15.193, 1993. Washington DC: Office of the Federal Register, National Archives and Records Administration, U.S. Government Printing Office.) FCC Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure Caution Statement WARNING! Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate this equipment. The manufacture declares that this device is limited to Channels 1 through 11 in the 2.4GHz frequency by specified firmware controlled in the USA. This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. To maintain compliance with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, please avoid direct contact to the transmitting antenna during transmitting. End users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. 90 Notebook PC E-Manual RF Exposure Information (SAR) This device meets the governments requirements for exposure to radio waves. This device is designed and manufactured not to exceed the emission limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S. Government. The exposure standard employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6 W/kg. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions accepted by the FCC with the EUT transmitting at the specified power level in different channels. The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this device with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines. SAR information on this device is on file with the FCC and can be found under the Display Grant section of www.fcc.gov/eot/ea/fccid after searching on FCC ID:

MSQ8260NG RF Exposure warning This equipment complies with FCC RF exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. The equipment must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. 91 Notebook PC E-Manual CE Mark Warning This device complies with the R&TTE Directive (1999/5/EC), the EMC Directive

(2004/108/EC), and the Low Voltage Directive (2006/95/EC) issued by the Commission of the European Community. Countries where the device will be sold to:

AT EE IT NO BE ES IS PL BG FI LI PT CH FR LT RO CY GB LU SE CZ GR LV SI DE HU MT SK DK IE NL TR RF Exposure information (SAR) - CE This device meets the EU requirements (1999/519/EC) on the limitation of exposure of the general public to electromagnetic fields by way of health protection. The limits are part of extensive recommendations for the protection of the general public. These recommendations have been developed and checked by independent scientific organizations through regular and thorough evaluations of scientific studies. The unit of measurement for the European Councils recommended limit for mobile devices is the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR), and the SAR limit is 2.0 W/Kg averaged over 10 gram of body tissue. It meets the requirements of the International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP). For next-to-body operation, this device has been tested and meets the ICNRP exposure guidelines and the European Standard EN 50566 and EN 62209-2. SAR is measured with the device directly contacted to the body while transmitting at the highest certified output power level in all frequency bands of the mobile device. 92 Notebook PC E-Manual IC Radiation Exposure Statement for Canada This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. To maintain compliance with IC RF exposure compliance requirements, please avoid direct contact to the transmitting antenna during transmitting. End users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause interference and This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. To prevent radio interference to the licensed service (i.e. co-channel Mobile Satellite systems) this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing. This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B) This device and its antenna(s) must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter, except tested built-in radios. 93 Notebook PC E-Manual Dclaration dIndustrie Canada relative lexposition aux ondes radio Cet appareil est conforme aux limites dexposition aux radiations dIndustrie Canada dfinies pour un environnement non-contrl. Pour maintenir la conformit avec les exigences dexposition RF dIC, veuillez viter tout contact direct avec lantenne pendant lmission. Les utilisateurs finaux doivent suivre les instructions de fonctionnement spcifiques pour satisfaire la conformit aux expositions RF. Son utilisation est sujette aux deux conditions suivantes:

Cet appareil ne peut pas causer dinterfrence, et Cet appareil doit accepter toute interfrence, y compris les interfrences qui pourraient causer un fonctionnement non souhait de lappareil. Pour viter les interfrences radio avec le service sous licence (cest -dire le partage de canal avec les systmes de tlphonie satellite), cet appareil est destin tre utilis en intrieur et loin des fentres pour fournir un blindage maximal. Tout appareil (ou son antenne dmission) qui est install en extrieur est sujet cette licence. Le present appareil est conforme aux CNR dIndustrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B) Cet appareil et son antenne ne doivent pas tre situs ou fonctionner en conjonction avec une autre antenne ou un autre metteur, exception faites des radios intgres qui ont t testes. 94 Notebook PC E-Manual Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure Information The radiated output power of the Wireless Device is below the Industry Canada

(IC) radio frequency exposure limits. The Wireless Device should be used in such a manner such that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. This device has been evaluated for and shown compliant with the IC Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) limits when operated in portable exposure conditions. Informations concernant lexposition aux tilizeive radio (RF) La puissance de sortie mise par lappareil de sans tilize infrieure la limite dexposition aux tilizeive radio dIndustry Canada (IC). Utilisez lappareil de sans fil de faon tilizei les contacts humains lors du fonctionnement normal. Ce tilizeive a t valu pour et dmontr conforme la Taux IC dabsorption spcifique (SAR) des limites lorsquil est tilize dans des conditions dexposition portatifs. 95 Notebook PC E-Manual Wireless Operation Channel for Different Domains N. America 2.412-2.462 GHz Japan 2.412-2.484 GHz Europe ETSI 2.412-2.472 GHz Ch01 through CH11 Ch01 through Ch14 Ch01 through Ch13 France Restricted Wireless Frequency Bands Some areas of France have a restricted frequency band. The worst case maximum authorized power indoors are:

10mW for the entire 2.4 GHz band (2400 MHz2483.5 MHz) 100mW for frequencies between 2446.5 MHz and 2483.5 MHz NOTE: Channels 10 through 13 inclusive operate in the band 2446.6 MHz to 2483.5 MHz. There are few possibilities for outdoor use: on private property or on the private property of public persons, use is subject to a preliminary authorization procedure by the Ministry of Defense, with maximum authorized power of 100mW in the 2446.52483.5 MHz band. Use outdoors on public property is not permitted. In the departments listed below, for the entire 2.4 GHz band:

Maximum authorized power indoors is 100mW Maximum authorized power outdoors is 10mW 96 Notebook PC E-Manual Departments in which the use of the 24002483.5 MHz band is permitted with an EIRP of less than 100mW indoors and less than 10mW outdoors:

01 Ain 02 Aisne 05 Hautes Alpes 08 Ardennes 11 Aude 24 Dordogne 32 Gers 41 Loir et Cher 55 Meuse 60 Oise 12 Aveyron 25 Doubs 36 Indre 45 Loiret 58 Nivre 61 Orne 03 Allier 09 Arige 16 Charente 26 Drme 37 Indre et Loire 50 Manche 59 Nord 63 Puy du Dme 64 Pyrnes Atlantique 66 Pyrnes Orientales 67 Bas Rhin 68 Haut Rhin 70 Haute Sane 71 Sane et Loire 75 Paris 88 Vosges 94 Val de Marne 82 Tarn et Garonne 84 Vaucluse 89 Yonne 90 Territoire de Belfort This requirement is likely to change over time, allowing you to use your wireless LAN card in more areas within France. Please check with ART for the latest information (www.arcep.fr) NOTE: Your WLAN Card transmits less than 100mW, but more than 10mW. 97 Notebook PC E-Manual UL Safety Notices Required for UL 1459 covering telecommunications (telephone) equipment intended to be electrically connected to a telecommunication network that has an operating voltage to ground that does not exceed 200V peak, 300V peak-to-peak, and 105V rms, and installed or used in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70). When using the Notebook PC modem, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons, including the following:

DO NOT use the Notebook PC near water, for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool. DO NOT use the Notebook PC during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. DO NOT use the Notebook PC in the vicinity of a gas leak. Required for UL 1642 covering primary (nonrechargeable) and secondary

(rechargeable) lithium batteries for use as power sources in products. These batteries contain metallic lithium, or a lithium alloy, or a lithium ion, and may consist of a single electrochemical cell or two or more cells connected in series, parallel, or both, that convert chemical energy into electrical energy by an irreversible or reversible chemical reaction. DO NOT dispose the Notebook PC battery pack in a fire, as they may explode. Check with local codes for possible special disposal instructions to reduce the risk of injury to persons due to fire or explosion. DO NOT use power adapters or batteries from other devices to reduce the risk of injury to persons due to fire or explosion. Use only UL certified power adapters or batteries supplied by the manufacturer or authorized retailers. 98 Notebook PC E-Manual Power Safety Requirement Products with electrical current ratings up to 6A and weighing more than 3Kg must use approved power cords greater than or equal to: H05VV-F, 3G, 0.75mm2 or H05VV-F, 2G, 0.75mm2. TV Notices Note to CATV System InstallerCable distribution system should be grounded

(earthed) in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 70, the National Electrical Code (NEC), in particular Section 820.93, Grounding of Outer Conductive Shield of a Coaxial Cable installation should include bonding the screen of the coaxial cable to the earth at the building entrance. REACH Complying with the REACH (Registration, Evaluation, Authorization, and Restriction of Chemicals) regulatory framework, we publish the chemical substances in our products at ASUS REACH website at http://csr.asus.com/english/

REACH.htm. Macrovision Corporation Product Notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S.A. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Prevention of Hearing Loss To prevent possible hearing damage, do not listen at high volume levels for long periods. 99 Notebook PC E-Manual Nordic Lithium Cautions (for lithium-ion batteries) CAUTION! Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturers instructions. (English) ATTENZIONE! Rischio di esplosione della batteria se sostituita in modo errato. Sostituire la batteria con un una di tipo uguale o equivalente consigliata dalla fabbrica. Non disperdere le batterie nellambiente. (Italian) VORSICHT! Explosionsgefahr bei unsachgemen Austausch der Batterie. Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einem vom Hersteller empfohlenem hnlichen Typ. Entsorgung gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers. (German) ADVARSELI! Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig hndtering. Udskiftning m kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levr det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandren. (Danish) VARNING! Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Anvnd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera anvnt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion. (Swedish) VAROITUS! Paristo voi rjht, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan sousittelemaan tyyppiin. Hvit kytetty paristo valmistagan ohjeiden mukaisesti. (Finnish) ATTENTION! Il y a danger dexplosion sil y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du mre type ou dun type quivalent recommand par le constructeur. Mettre au rebut les batteries usages conformment aux instructions du fabricant. (French) ADVARSEL! Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri. Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten. Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner. (Norwegian)

(Japanese)

!

. (Russian) 100 Notebook PC E-Manual Optical Drive Safety Information Laser Safety Information CD-ROM Drive Safety Warning CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT WARNING! To prevent exposure to the optical drives laser, do not attempt to disassemble or repair the optical drive by yourself. For your safety, contact a professional technician for assistance. Service warning label WARNING! INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN. DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS. CDRH Regulations The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration implemented regulations for laser products on August 2, 1976. These regulations apply to laser products manufactured from August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein or in the laser product installation guide may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Coating Notice IMPORTANT! To provide electrical insulation and maintain electrical safety, a coating is applied to insulate the device except on the areas where the I/O ports are located. 101 Notebook PC E-Manual CTR 21 Approval (for Notebook PC with built-in Modem) Danish Dutch English Finnish French 102 Notebook PC E-Manual German Greek Italian Portuguese Spanish Swedish 103 Notebook PC E-Manual ENERGY STAR complied product ENERGY STAR is a joint program of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and the U.S. Department of Energy helping us all save money and protect the environment through energy efficient products and practices. All ASUS products with the ENERGY STAR logo comply with the ENERGY STAR standard, and the power management feature is enabled by default. The monitor and computer are automatically set to sleep after 10 and 30 minutes of user inactivity. To wake your computer, click the mouse or press any key on the keyboard. Please visit http://www.energystar.gov/powermanagement for detail information on power management and its benefits to the environment. In addition, please visit http://www.energystar.gov for detail information on the ENERGY STAR joint program. NOTE: Energy Star is NOT supported on FreeDOS and Linux-based operating systems. 104 Notebook PC E-Manual Global Environmental Regulation Compliance and Declaration ASUS follows the green design concept to design and manufacture our products, and makes sure that each stage of the product life cycle of ASUS product is in line with global environmental regulations. In addition, ASUS disclose the relevant information based on regulation requirements. Please refer to http://csr.asus.com/english/Compliance.htm for information disclosure based on regulation requirements ASUS is complied with:

Japan JIS-C-0950 Material Declarations EU REACH SVHC Korea RoHS ASUS Recycling/Takeback Services ASUS recycling and takeback programs come from our commitment to the highest standards for protecting our environment. We believe in providing solutions for you to be able to responsibly recycle our products, batteries, other components as well as the packaging materials. Please go to http://csr.asus.com/

english/Takeback.htm for detailed recycling information in different regions. Rechargeable Battery Recycling Service in North America For US and Canada customers, you can call 1-800-822-8837

(toll-free) for recycling information of your ASUS products rechargeable batteries. Regional notice for California WARNING! This product may contain chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects or other reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. 105 Notebook PC E-Manual Regional notice for Singapore This ASUS product complies with IDA Standards. Complies with IDA Standards DB103778 Regional notice for India This product complies with the India E-waste (Management and Handling)Rule 2011 and prohibits use of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls (PBBs) and polybrominated diphenyl ethers (PBDEs) in concentrations exceeding 0.1 % by weight in homogenous materials and 0.01 % by weight in homogenous materials for cadmium, except for the exemptions listed in Schedule-II of the Rule. Notices for removable batteries Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. The battery and its component must be recycled or disposed of properly. Avis concernant les batteries remplaables La batterie de lordinateur portable peut prsenter un risque dincendie ou de brlure si celle-ci est retire ou dsassemble. La batterie et ses composants doivent tre recycls de faon approprie. 106 Notebook PC E-Manual EC Declaration of Conformity We, the undersigned, Manufacturer:

Address:

Authorized representative in Europe:

Address, City:

Country:

declare the following apparatus:

Product name :

Model name :

conform with the essential requirements of the following directives:

Notebook TP501U,J501U,R518U ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. 4F, No. 150, LI-TE Rd., PEITOU, TAIPEI 112, TAIWAN ASUS COMPUTER GmbH HARKORT STR. 21-23, 40880 RATINGEN GERMANY 2004/108/EC-EMC Directive EN 55022:2010+AC:2011 EN 61000-3-2:2014 EN 55013:2001+A1:2003+A2:2006 1999/5/EC-R&TTE Directive EN 300 328 V1.8.1(2012-06) EN 300 440-1 V1.6.1(2010-08) EN 300 440-2 V1.4.1(2010-08) EN 301 511 V9.0.2(2003-03) EN 301 908-1 V5.2.1(2011-05) EN 301 908-2 V5.2.1(2011-07) EN 301 893 V1.7.1(2012-06) EN 302 544-2 V1.1.1(2009-01) EN 302 623 V1.1.1(2009-01) EN 50360:2001 EN 62479:2010 EN 50385:2002 EN 62311:2008 2006/95/EC-LVD Directive EN 60950-1: 2006 / A12: 2011 EN 60950-1: 2006 / A2: 2013 2009/125/EC-ErP Directive Regulation (EC) No. 1275/2008 Regulation (EC) No. 642/2009 EN 55024:2010 EN 61000-3-3:2013 EN 55020:2007+A11:2011 EN 301 489-1 V1.9.2(2011-09) EN 301 489-3 V1.4.1(2002-08) EN 301 489-4 V1.4.1(2009-05) EN 301 489-7 V1.3.1(2005-11) EN 301 489-9 V1.4.1(2007-11) EN 301 489-17 V2.2.1(2012-09) EN 301 489-24 V1.5.1(2010-09) EN 302 326-2 V1.2.2(2007-06) EN 302 326-3 V1.3.1(2007-09) EN 301 357-2 V1.4.1(2008-11) EN 302 291-1 V1.1.1(2005-07) EN 302 291-2 V1.1.1(2005-07) EN 50566:2013 EN 60065:2002 / A12: 2011 Regulation (EC) No. 278/2009 Regulation (EC) No. 617/2013 2011/65/EU-RoHS Directive Ver. 150326 CE marking

(EC conformity marking) Position : CEO Name : Jerry Shen Declaration Date: 26/11/2015 Year to begin affixing CE marking: 2015 Signature : __________ 107 Notebook PC E-Manual 108 Notebook PC E-Manual

E10936 First Edition January 2016 E-Manual COPYRIGHT INFORMATION No part of this manual, including the products and software described in it, may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form or by any means, except documentation kept by the purchaser for backup purposes, without the express written permission of ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. (ASUS). ASUS PROVIDES THIS MANUAL AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL ASUS, ITS DIRECTORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES

(INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF USE OR DATA, INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS AND THE LIKE), EVEN IF ASUS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES ARISING FROM ANY DEFECT OR ERROR IN THIS MANUAL OR PRODUCT. Products and corporate names appearing in this manual may or may not be registered trademarks or copyrights of their respective companies, and are used only for identification or explanation and to the owners benefit, without intent to infringe. SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL ARE FURNISHED FOR INFORMATIONAL USE ONLY, AND ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE, AND SHOULD NOT BE CONSTRUED AS A COMMITMENT BY ASUS. ASUS ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY FOR ANY ERRORS OR INACCURACIES THAT MAY APPEAR IN THIS MANUAL, INCLUDING THE PRODUCTS AND SOFTWARE DESCRIBED IN IT. Copyright 2016 ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY Circumstances may arise where because of a default on ASUS part or other liability, you are entitled to recover damages from ASUS. In each such instance, regardless of the basis on which you are entitled to claim damages from ASUS, ASUS is liable for no more than damages for bodily injury (including death) and damage to real property and tangible personal property; or any other actual and direct damages resulted from omission or failure of performing legal duties under this Warranty Statement, up to the listed contract price of each product. ASUS will only be responsible for or indemnify you for loss, damages or claims based in contract, tort or infringement under this Warranty Statement. This limit also applies to ASUS suppliers and its reseller. It is the maximum for which ASUS, its suppliers, and your reseller are collectively responsible. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES IS ASUS LIABLE FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING: (1) THIRD-PARTY CLAIMS AGAINST YOU FOR DAMAGES; (2) LOSS OF, OR DAMAGE TO, YOUR RECORDS OR DATA; OR (3) SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR INDIRECT DAMAGES OR FOR ANY ECONOMIC CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS), EVEN IF ASUS, ITS SUPPLIERS OR YOUR RESELLER IS INFORMED OF THEIR POSSIBILITY. SERVICE AND SUPPORT Visit our multi-language website at https://www.asus.com/support/

2 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Table of Contents About this manual .....................................................................................................7 Conventions used in this manual .............................................................................8 Icons ....................................................................................................................................8 Typography .......................................................................................................................8 Safety precautions .....................................................................................................9 Using your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock .................................................9 Caring for your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock .........................................10 Proper disposal ................................................................................................................11 Chapter 1: Hardware Setup ASUS Tablet ..................................................................................................................14 Front View ..........................................................................................................................14 Top View .............................................................................................................................16 Bottom Side ......................................................................................................................18 Left Side .............................................................................................................................19 Right Side ..........................................................................................................................20 ASUS Mobile Dock (optional) ................................................................................21 Top View .............................................................................................................................21 Left Side .............................................................................................................................24 Right Side ..........................................................................................................................25 Chapter 2: Using your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock Getting started ...........................................................................................................28 ASUS Tablet .......................................................................................................................28 ASUS Mobile Dock ..........................................................................................................31 Using your ASUS Tablet with the ASUS Mobile Dock ........................................32 Gestures for the touch screen panel and touchpad .....................................33 Using touch screen panel gestures ..........................................................................33 Using the touchpad .......................................................................................................36 Using the keyboard ...................................................................................................40 Function keys ...................................................................................................................40 Windows 10 keys ..........................................................................................................41 3 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Chapter 3: Working with Windows 10 Starting for the first time .........................................................................................44 Start menu ...................................................................................................................45 Launching the Start menu ..........................................................................................46 Opening programs from the Start menu ...............................................................46 Windows apps ..........................................................................................................47 Working with Windows apps....................................................................................48 Customizing Windows apps .....................................................................................48 Task view .......................................................................................................................51 Snap feature ................................................................................................................52 Snap hotspots ..................................................................................................................52 Action Center ..............................................................................................................54 Other keyboard shortcuts ......................................................................................55 Connecting to wireless networks ........................................................................57 Wi-Fi .....................................................................................................................................57 Bluetooth ..........................................................................................................................58 Airplane mode .................................................................................................................59 Turning your ASUS Tablet off.................................................................................60 Putting your ASUS Tablet to sleep .......................................................................61 Chapter 4: Power-On Self-Test (POST) The Power-On Self-Test (POST) .............................................................................64 Using POST to access BIOS and Troubleshoot......................................................64 BIOS ................................................................................................................................64 Accessing BIOS ................................................................................................................65 BIOS Settings ....................................................................................................................65 Recovering your system ..........................................................................................72 Performing a recovery option ....................................................................................73 4 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Tips and FAQs Useful tips for your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock ............................76 Hardware FAQs ...........................................................................................................77 Software FAQs .............................................................................................................80 Appendices Internal Modem Compliancy .....................................................................................84 Overview ............................................................................................................................84 Network Compatibility Declaration .........................................................................84 Non-Voice Equipment ..................................................................................................85 Federal Communications Commission Interference Statement ...................86 Slave Equipment .............................................................................................................87 RF Exposure warning .....................................................................................................87 FCC Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure Caution Statement .................................88 RF Exposure Information (SAR) ..................................................................................88 RF Exposure information (SAR) - CE .........................................................................89 CE Mark Warning .............................................................................................................89 IC Radiation Exposure Statement for Canada ......................................................90 Dclaration dIndustrie Canada relative lexposition aux ondes radio ...91 Radiation Exposure Statement ..................................................................................92 Dclaration d'exposition aux radiations.................................................................92 Caution ...............................................................................................................................92 Avertissement ..................................................................................................................93 Wireless Operation Channel for Different Domains ...........................................94 France Restricted Wireless Frequency Bands .......................................................94 UL Safety Notices ............................................................................................................96 5 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Power Safety Requirement ..........................................................................................97 TV Notices .........................................................................................................................97 REACH .................................................................................................................................97 Macrovision Corporation Product Notice ..............................................................97 Nordic Lithium Cautions (for lithium-ion batteries) ...........................................98 Optical Drive Safety Information ..............................................................................99 CTR 21 Approval (for ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock with built-in modem) ..............................................................................................................................100 ENERGY STAR complied product ..............................................................................102 Global Environmental Regulation Compliance and Declaration ..................103 ASUS Recycling/Takeback Services ..........................................................................103 Prevention of Hearing Loss .........................................................................................103 Notices for removable batteries ................................................................................104 Avis concernant les batteries remplaables..........................................................104 Rechargeable Battery Recycling Service in North America.............................104 Regional notice for India ..............................................................................................104 Regional notice for California .....................................................................................104 Regional notice for Singapore ...................................................................................105 Japan Technical Conformity Mark ............................................................................105 6 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual About this manual This manual provides information about the hardware and software features of your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock organized through the following chapters:

Chapter 1: Hardware Setup This chapter details the hardware components of your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock. Chapter 2: Using your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock This chapter shows you how to use the different parts of your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock. Chapter 3: Working with Windows 10 This chapter provides an overview of using Windows 10 in your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock. Chapter 4: Power-On Self-Test (POST) This chapter shows you how to use POST to change the settings of your ASUS Tablet. Tips and FAQs This section presents some recommended tips, hardware FAQs, and software FAQs you can refer to for maintaining and fixing common issues with your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock. Appendices This section includes notices and safety statements for your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock. 7 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Conventions used in this manual To highlight key information in this manual, some text are presented as follows:

IMPORTANT! This message contains vital information that must be followed to complete a task. NOTE: This message contains additional information and tips that can help complete tasks. WARNING! This message contains important information that must be followed to keep you safe while performing tasks and prevent damage to your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Docks data and components. Icons The icons below indicate the devices you can use for completing a series of tasks or procedures on your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock.

= Use the touch screen panel.

= Use the touchpad.

= Use the keyboard. Typography Bold

= This indicates a menu or an item that must be selected. Italic

= This indicates sections that you can refer to in this manual. 8 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Safety precautions Using your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock This ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock should only be used in environments with ambient temperatures between 5C (41F) and 35C (95F). Refer to the rating label on the bottom of your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock and ensure that your power adapter complies with this rating. Do not leave your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock on your lap or near any part of your body to prevent discomfort or injury from heat exposure. Do not use damaged power cords, accessories, and other peripherals with your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock. While powered on, ensure that you do not carry or cover your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock with any materials that can reduce air circulation. Do not place your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock on uneven or unstable work surfaces. You can send your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock through x-ray machines (used on items placed on conveyor belts), but do not expose them to magnetic detectors and wands. Contact your airline provider to learn about related in-flight services that can be used and restrictions that must be followed when using your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock in-flight. 9 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Caring for your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock Disconnect the AC power and remove the battery pack (if applicable) before cleaning your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock. Use a clean cellulose sponge or chamois cloth dampened with a solution of nonabrasive detergent and a few drops of warm water. Remove any extra moisture from your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock using a dry cloth. Do not use strong solvents such as thinners, benzene, or other chemicals on or near your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock. Do not place objects on top of your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock. Do not expose your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock to strong magnetic or electrical fields. Do not use or expose your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock near liquids, rain, or moisture. Do not expose your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock to dusty environments. Do not use your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock near gas leaks. 10 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Proper disposal Do not throw your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock in municipal waste. This product has been designed to enable proper reuse of parts and recycling. The symbol of the crossed out wheeled bin indicates that the product (electrical, electronic equipment and mercury-containing button cell battery) should not be placed in municipal waste. Check local regulations for disposal of electronic products. Do not throw the battery in municipal waste. The symbol of the crossed out wheeled bin indicates that the battery should not be placed in municipal waste. 11 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual 12 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Chapter 1:

Hardware Setup 13 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual ASUS Tablet Front View Array microphones The array microphones feature echo canceling, noise suppression, and beam forming functions for better voice recognition and audio recording. Ambient light sensor The ambient light sensor detects the amount of ambient light in your environment. It allows the system to automatically adjust the brightness of the display depending on the ambient light condition Camera The built-in camera allows you to take pictures or record videos. 14 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Touch screen display panel This high-definition touch screen panel provides excellent viewing features for photos, videos, and other multimedia files. It also allows you to operate Windows 10 using touch gestures. NOTE: For more details, refer to the Gestures for the touch screen panel and touchpad section in this manual. 15 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Top View Power button Press the power button to turn your ASUS Tablet on or off. You can also use the power button to put your ASUS Tablet to sleep or hibernate mode, and wake it up from sleep or hibernate mode. In the event that your ASUS Tablet becomes unresponsive, press and hold the power button for at least four (4) seconds until your ASUS Tablet shuts down. Two-color battery charge indicator The two-color LED provides a visual indication of the batterys charge status. Refer to the following table for details:

16 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Color Solid White Solid Orange Blinking Orange Lights off Status The ASUS Tablet is plugged to a power source and the battery power is between 95% and 100%. The ASUS Tablet is plugged to a power source, charging its battery, and the battery power is less than 95%. The ASUS Tablet is running on battery mode and the battery power is less than 10%. The ASUS Tablet is running on battery mode and the battery power is between 10% to 100%. 17 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Bottom Side Dock port Connect your ASUS Mobile Dock to this port to support keyboard, touchpad, and USB port functions. Hinge holes Align and insert the latch hooks into these holes to securely attach your ASUS Tablet to your ASUS Mobile Dock. MicroSD card slot This built-in memory card reader slot supports microSD and microSDHC card formats. 18 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Left Side Audio speakers The built-in audio speakers allow you to hear audio straight from your tablet. Audio features are software controlled. Windows button Press this button to go back to Start screen. If you are already in the Start screen, press this button to go back to the last app you opened. Volume button Press this button to increase or decrease the volume. 19 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Right Side Audio speakers The built-in audio speakers allow you to hear audio straight from your tablet. Audio features are software controlled. USB Type-C port/DisplayPort combo port The USB (Universal Serial Bus) Type-C port provides a transfer rate of up to 5 Gbit/s and is backward compatible to USB 2.0. Use an USB Type-C adapter to connect your ASUS Tablet to an external display. NOTE: Transfer rate of this port may vary per model. USB Type-C port/Power (DC) input combo port The USB (Universal Serial Bus) Type-C port provides a transfer rate of up to 5 Gbit/s and is backward compatible to USB 2.0. Insert the bundled power adapter into this port to charge the battery pack and supply power to your Notebook PC. Headphone/Headset/Microphone jack This port allows you to connect amplified speakers or headphones. You can also use this port to connect your headset or an external microphone. 20 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual ASUS Mobile Dock (optional) NOTE:

The keyboards layout may vary per model, region, or country. The ASUS Mobile Dock may be sold separately. Top View 21 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Two-color battery charge indicator The two-color LED provides a visual indication of the batterys charge status. Refer to the following table for details:

Color Solid White Solid Orange Blinking Orange Lights off Status The ASUS Mobile Dock is plugged to a power source and the battery power is between 95% and 100%. The ASUS Mobile Dock is plugged to a power source, charging its battery, and the battery power is less than 95%. The ASUS Mobile Dock is running on battery mode and the battery power is less than 10%. The ASUS Mobile Dock is running on battery mode and the battery power is between 10% to 100%. 22 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual ASUS Mobile Dock hinge This hinge allows you to connect the tablet to the keyboard dock. It also holds the tablet in place as you adjust it to different viewing angles. Keyboard The keyboard provides full-sized QWERTY keys with a comfortable travel depth for typing. It also enables you to use the function keys, allows quick access to Windows, and controls other multimedia functions. NOTE: The keyboard layout differs by model or region. Touchpad The touchpad allows the use of multi-gestures to navigate onscreen, providing an intuitive user experience. It also simulates the functions of a regular mouse. NOTE: For more details, refer to the Using the touchpad section in this manual. 23 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Left Side USB 3.0 port The USB 3.0 (Universal Serial Bus 3.0) port provides a transfer rate up to 5 Gbit/s and is backward compatible to USB 2.0. 24 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Right Side USB 2.0 port The USB (Universal Serial Bus) port is compatible with USB 2.0 or USB 1.1 devices such as keyboards, pointing devices, flash disk drives, external HDDs, speakers, cameras and printers. 25 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual 26 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Chapter 2:

Using your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock 27 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Getting started ASUS Tablet Charging your ASUS Tablet A. B. Plug the AC power adapter into a 100V~240V power source. Connect the DC power connector into your ASUS Tablets power

(DC) input. NOTE: The power adapter may vary in appearance, depending on models and your region. Use only the bundled power adapter for charging. IMPORTANT!

Power adapter information:

Input voltage: 100-240Vac Input frequency: 50/60Hz Rating output current: 2.25A max. (45W) Rating output voltage: 20V 28 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Powering on your ASUS Tablet IMPORTANT!

Locate the input/output rating label on your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock and ensure that it matches the input/output rating information on your power adapter. Some ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock models may have multiple rating output currents based on the available SKU. Ensure that your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock is connected to the power adapter before turning it on for the first time. We strongly recommend that you use a grounded wall socket while using your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock on power adapter mode. The socket outlet must be easily accessible and near your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock. To disconnect your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock from its main power supply, unplug your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock from the power socket. 29 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual WARNING!

Read the following precautions for your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Docks battery. The battery used in this device may present a risk of fire or chemical burn if removed or disassembled. Follow the warning labels for your personal safety. Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Do not dispose of in fire. Never attempt to short-circuit your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Docks battery. Never attempt to disassemble and reassemble the battery. Discontinue usage if leakage is found. The battery and its components must be recycled or disposed of properly. Keep the battery and other small components away from children. 30 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual ASUS Mobile Dock Charging your ASUS Mobile Dock A. B. C. Dock your ASUS Tablet into your ASUS Mobile Dock. Plug the AC power adapter into a 100V~240V power source. Connect the DC power connector into your ASUS Tablets power

(DC) input. NOTE: For details, refer to the Charging your ASUS Tablet section in this E-Manual. 31 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Using your ASUS Tablet with the ASUS Mobile Dock Refer to the following steps if you want to use both your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock as a Notebook PC. Ensure that both devices are charged. Dock the ASUS Tablet into the ASUS Mobile Dock as shown in the illustration below. 1. 2. 32 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Gestures for the touch screen panel and touchpad Gestures allow you to launch programs and access the settings of your ASUS Tablet. Refer to the following illustrations when using hand gestures on your touch screen panel and touchpad. NOTE: The following screenshots are for reference only. The touch screen panels appearance may vary depending on model. Using touch screen panel gestures The gestures allow you to launch programs and access the settings of your ASUS Tablet. The functions can be activated by using the hand gestures on your ASUS Tablets touch screen panel. Left edge swipe Right edge swipe Swipe from the left edge of the screen to launch Task view. Swipe from the right edge of the screen to launch Action Center. 33 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Tap/Double-tap Press and hold Tap an app to select it. Double-tap an app to launch it. Press and hold to open the right-

click menu. Zoom in Zoom out Spread apart your two fingers on the touch screen panel. Bring together your two fingers on the touch screen panel. 34 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Finger slide Drag Slide your finger to scroll up and down and slide your finger to pan the screen left or right. Drag to create a selection box around multiple items. Drag and drop an item to move it to a new location. 35 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Using the touchpad Moving the pointer You can tap anywhere on the touchpad to activate its pointer, then slide your finger on the touchpad to move the pointer onscreen. Slide horizontally Slide vertically Slide diagonally 36 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual One-finger gestures Tap/Double-tap Tap an app to select it. Double-tap an app to launch it. Drag and drop Double-tap an item, then slide the same finger without lifting it off the touchpad. To drop the item to its new location, lift your finger from the touchpad. 37 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Left-click Right-click Click an app to select it. Double-click an app to launch it. Click this button to open the right-

click menu. NOTE: The areas inside the dotted line represent the locations of the left mouse button and the right mouse button on the touchpad. Two-finger gestures Two-finger scroll (up/down) Two-finger scroll (left/right) Slide two fingers to scroll up or down. Slide two fingers to scroll left or right. 38 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Zoom out Zoom in Bring together your two fingers on the touchpad. Spread apart your two fingers on the touchpad. Drag and drop Select an item then press and hold the left button. Using your other finger, slide on the touchpad to drag the item, lift your finger off the button to drop the item. 39 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Using the keyboard Function keys The function keys on your ASUS Mobile Dock can trigger the following commands:

Puts the ASUS Tablet into Sleep mode Turns Airplane mode on or off NOTE: When enabled, the Airplane mode disables all wireless connectivity. Decreases display brightness Increases display brightness Turns the display panel on or off Toggles the display mode NOTE: Ensure that the second display is connected to your primary display device. Enables or disables the touchpad 40 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Windows 10 keys There are two special Windows keys on your ASUS Mobile Dock, used as below:

Launches the Start menu Displays the drop-down menu 41 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual 42 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Chapter 3:

Working with Windows 10 43 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Starting for the first time When you start your ASUS Tablet for the first time, a series of screens appear to guide you in configuring your Windows 10 operating system. To start your ASUS Tablet for the first time:

1. 2. 3. 4. Press the power button on your ASUS Tablet. Wait for a few minutes until the setup screen appears. From the setup screen, pick your region and a language to use on your ASUS Tablet. Carefully read the License Terms. Select I accept. Follow the onscreen instructions to configure the following basic items:

Personalize Get online Settings Your account 5. After configuring the basic items, Windows 10 proceeds to install your apps and preferred settings. Ensure that your ASUS Tablet is kept powered on during the setup process. 6. Once the setup process is complete, the Desktop appears. NOTE: The screenshots in this chapter are for reference only. 44 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Start menu The Start menu is the main gateway to your ASUS Tablets programs, Windows apps, folders, and settings. Change account settings, lock, or sign out from your account Launch an app from the Start screen Launch Taskview Launch an app from the taskbar Launch Search Launch the Start menu Launch All apps Shut down, restart, or put your ASUS Tablet to sleep Launch Settings Launch File Explorer You can use the Start menu to do these common activities:

Start programs or Windows apps Open commonly used programs or Windows apps Adjust ASUS Tablet settings Get help with the Windows operating system Turn off your ASUS Tablet Log off from Windows or switch to a different user account 45 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Launching the Start menu Tap the Start button your desktop. in the lower-left corner of Position your mouse pointer over the Start button in the lower-left corner of your desktop then click it. Press the Windows logo key on your keyboard. Opening programs from the Start menu One of the most common uses of the Start menu is opening programs installed on your ASUS Tablet. Tap the program to launch it. Position your mouse pointer over the program then click to launch it. Use the arrow keys to browse through the programs. Press to launch it. NOTE: Select All apps at the bottom of the left pane to display a full list of programs and folders on your ASUS Tablet in alphabetical order. 46 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Windows apps These are apps pinned on the right pane of the Start menu and displayed in tiled-format for easy access. NOTE: Some Windows apps require signing in to your Microsoft account before they are fully launched. 47 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Working with Windows apps Use your ASUS Tablets touch screen, touchpad, or keyboard to launch, customize, and close apps. Launching Windows apps from the Start menu Tap the app to launch it. Position your mouse pointer over the app then click to launch it. Use the arrow keys to browse through the apps. Press to launch an app. Customizing Windows apps You can move, resize, unpin, or pin apps to the taskbar from the Start menu using the following steps:

Moving apps Press and hold the app, then drag and drop it to a new location. Position your mouse pointer over the app, then drag and drop the app to a new location. 48 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Resizing apps Press and hold the app, then tap tile size. and select an app Position your mouse pointer over the app and right-click it, then click Resize and select an app tile size. Use the arrow keys to navigate to the app. Press then select Resize and select an app tile size.

, Unpinning apps Press and hold the app, then tap the icon. Position your mouse pointer over the app and right-click it, then click Unpin from Start. Use the arrow keys to navigate to the app. Press then select Unpin from Start.

, 49 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Pinning apps to the taskbar Press and hold the app, then tap Pin to taskbar. Position your mouse pointer over the app and right-click it, then click Pin to taskbar. Use the arrow keys to navigate to the app. Press then select Pin to taskbar.

, Pinning more apps to the Start menu From All apps, press and hold the app you want to add to the Start menu, then tap Pin to Start. From All apps, position your mouse pointer over the app you want to add to the Start menu and right-click it, then click Pin to Start. From All apps, press add to the Start menu, then select Pin to Start. on the app that you want to 50 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Task view Quickly switch between opened apps and programs using the task view feature, you can also use task view to switch between desktops. Launching task view Tap the edge of the screen. icon on the taskbar or swipe form the left Position your mouse pointer over the taskbar and click it. icon on the Press on your keyboard. 51 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Snap feature The Snap feature displays apps side-by-side, allowing you to work or switch between apps. Snap hotspots You can drag and drop apps to these hotspots to snap them into place. 52 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Using Snap or 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. Launch the app you wish to snap. Drag the title bar of your app and drop the app to the edge of the screen to snap. Launch another app and repeat the above steps to snap another app. Launch the app you wish to snap. Press and hold the keys to snap the app. key, then use the arrow Launch another app and repeat the above steps to snap another app. 53 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Action Center Action Center consolidates notifications from apps and presents a single place where you can interact with them. It also has a really useful Quick Actions section at the bottom. Launching Action Center Click the edge of the screen. icon on the taskbar or swipe from the right Position your mouse pointer over the taskbar and click it. icon on the Press on your keyboard. 54 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Other keyboard shortcuts Using the keyboard, you can also use the following shortcuts to help you launch applications and navigate Windows 10.

\

Launches Start menu Launches Action Center Launches the desktop Launches the File Explorer Opens the Share panel Launches Settings Launches Connect panel Activates the Lock screen Minimizes all currently active windows 55 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Launches Search Launches Project panel Opens the Run window Opens Ease of Access Center Opens the context menu of the Start button Launches the magnifier icon and zooms in your screen Zooms out your screen Opens Narrator Settings 56 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Connecting to wireless networks Wi-Fi Access emails, surf the Internet, and share applications via social networking sites using your ASUS Tablets Wi-Fi connection. IMPORTANT! Airplane mode disables this feature. Ensure that Airplane mode is turned off before enabling the Wi-Fi connection of your ASUS Tablet. Connecting Wi-Fi Connect your ASUS Tablet to a Wi-Fi network by using the following steps:

or 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the icon from the taskbar. Select the icon to enable Wi-Fi. Select an access point from the list of available Wi-Fi connections. Select Connect to start the network connection. NOTE: You may be prompted to enter a security key to activate the Wi-Fi connection. 57 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Bluetooth Use Bluetooth to facilitate wireless data transfers with other Bluetooth-

enabled devices. IMPORTANT! Airplane mode disables this feature. Ensure that Airplane mode is turned off before enabling the Bluetooth connection of your ASUS Tablet. Pairing with other Bluetooth-enabled devices You need to pair your ASUS Tablet with other Bluetooth-enabled devices to enable data transfers. Connect your devices by using the following steps:

1. 2. 3. or Launch Settings from the Start menu. Select Devices, then select Bluetooth to search for Bluetooth-enabled devices. Select a device from the list. Compare the passcode on your ASUS Tablet with the passcode sent to your chosen device. If they are the same, select Yes to successfully pair your ASUS Tablet with the device. NOTE: For some Bluetooth-enabled devices, you may be prompted to key in the passcode of your ASUS Tablet. 58 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Airplane mode Airplane mode disables wireless communication, allowing you to use your ASUS Tablet safely while in-flight. NOTE: Contact your airline provider to learn about related in-flight services that can be used and restrictions that must be followed when using your ASUS Tablet in-flight. Turning Airplane mode on 1. 2. or Launch Action Center from the taskbar. Select the icon to enable Airplane mode. Press

. Turning Airplane mode off 1. 2. or Launch Action Center from the taskbar. Select the icon to disable Airplane mode. Press

. 59 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Turning your ASUS Tablet off You can turn off your ASUS Tablet by doing either of the following procedures:

Launch the Start menu, then select Shut down to do a normal shutdown.

>

From the log-in screen, select

> Shut down. to launch Shut down Press Windows. Select Shut down from the drop-down list then select OK. If your ASUS Tablet is unresponsive, press and hold the power button for at least four (4) seconds until your ASUS Tablet turns off. 60 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Putting your ASUS Tablet to sleep To put your ASUS Tablet to Sleep mode:

Launch the Start menu, then select Sleep to put your ASUS Tablet to sleep.

>

From the log-in screen, select

> Sleep. Press Select Sleep from the drop-down list then select OK. to launch Shut down Windows. NOTE: You can also put your ASUS Tablet to Sleep mode by pressing the power button once. 61 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual 62 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Chapter 4:

Power-On Self-Test (POST) 63 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual The Power-On Self-Test (POST) The Power-On Self-Test (POST) is a series of software-controlled diagnostic tests that run when you turn on or restart your ASUS Tablet. The software that controls the POST is installed as a permanent part of the ASUS Tablets architecture. Using POST to access BIOS and Troubleshoot During POST, you can access the BIOS settings or run troubleshooting options using the volume button on your ASUS Tablet. You may refer to the following information for more details. BIOS The Basic Input and Output System (BIOS) stores system hardware settings that are needed for system startup in the ASUS Tablet. The default BIOS settings apply to most conditions of your ASUS Tablet. Do not change the default BIOS settings except in the following circumstances:

An error message appears onscreen during system bootup and requests you to run the BIOS Setup. You have installed a new system component that requires further BIOS settings or updates. WARNING! Using inappropriate BIOS settings may result to system instability or boot failure. We strongly recommend that you change the BIOS settings only with the help of a trained service personnel. 64 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Accessing BIOS 1. Turn on your ASUS Tablet then press the power button and the volume down button during POST. 2. Use the volume button to select items on the BIOS screen, then press the Windows key to enter a selected item or tap it using the touch screen panel. BIOS Settings NOTE: The BIOS screens in this section are for reference only. The actual screens may differ by model and territory. Boot This menu allows you to set your boot option priorities. You may refer to the following procedures when setting your boot priority. 1. On the Boot screen, select Boot Option #1. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Boot Security Save & Exit Boot Option Priorities Boot Option #1 [Windows Boot Manager]

Sets the system boot order F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC/Right Click : Exit Version 2.16.1243. Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. 65 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual 2. Press and select a device as the Boot Option #1. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Boot Security Save & Exit Boot Option Priorities Boot Option #1 [Windows Boot Manager]

Boot Option #1 Windows Boot Manager Disabled Sets the system boot order F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC/Right Click : Exit Version 2.16.1243. Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. 66 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Security This menu allows you to set up the administrator and user password of your ASUS Tablet. It also allows you to control the access to your ASUS Tablets hard disk drive, input/output (I/O) interface, and USB interface. NOTE:

If you install a User Password, you will be prompted to input this before entering your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock's operating system. If you install an Administrator Password, you will be prompted to input this before entering BIOS. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Boot Security Save & Exit Password Description If ONLY the Administrators password is set, then this only limits access to Setup and is only asked for when entering Setup. If ONLY the users password is set, then this is a power on password and must be entered to boot or enter Setup. In Setup, the User will have Administrator rights. Administrator Password Status NOT INSTALLED User Password Status NOT INSTALLED Administrator Password User Password Secure Boot Menu Set Administrator Password. The password length must be in the following range:

Minimum length 3 Maximum length 20 Must type with character:

a-z, 0-9 F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC/Right Click : Exit Version 2.16.1243 Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. 67 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual To set the password:

1. 2. 3. On the Security screen, select Administrator Password or User Password. Type in a password then press

. Re-type to confirm the password then press

. To clear the password:

1. 2. 3. On the Security screen, select Administrator Password or User Password. Type in the current password then press

. Leave the Create New Password field blank then press

. 4. Select Yes in the confirmation box then press

. 68 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Save & Exit To keep your configuration settings, select Save Changes and Exit before exiting the BIOS. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Boot Security Save & Exit Save Changes and Exit Discard Changes and Exit Save Options Save Changes Discard Changes Restore Defaults Boot Override Windows Boot Manager Launch EFI Shell from filesystem device Exit system setup after saving the changes. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC/Right Click : Exit Version 2.16.1243. Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. 69 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual To update the BIOS:

Verify the ASUS Tablets exact model then download the latest BIOS file for your model from the ASUS website. Save a copy of the downloaded BIOS file to a flash disk drive. Connect your flash disk drive to your ASUS Tablet. Restart your ASUS Tablet then press during POST. From the BIOS menu, Select Advanced > Start Easy Flash, then press

. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Boot Security Save & Exit Start Easy Flash Network Stack Configuration USB Configuration Press Enter to run the utility to select and update BIOS. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC/Right Click : Exit Version 2.16.1243. Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 70 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual 6. Locate your downloaded BIOS file in the flash disk drive then press

. ASUSTek Easy Flash Utility FLASH TYPE: MXIC 25L Series New BIOS Platform: Unknown Version: Unknown Build Date: Unknown Build Time: Unknown Current BIOS Platform: T302CHI Version: 101 Build Date: Apr 26 2015 Build Time: 11:51:05 FSO FS1 FS2 FS3 FS4 0 EFI

<DIR>

[]: Switch []: Choose [q]: Exit [Enter]: Enter/Execute 7. After the BIOS update process, select Exit > Restore Defaults to restore the system to its default settings. 71 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Recovering your system Using recovery options on your ASUS Tablet allows you to restore the system to its original state or simply refresh its settings to help improve performance. IMPORTANT!

Backup all your data files before doing any recovery option on your ASUS Tablet. Note down important customized settings such as network settings, user names, and passwords to avoid data loss. Ensure that your ASUS Tablet is plugged in to a power source before resetting your system. Windows 10 allows you to do any of the following recovery options:

Keep my files - This option allows you refresh your ASUS Tablet without affecting personal files (photos, music, videos, documents). Using this option, you can restore your ASUS Tablet to its default settings and delete other installed apps. Remove everything - This option resets your ASUS Tablet to its factory settings. You must backup your data before doing this option. 72 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Go back to an earlier build - This option allows you to go back to an earlier build. Use this option if this build is not working for you. Advanced startup - Using this option allows you to perform other advanced recovery options on your ASUS Tablet such as:

-

-

Using a USB drive, network connection or Windows recovery DVD to startup your ASUS Tablet. Using Troubleshoot to enable any of these advanced recovery options: System Restore, System Image Recovery, Startup Repair, Command Prompt, UEFI Firmware Settings, and Startup Settings. Performing a recovery option Refer to the following steps if you want to access and use any of the available recovery options for your ASUS Tablet. 1. Launch Settings and select Update and security. 73 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual 2. Under the Update and security option, select Recovery then select the recovery option you would like to perform. 74 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Tips and FAQs 75 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Useful tips for your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock To help you maximize the use of your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock, maintain its system performance, and ensure all your data are kept secured, here are some useful tips that you can follow:

Update Windows periodically to ensure that your applications have the latest security settings. Use an anti-virus software to protect your data and keep this updated too. Unless absolutely necessary, refrain from using force shutdown to turn off your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock. Always backup your data and make it a point to create a backup data in an external storage drive. Refrain from using the ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock at extremely high temperatures. If you are not going to use your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock for a long period of time (at least a month), we recommend that you take out the battery if the battery is removable. Disconnect all external devices and ensure you have the following items prior to resetting your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock:

-

-

-

-

Product key for your operating systems and other installed applications Backup data Log in ID and password Internet connection information 76 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Hardware FAQs 1. A black dot, or sometimes a colored dot, appears onscreen when I turn on the ASUS Tablet. What should I do?

Although these dots normally appear onscreen, they will not affect your system. If the incident continues and subsequently affects system performance, consult an authorized ASUS service center. 2. My display panel has an uneven color and brightness. How can I fix this?

The color and brightness of your display panel may be affected by the angle and current position of your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock. The brightness and color tone of your ASUS Tablet may also vary per model. You may use the function keys or the display settings in your operating system to adjust the appearance of your display panel. 3. How can I maximize my ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock s battery life?

You can try doing any of the following suggestions:

Use the function keys to adjust the display brightness. If you are not using any Wi-Fi connection, switch your system into Airplane mode. Disconnect unused USB devices. Close unused applications, especially those that take up too much system memory. 77 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual 4. My battery LED indicator does not light up. Whats wrong?

Check whether the power adapter or battery pack is attached correctly. You may also disconnect the power adapter or battery pack, wait for a minute, then reconnect them again to the power outlet and your ASUS Tablet or ASUS Mobile Dock. If the problem still exists, contact your local ASUS service center for assistance. 5. Why is my touchpad not working?

Press to enable your touchpad. 6. When I play audio and video files, why cant I hear any sound from my ASUS Tablets speakers?

You can try doing any of the following suggestions:

Press to turn up the speaker volume. Check if your speakers were set to mute. Check if a headphone jack is connected to your ASUS Tablet and remove it. 7. What should I do if my ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Docks power adapter gets lost or my battery stops working?

Contact your local ASUS service center for assistance. 78 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual 8. My ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock cannot do keystrokes correctly because my cursor keeps on moving. What should I do?

Make sure that nothing accidentally touches or presses on your touchpad while you type on the keyboard. You can also disable your touchpad by pressing

. 9. Instead of showing letters, pressing the U, I, and O keys on my keyboard displays numbers. How can I change this?

Press the key or

(on selected models) on your ASUS Mobile Dock to turn off this feature and use the said keys for inputting letters. 79 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Software FAQs 1. When I turn on my ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock, the power indicator lights up but not my drive activity indicator. System bootup does not happen as well. What can I do to fix this?

You can try doing any of the following suggestions:

Force shutdown your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock by pressing the power button for at least four (4) seconds. Check if the power adapter is inserted correctly then turn on your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock. If the problem still exists, contact your local ASUS service center for assistance. 2. What should I do when my screen displays this message:

Remove disks or other media. Press any key to restart.?

You can try doing any of the following suggestions:

Remove all connected USB devices then restart your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock. Remove any optical discs that are left inside the optical drive then restart. If the problem still exists, your ASUS Tablet might have a memory storage problem. Contact your local ASUS service center for assistance. 3. My ASUS Tablet boots slower than usual and my operating system lags. How can I fix this?

Delete the applications you recently installed or were not included with your operating system package then restart your system. 80 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual 4. My ASUS Tablet does not boot up. How can I fix this?

You can try doing any of the following suggestions:

Remove all connected devices to your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock then restart your system. If the problem still exists, contact your local ASUS service center for assistance. 5. Why cant my ASUS Tablet wake up from sleep or hibernate mode?

You need to press the power button to resume your last working state. Your system might have completely used up its battery power. Connect the power adapter to your ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock and connect to a power outlet then press the power button. 81 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual 82 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Appendices 83 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Internal Modem Compliancy The ASUS Tablet with internal modem model complies with JATE (Japan), FCC

(US, Canada, Korea, Taiwan), and CTR21. The internal modem has been approved in accordance with Council Decision 98/482/EC for pan-European single terminal connection to the public switched telephone network (PSTN). However due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in different countries, the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network termination point. In the event of problems you should contact your equipment supplier in the first instance. Overview On 4th August 1998 the European Council Decision regarding the CTR 21 has been published in the Official Journal of the EC. The CTR 21 applies to all non voice terminal equipment with DTMF-dialling which is intended to be connected to the analogue PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network). CTR 21 (Common Technical Regulation) for the attachment requirements for connection to the analogue public switched telephone networks of terminal equipment (excluding terminal equipment supporting the voice telephony justified case service) in which network addressing, if provided, is by means of dual tone multi-frequency signalling. Network Compatibility Declaration Statement to be made by the manufacturer to the Notified Body and the vendor:

This declaration will indicate the networks with which the equipment is designed to work and any notified networks with which the equipment may have inter-

working difficulties. Statement to be made by the manufacturer to the user: This declaration will indicate the networks with which the equipment is designed to work and any notified networks with which the equipment may have inter-working difficulties. The manufacturer shall also associate a statement to make it clear where network compatibility is dependent on physical and software switch settings. It will also advise the user to contact the vendor if it is desired to use the equipment on another network. Up to now the Notified Body of CETECOM issued several pan-European approvals using CTR 21. The results are Europes first modems which do not require regulatory approvals in each individual European country. 84 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Non-Voice Equipment Answering machines and loud-speaking telephones can be eligible as well as modems, fax machines, auto-dialers and alarm systems. Equipment in which the end-to-end quality of speech is controlled by regulations (e.g. handset telephones and in some countries also cordless telephones) is excluded. This table shows the countries currently under the CTR21 standard. Country Austria1 Belgium Czech Republic Denmark1 Finland France Germany Greece Hungary Iceland Ireland Italy Israel Lichtenstein Luxemburg The Netherlands1 Norway Poland Portugal Spain Sweden Switzerland United Kingdom More Testing No No Not Applicable Yes No No No No Not Applicable No No Still Pending No No No Yes No Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable No No No Applied Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Still Pending No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes Yes Yes 85 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual This information was copied from CETECOM and is supplied without liability. For updates to this table, you may visit http://www.cetecom.de/technologies/ctr_21. html 1 National requirements will apply only if the equipment may use pulse dialling

(manufacturers may state in the user guide that the equipment is only intended to support DTMF signalling, which would make any additional testing superfluous). In The Netherlands additional testing is required for series connection and caller ID facilities. Federal Communications Commission Interference Statement This device complies with FCC Rules Part 15. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission

(FCC) rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. 86 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. WARNING! The use of a shielded-type power cord is required in order to meet FCC emission limits and to prevent interference to the nearby radio and television reception. It is essential that only the supplied power cord be used. Use only shielded cables to connect I/O devices to this equipment. You are cautioned that changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void your authority to operate the equipment.

(Reprinted from the Code of Federal Regulations #47, part 15.193, 1993. Washington DC: Office of the Federal Register, National Archives and Records Administration, U.S. Government Printing Office.) This device operates within a 5.15-5.25 GHz frequency range and is restricted for indoor use only. Outdoor operation within 5150-5250MHz is prohibited. Slave Equipment This device is a slave equipment. This device is not radar detection and not ad-hoc operation in the DFS band. RF Exposure warning This equipment complies with FCC RF exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. The equipment must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. 87 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual FCC Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure Caution Statement WARNING! Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate this equipment. The manufacture declares that this device is limited to Channels 1 through 11 in the 2.4GHz frequency by specified firmware controlled in the USA. This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. To maintain compliance with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, please avoid direct contact to the transmitting antenna during transmitting. End users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. RF Exposure Information (SAR) This device meets the governments requirements for exposure to radio waves. This device is designed and manufactured not to exceed the emission limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S. Government. The exposure standard employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6 W/kg. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions accepted by the FCC with the EUT transmitting at the specified power level in different channels. The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this device with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines. SAR information on this device is on file with the FCC and can be found under the Display Grant section of www.fcc.gov/eot/ea/fccid MODEL NAME T302 C FCC ID MSQ8260NG FUNCTION WLAN /

Bluetooth CONTAINS MODULE Yes This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. 88 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual RF Exposure information (SAR) - CE This device meets the EU requirements (1999/519/EC) on the limitation of exposure of the general public to electromagnetic fields by way of health protection. The limits are part of extensive recommendations for the protection of the general public. These recommendations have been developed and checked by independent scientific organizations through regular and thorough evaluations of scientific studies. The unit of measurement for the European Councils recommended limit for mobile devices is the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR), and the SAR limit is 2.0 W/Kg averaged over 10 gram of body tissue. It meets the requirements of the International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP). For next-to-body operation, this device has been tested and meets the ICNRP exposure guidelines and the European Standard EN 50566 and EN 62209-2. SAR is measured with the device directly contacted to the body while transmitting at the highest certified output power level in all frequency bands of the mobile device. CE Mark Warning This device complies with the R&TTE Directive (1999/5/EC), the EMC Directive

(2004/108/EC), and the Low Voltage Directive (2006/95/EC) issued by the Commission of the European Community. Countries where the device will be sold to:

T EE IT NO BE ES IS PL BG FI LI PT CH FR LT RO CY GB LU SE CZ GR LV SI DE HU MT SK DK IE NL TR 89 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual IC Radiation Exposure Statement for Canada This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. To maintain compliance with IC RF exposure compliance requirements, please avoid direct contact to the transmitting antenna during transmitting. End users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause interference and This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. To prevent radio interference to the licensed service (i.e. co-channel Mobile Satellite systems) this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing. This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B) This device and its antenna(s) must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter, except tested built-in radios. MODEL NAME T302 C IC ID 3568A-8260NG FUNCTION CONTAINS MODULE WLAN /

Bluetooth Yes 90 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Dclaration dIndustrie Canada relative lexposition aux ondes radio Cet appareil est conforme aux limites dexposition aux radiations dIndustrie Canada dfinies pour un environnement non-contrl. Pour maintenir la conformit avec les exigences dexposition RF dIC, veuillez viter tout contact direct avec lantenne pendant lmission. Les utilisateurs finaux doivent suivre les instructions de fonctionnement spcifiques pour satisfaire la conformit aux expositions RF. Son utilisation est sujette aux deux conditions suivantes :

Cet appareil ne peut pas causer dinterfrence, et Cet appareil doit accepter toute interfrence, y compris les interfrences qui pourraient causer un fonctionnement non souhait de lappareil. Pour viter les interfrences radio avec le service sous licence (cest -dire le partage de canal avec les systmes de tlphonie satellite), cet appareil est destin tre utilis en intrieur et loin des fentres pour fournir un blindage maximal. Tout appareil (ou son antenne dmission) qui est install en extrieur est sujet cette licence. Le present appareil est conforme aux CNR dIndustrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B) Cet appareil et son antenne ne doivent pas tre situs ou fonctionner en conjonction avec une autre antenne ou un autre metteur, exception faites des radios intgres qui ont t testes. MODEL NAME T302 C IC ID 3568A-8260NG FUNCTION CONTAINS MODULE WLAN /

Bluetooth Yes 91 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Radiation Exposure Statement The product comply with the Canada portable RF exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment and are safe for intended operation as described in this manual. The further RF exposure reduction can be achieved if the product can be kept as far as possible from the user body or set the device to lower output power if such function is available. Dclaration d'exposition aux radiations Le produit est conforme aux limites d'exposition pour les appareils portables RF pour les Etats-Unis et le Canada tablies pour un environnement non contrl. Le produit est sr pour un fonctionnement tel que dcrit dans ce manuel. La rduction aux expositions RF peut tre augmente si l'appareil peut tre conserv aussi loin que possible du corps de l'utilisateur ou que le dispositif est rgl sur la puissance de sortie la plus faible si une telle fonction est disponible. Caution

(i) the device for operation in the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems;

(ii) the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5470-5725 MHz shall comply with the e.i.r.p. limit; and

(iii) the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5825 MHz shall comply with the e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non point-to-

point operation as appropriate.

(iv) Users should also be advised that high-power radars are allocated as primary users (i.e. priority users) of the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5650-5850 MHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices. 92 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Avertissement Le guide dutilisation des dispositifs pour rseaux locaux doit inclure des instructions prcises sur les restrictions susmentionnes, notamment :

(i) les dispositifs fonctionnant dans la bande 5 150-5 250 MHz sont rservs uniquement pour une utilisation lintrieur afin de rduire les risques de brouillage prjudiciable aux systmes de satellites mobiles utilisant les mmes canaux;

(ii) le gain maximal dantenne permis pour les dispositifs utilisant les bandes 5 250-5 350 MHz et 5 470-5 725 MHz doit se conformer la limite de p.i.r.e.;

(iii) le gain maximal dantenne permis (pour les dispositifs utilisant la bande 5 725-

5 825 MHz) doit se conformer la limite de p.i.r.e. spcifie pour lexploitation point point et non point point, selon le cas.

(iv) De plus, les utilisateurs devraient aussi tre aviss que les utilisateurs de radars de haute puissance sont dsigns utilisateurs principaux (c.--d., quils ont la priorit) pour les bandes 5 250-5 350 MHz et 5 650-5 850 MHz et que ces radars pourraient causer du brouillage et/ou des dommages aux dispositifs LAN-EL. 93 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Wireless Operation Channel for Different Domains N. America Japan 2.412-2.462 GHz 2.412-2.484 GHz Ch01 through CH11 Ch01 through Ch14 Europe ETSI 2.412-2.472 GHz Ch01 through Ch13 France Restricted Wireless Frequency Bands Some areas of France have a restricted frequency band. The worst case maximum authorized power indoors are:

10mW for the entire 2.4 GHz band (2400 MHz2483.5 MHz) 100mW for frequencies between 2446.5 MHz and 2483.5 MHz NOTE: Channels 10 through 13 inclusive operate in the band 2446.6 MHz to 2483.5 MHz. There are few possibilities for outdoor use: on private property or on the private property of public persons, use is subject to a preliminary authorization procedure by the Ministry of Defense, with maximum authorized power of 100mW in the 2446.52483.5 MHz band. Use outdoors on public property is not permitted. In the departments listed below, for the entire 2.4 GHz band:

Maximum authorized power indoors is 100mW Maximum authorized power outdoors is 10mW 94 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Departments in which the use of the 24002483.5 MHz band is permitted with an EIRP of less than 100mW indoors and less than 10mW outdoors:

01 Ain 02 Aisne 05 Hautes Alpes 08 Ardennes 11 Aude 24 Dordogne 32 Gers 41 Loir et Cher 55 Meuse 60 Oise 12 Aveyron 25 Doubs 36 Indre 45 Loiret 58 Nivre 61 Orne 03 Allier 09 Arige 16 Charente 26 Drme 37 Indre et Loire 50 Manche 59 Nord 63 Puy du Dme 64 Pyrnes Atlantique 66 Pyrnes Orientales 67 Bas Rhin 68 Haut Rhin 70 Haute Sane 71 Sane et Loire 75 Paris 88 Vosges 94 Val de Marne 82 Tarn et Garonne 84 Vaucluse 89 Yonne 90 Territoire de Belfort This requirement is likely to change over time, allowing you to use your wireless LAN card in more areas within France. Please check with ART for the latest information (www.arcep.fr) NOTE: Your WLAN Card transmits less than 100mW, but more than 10mW. 95 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual UL Safety Notices Required for UL 1459 covering telecommunications (telephone) equipment intended to be electrically connected to a telecommunication network that has an operating voltage to ground that does not exceed 200V peak, 300V peak-to-peak, and 105V rms, and installed or used in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70). When using the ASUS Tablet modem, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons, including the following:

DO NOT use the ASUS Tablet near water, for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool. DO NOT use the ASUS Tablet during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. DO NOT use the ASUS Tablet in the vicinity of a gas leak. Required for UL 1642 covering primary (nonrechargeable) and secondary

(rechargeable) lithium batteries for use as power sources in products. These batteries contain metallic lithium, or a lithium alloy, or a lithium ion, and may consist of a single electrochemical cell or two or more cells connected in series, parallel, or both, that convert chemical energy into electrical energy by an irreversible or reversible chemical reaction. DO NOT dispose the ASUS Tablet battery pack in a fire, as they may explode. Check with local codes for possible special disposal instructions to reduce the risk of injury to persons due to fire or explosion. DO NOT use power adapters or batteries from other devices to reduce the risk of injury to persons due to fire or explosion. Use only UL certified power adapters or batteries supplied by the manufacturer or authorized retailers. 96 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Power Safety Requirement Products with electrical current ratings up to 6A and weighing more than 3Kg must use approved power cords greater than or equal to: H05VV-F, 3G, 0.75mm2 or H05VV-F, 2G, 0.75mm2. TV Notices Note to CATV System InstallerCable distribution system should be grounded

(earthed) in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 70, the National Electrical Code (NEC), in particular Section 820.93, Grounding of Outer Conductive Shield of a Coaxial Cable installation should include bonding the screen of the coaxial cable to the earth at the building entrance. REACH Complying with the REACH (Registration, Evaluation, Authorization, and Restriction of Chemicals) regulatory framework, we publish the chemical substances in our products at ASUS REACH website at http://csr.asus.com/english/

REACH.htm. Macrovision Corporation Product Notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S.A. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. 97 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Nordic Lithium Cautions (for lithium-ion batteries) CAUTION! Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturers instructions. (English) ATTENZIONE! Rischio di esplosione della batteria se sostituita in modo errato. Sostituire la batteria con un una di tipo uguale o equivalente consigliata dalla fabbrica. Non disperdere le batterie nellambiente. (Italian) VORSICHT! Explosionsgefahr bei unsachgemen Austausch der Batterie. Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einem vom Hersteller empfohlenem hnlichen Typ. Entsorgung gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers. (German) ADVARSELI! Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig hndtering. Udskiftning m kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levr det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandren. (Danish) VARNING! Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Anvnd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera anvnt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion. (Swedish) VAROITUS! Paristo voi rjht, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan sousittelemaan tyyppiin. Hvit kytetty paristo valmistagan ohjeiden mukaisesti. (Finnish) ATTENTION! Il y a danger dexplosion sil y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du mre type ou dun type quivalent recommand par le constructeur. Mettre au rebut les batteries usages conformment aux instructions du fabricant. (French) ADVARSEL! Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri. Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten. Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner. (Norwegian)

(Japanese)

!

. (Russian) 98 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Optical Drive Safety Information Laser Safety Information CD-ROM Drive Safety Warning CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT WARNING! To prevent exposure to the optical drives laser, do not attempt to disassemble or repair the optical drive by yourself. For your safety, contact a professional technician for assistance. Service warning label WARNING! INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN. DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS. CDRH Regulations The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration implemented regulations for laser products on August 2, 1976. These regulations apply to laser products manufactured from August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein or in the laser product installation guide may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Coating Notice IMPORTANT! To provide electrical insulation and maintain electrical safety, a coating is applied to insulate the device except on the areas where the I/O ports are located. 99 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual CTR 21 Approval (for ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock with built-in modem) Danish Dutch English Finnish French 100 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual German Greek Italian Portuguese Spanish Swedish 101 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual ENERGY STAR complied product ENERGY STAR is a joint program of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and the U.S. Department of Energy helping us all save money and protect the environment through energy efficient products and practices. All ASUS products with the ENERGY STAR logo comply with the ENERGY STAR standard, and the power management feature is enabled by default. The monitor and computer are automatically set to sleep after 10 and 30 minutes of user inactivity. To wake your computer, click the mouse or press any key on the keyboard. Please visit http://www.energystar.gov/powermanagement for detail information on power management and its benefits to the environment. In addition, please visit http://www.energystar.gov for detail information on the ENERGY STAR joint program. NOTE: Energy Star is NOT supported on FreeDOS and Linux-based operating systems. 102 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Global Environmental Regulation Compliance and Declaration ASUS follows the green design concept to design and manufacture our products, and makes sure that each stage of the product life cycle of ASUS product is in line with global environmental regulations. In addition, ASUS disclose the relevant information based on regulation requirements. Please refer to http://csr.asus.com/english/Compliance.htm for information disclosure based on regulation requirements ASUS is complied with:

Japan JIS-C-0950 Material Declarations EU REACH SVHC Korea RoHS ASUS Recycling/Takeback Services ASUS recycling and takeback programs come from our commitment to the highest standards for protecting our environment. We believe in providing solutions for you to be able to responsibly recycle our products, batteries, other components as well as the packaging materials. Please go to http://csr.asus.com/

english/Takeback.htm for detailed recycling information in different regions. Prevention of Hearing Loss To prevent possible hearing damage, do not listen at high volume levels for long periods. While user turns up the volume past this point (27mV), the system will show a pop-up with the following information: High volume can cause hearing loss. Your ears are important. Turning up the volume past this point can cause permanent hearing damage. 103 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Notices for removable batteries Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. The battery and its component must be recycled or disposed of properly. Avis concernant les batteries remplaables La batterie de lordinateur portable peut prsenter un risque dincendie ou de brlure si celle-ci est retire ou dsassemble. La batterie et ses composants doivent tre recycls de faon approprie. Rechargeable Battery Recycling Service in North America For US and Canada customers, you can call 1-800-822-8837

(toll-free) for recycling information of your ASUS products rechargeable batteries. Regional notice for India This product complies with the India E-waste (Management and Handling) Rule 2011 and prohibits use of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls (PBBs) and polybrominated diphenyl ethers (PBDEs) in concentrations exceeding 0.1% by weight in homogenous materials and 0.01% by weight in homogenous materials for cadmium, except for the exemptions listed in Schedule-II of the Rule. Regional notice for California WARNING! This product may contain chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects or other reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. 104 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual Regional notice for Singapore This ASUS product complies with IDA Standards. Complies with IDA Standards DB103778 Japan Technical Conformity Mark The internal wireless module of this ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock has been certified by Japan Telec. ASUS Tablet ASUS Mobile Dock 003-140018 D140017003 011-150007 105 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual EU Declaration of Conformity We, the undersigned, Manufacturer:

Address:

Authorized representative in Europe:

Address, City:

Country:

declare the following apparatus:

Product name :

Model name :

conform with the essential requirements of the following directives:

ASUS Tablet T302C, T302Chi, T32C ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. 4F, No. 150, LI-TE Rd., PEITOU, TAIPEI 112, TAIWAN ASUS COMPUTER GmbH HARKORT STR. 21-23, 40880 RATINGEN GERMANY 2004/108/EC-EMC Directive EN 55022:2010+AC:2011 EN 61000-3-2:2014 EN 55013:2001+A1:2003+A2:2006 1999/5/EC-R&TTE Directive EN 300 328 V1.9.1(2015-02) EN 300 440-1 V1.6.1(2010-08) EN 300 440-2 V1.4.1(2010-08) EN 301 511 V9.0.2(2003-03) EN 301 908-1 V6.2.1(2013-04) EN 301 908-2 V6.2.1(2013-10) EN 301 908-13 V6.2.1(2014-02) EN 301 893 V1.8.1(2015-03) EN 300 330-1 V1.7.1(2010-02) EN 300 330-2 V1.5.1(2010-02) EN 62479:2010 EN 62311:2008 2006/95/EC-LVD Directive EN 60950-1: 2006 / A12: 2011 EN 60950-1: 2006 / A2: 2013 2009/125/EC-ErP Directive Regulation (EC) No. 1275/2008 Regulation (EC) No. 642/2009 EN 55024:2010 EN 61000-3-3:2013 EN 55020:2007+A11:2011 EN 301 489-1 V1.9.2(2011-09) EN 301 489-3 V1.6.1(2013-12) EN 301 489-4 V2.1.1(2013-12) EN 301 489-7 V1.3.1(2005-11) EN 301 489-9 V1.4.1(2007-11) EN 301 489-17 V2.2.1(2012-09) EN 301 489-24 V1.5.1(2010-09) EN 301 357-2 V1.4.1(2008-11) EN 302 291-2 V1.1.1(2005-07) EN 302 623 V1.1.1(2009-01) EN 50566:2013/AC:2014 EN 50385:2002 EN 60065:2002 / A12: 2011 Regulation (EC) No. 278/2009 Regulation (EU) No. 617/2013 2011/65/EU-RoHS Directive Ver. 151216 CE marking Equipment Class 2

(EU conformity marking) Taipei, Taiwan Place of issue 29/1/2016 Date of issue 2016 Year CE marking was first affixed Signature Jerry Shen Printed Name CEO Position 106 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual EU Declaration of Conformity We, the undersigned, Manufacturer:

Address:

Authorized representative in Europe:

Address, City:

Country:

declare the following apparatus:

Product name :

Model name :

conform with the essential requirements of the following directives:

ASUS Mobile Dock T302C Mobile Dock ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. 4F, No. 150, LI-TE Rd., PEITOU, TAIPEI 112, TAIWAN ASUS COMPUTER GmbH HARKORT STR. 21-23, 40880 RATINGEN GERMANY 2004/108/EC-EMC Directive EN 55022:2010+AC:2011 EN 61000-3-2:2014 EN 55013:2001+A1:2003+A2:2006 1999/5/EC-R&TTE Directive EN 300 328 V1.8.1(2012-06) EN 300 440-1 V1.6.1(2010-08) EN 300 440-2 V1.4.1(2010-08) EN 301 511 V9.0.2(2003-03) EN 301 908-1 V6.2.1(2013-04) EN 301 908-2 V6.2.1(2013-10) EN 301 908-13 V6.2.1(2014-02) EN 301 893 V1.7.1(2012-06) EN 300 330-2 V1.5.1(2010-02) EN 50360:2001/A1:2012 EN 62479:2010 EN 62311:2008 2006/95/EC-LVD Directive EN 60950-1: 2006 / A12: 2011 EN 60950-1: 2006 / A2: 2013 2009/125/EC-ErP Directive Regulation (EC) No. 1275/2008 Regulation (EC) No. 642/2009 EN 55024:2010 EN 61000-3-3:2013 EN 55020:2007+A11:2011 EN 301 489-1 V1.9.2(2011-09) EN 301 489-3 V1.6.1(2013-12) EN 301 489-4 V2.1.1(2013-12) EN 301 489-7 V1.3.1(2005-11) EN 301 489-9 V1.4.1(2007-11) EN 301 489-17 V2.2.1(2012-09) EN 301 489-24 V1.5.1(2010-09) EN 301 357-2 V1.4.1(2008-11) EN 302 291-2 V1.1.1(2005-07) EN 302 623 V1.1.1(2009-01) EN 50566:2013/AC:2014 EN 50385:2002 EN 60065:2002 / A12: 2011 Regulation (EC) No. 278/2009 Regulation (EU) No. 617/2013 2011/65/EU-RoHS Directive Ver. 151216 CE marking Equipment Class 1 Signature Jerry Shen Printed Name CEO Position

(EU conformity marking) Taipei, Taiwan Place of issue 29/1/2016 Date of issue 2016 Year CE marking was first affixed 107 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual 108 ASUS Tablet and ASUS Mobile Dock E-Manual

E11237 First Edition March 2016 E-Manual COPYRIGHT INFORMATION No part of this manual, including the products and software described in it, may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form or by any means, except documentation kept by the purchaser for backup purposes, without the express written permission of ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. (ASUS). ASUS PROVIDES THIS MANUAL AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL ASUS, ITS DIRECTORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES

(INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF USE OR DATA, INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS AND THE LIKE), EVEN IF ASUS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES ARISING FROM ANY DEFECT OR ERROR IN THIS MANUAL OR PRODUCT. Products and corporate names appearing in this manual may or may not be registered trademarks or copyrights of their respective companies, and are used only for identification or explanation and to the owners benefit, without intent to infringe. SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL ARE FURNISHED FOR INFORMATIONAL USE ONLY, AND ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE, AND SHOULD NOT BE CONSTRUED AS A COMMITMENT BY ASUS. ASUS ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY FOR ANY ERRORS OR INACCURACIES THAT MAY APPEAR IN THIS MANUAL, INCLUDING THE PRODUCTS AND SOFTWARE DESCRIBED IN IT. Copyright 2016 ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY Circumstances may arise where because of a default on ASUS part or other liability, you are entitled to recover damages from ASUS. In each such instance, regardless of the basis on which you are entitled to claim damages from ASUS, ASUS is liable for no more than damages for bodily injury (including death) and damage to real property and tangible personal property; or any other actual and direct damages resulted from omission or failure of performing legal duties under this Warranty Statement, up to the listed contract price of each product. ASUS will only be responsible for or indemnify you for loss, damages or claims based in contract, tort or infringement under this Warranty Statement. This limit also applies to ASUS suppliers and its reseller. It is the maximum for which ASUS, its suppliers, and your reseller are collectively responsible. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES IS ASUS LIABLE FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING: (1) THIRD-PARTY CLAIMS AGAINST YOU FOR DAMAGES; (2) LOSS OF, OR DAMAGE TO, YOUR RECORDS OR DATA; OR (3) SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR INDIRECT DAMAGES OR FOR ANY ECONOMIC CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS), EVEN IF ASUS, ITS SUPPLIERS OR YOUR RESELLER IS INFORMED OF THEIR POSSIBILITY. SERVICE AND SUPPORT Visit our multi-language website at https://www.asus.com/support/

2 Notebook PC E-Manual Table of Contents About this manual .....................................................................................................7 Conventions used in this manual .............................................................................8 Icons ....................................................................................................................................8 Typography .......................................................................................................................8 Safety precautions .....................................................................................................9 Using your Notebook PC ..............................................................................................9 Caring for your Notebook PC .....................................................................................10 Proper disposal ................................................................................................................11 Chapter 1: Hardware Setup Getting to know your Notebook PC ...................................................................14 Top View .............................................................................................................................14 Bottom ................................................................................................................................22 Right Side ..........................................................................................................................24 Left Side .............................................................................................................................28 Chapter 2: Using your Notebook PC Getting started ...........................................................................................................30 Charge your Notebook PC ...........................................................................................30 Lift to open the display panel ....................................................................................32 Press the power button ................................................................................................32 Gestures for the touch screen panel and touchpad .....................................33 Using touch screen panel gestures ..........................................................................33 Using the touchpad .......................................................................................................36 Using the keyboard ...................................................................................................40 Function keys ...................................................................................................................40 Windows 10 keys ..........................................................................................................41 Multimedia control keys...............................................................................................42 Using the numeric keypad ..........................................................................................43 Rotating the display panel .....................................................................................44 3 Notebook PC E-Manual Chapter 3: Working with Windows 10 Starting for the first time .........................................................................................46 Start menu ...................................................................................................................47 Windows apps ..........................................................................................................49 Working with Windows apps....................................................................................50 Customizing Windows apps .....................................................................................50 Task view .......................................................................................................................53 Snap feature ................................................................................................................54 Snap hotspots ..................................................................................................................54 Action Center ..............................................................................................................56 Other keyboard shortcuts ......................................................................................57 Connecting to wireless networks ........................................................................59 Wi-Fi .....................................................................................................................................59 Bluetooth ...........................................................................................................................60 Airplane mode .................................................................................................................61 Turning your Notebook PC off ..............................................................................62 Putting your Notebook PC to sleep ....................................................................63 Chapter 4: Power-On Self-Test (POST) The Power-On Self-Test (POST) .............................................................................66 Using POST to access BIOS and Troubleshoot......................................................66 BIOS ................................................................................................................................66 Accessing BIOS ................................................................................................................66 BIOS Settings ....................................................................................................................67 Recovering your system ..........................................................................................77 Performing a recovery option ....................................................................................78 4 Notebook PC E-Manual Tips and FAQs Useful tips for your Notebook PC ........................................................................82 Hardware FAQs ...........................................................................................................83 Software FAQs .............................................................................................................86 Appendices DVD-ROM Drive Information ......................................................................................90 Blu-ray ROM Drive Information .................................................................................92 Internal Modem Compliancy .....................................................................................92 Overview ............................................................................................................................93 Network Compatibility Declaration .........................................................................93 Non-Voice Equipment ...................................................................................................93 Declaration of Conformity (R&TTE directive 1999/5/EC) ..................................95 Federal Communications Commission Interference Statement ...................96 FCC Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure Caution Statement .................................97 RF Exposure Information (SAR) ..................................................................................97 RF Exposure information (SAR) - CE .........................................................................98 CE Mark Warning .............................................................................................................98 IC Radiation Exposure Statement for Canada ......................................................99 Dclaration dIndustrie Canada relative lexposition aux ondes radio ....100 Wireless Operation Channel for Different Domains ...........................................101 France Restricted Wireless Frequency Bands .......................................................101 UL Safety Notices ............................................................................................................103 Power Safety Requirement ..........................................................................................104 5 Notebook PC E-Manual TV Notices .........................................................................................................................104 REACH .................................................................................................................................104 Macrovision Corporation Product Notice ..............................................................104 Prevention of Hearing Loss .........................................................................................104 Nordic Lithium Cautions (for lithium-ion batteries) ...........................................105 Optical Drive Safety Information ..............................................................................106 CTR 21 Approval (for Notebook PC with built-in Modem) ..............................107 ENERGY STAR complied product ..............................................................................109 Global Environmental Regulation Compliance and Declaration ..................109 ASUS Recycling/Takeback Services ..........................................................................110 Rechargeable Battery Recycling Service in North America.............................110 Regional notice for California .....................................................................................110 Regional notice for Singapore ...................................................................................110 Regional notice for India ..............................................................................................110 Radiation Exposure Statement ..................................................................................111 Dclaration dexposition aux radiations .................................................................111 Caution ...............................................................................................................................111 Avertissement ..................................................................................................................112 Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure Information .......................................................112 Informations concernant lexposition aux frquences radio (RF) ................112 6 Notebook PC E-Manual About this manual This manual provides information about the hardware and software features of your Notebook PC, organized through the following chapters:

Chapter 1: Hardware Setup This chapter details the hardware components of your Notebook PC. Chapter 2: Using your Notebook PC This chapter shows you how to use the different parts of your Notebook PC. Chapter 3: Working with Windows 10 This chapter provides an overview of using Windows 10 in your Notebook PC. Chapter 4: Power-On Self-Test (POST) This chapter shows you how to use POST to change the settings of your Notebook PC. Tips and FAQs This section presents some recommended tips, hardware FAQs, and software FAQs you can refer to for maintaining and fixing common issues with your Notebook PC. Appendices This section includes notices and safety statements for your Notebook PC. 7 Notebook PC E-Manual Conventions used in this manual To highlight key information in this manual, some text are presented as follows:

IMPORTANT! This message contains vital information that must be followed to complete a task. NOTE: This message contains additional information and tips that can help complete tasks. WARNING! This message contains important information that must be followed to keep you safe while performing tasks and prevent damage to your Notebook PC's data and components. Icons The icons below indicate the devices you can use for completing a series of tasks or procedures on your Notebook PC.

= Use the touch screen panel.

= Use the touchpad.

= Use the keyboard. Typography Bold

= This indicates a menu or an item that must be selected. Italic

= This indicates sections that you can refer to in this manual. 8 Notebook PC E-Manual Safety precautions Using your Notebook PC This Notebook PC should only be used in environments with ambient temperatures between 5C (41F) and 35C (95F). Refer to the rating label on the bottom of your Notebook PC and ensure that your power adapter complies with this rating. Do not leave your Notebook PC on your lap or near any part of your body to prevent discomfort or injury from heat exposure. Do not use damaged power cords, accessories, and other peripherals with your Notebook PC. While powered on, ensure that you do not carry or cover your Notebook PC with any materials that can reduce air circulation. Do not place your Notebook PC on uneven or unstable work surfaces. You can send your Notebook PC through x-ray machines (used on items placed on conveyor belts), but do not expose them to magnetic detectors and wands. Contact your airline provider to learn about related in-flight services that can be used and restrictions that must be followed when using your Notebook PC in-flight. 9 Notebook PC E-Manual Caring for your Notebook PC Disconnect the AC power and remove the battery pack (if applicable) before cleaning your Notebook PC. Use a clean cellulose sponge or chamois cloth dampened with a solution of nonabrasive detergent and a few drops of warm water. Remove any extra moisture from your Notebook PC using a dry cloth. Do not use strong solvents such as thinners, benzene, or other chemicals on or near your Notebook PC. Do not place objects on top of your Notebook PC. Do not expose your Notebook PC to strong magnetic or electrical fields. Do not use or expose your Notebook PC near liquids, rain, or moisture. Do not expose your Notebook PC to dusty environments. Do not use your Notebook PC near gas leaks. 10 Notebook PC E-Manual Proper disposal Do not throw your Notebook PC in municipal waste. This product has been designed to enable proper reuse of parts and recycling. The symbol of the crossed out wheeled bin indicates that the product

(electrical, electronic equipment and mercury-

containing button cell battery) should not be placed in municipal waste. Check local regulations for disposal of electronic products. Do not throw the battery in municipal waste. The symbol of the crossed out wheeled bin indicates that the battery should not be placed in municipal waste. 11 Notebook PC E-Manual 12 Notebook PC E-Manual Chapter 1:

Hardware Setup 13 Notebook PC E-Manual Getting to know your Notebook PC Top View NOTE: The keyboard's layout may vary per region or country. The Notebook view may also vary in appearance depending on the Notebook PC model. Standard model 14 Notebook PC E-Manual Ambient light sensor The ambient light sensor detects the amount of ambient light in your environment. It allows the system to automatically adjust the brightness of the display depending on the ambient light condition. Camera The built-in camera allows you to take pictures or record videos using your Notebook PC. Camera indicator The camera indicator lights up when the built-in camera is in use. Display panel This high-definition display panel provides excellent viewing features for photos, videos, and other multimedia files on your Notebook PC. Touch screen panel (on selected models) This high-definition touch screen panel provides excellent viewing features for photos, videos, and other multimedia files on your Notebook PC. It also allows you to operate it using touch screen gestures. NOTE: For more details, refer to the Using touch screen panel gestures section in this manual. 15 Notebook PC E-Manual Airplane mode indicator This indicator lights up when the Airplane mode in your Notebook PC is enabled. NOTE: When enabled, the Airplane mode disables all wireless connectivity. Keyboard The keyboard provides full-sized QWERTY keys with a comfortable travel depth for typing. It also enables you to use the function keys, allows quick access to Windows, and controls other multimedia functions. NOTE: The keyboard layout differs by model or territory. Capital lock indicator This indicator lights up when the capital lock function is activated. Using capital lock allows you to type capitalized letters

(such as A, B, C) using your Notebook PCs keyboard. 16 Notebook PC E-Manual Touchpad The touchpad allows the use of multi-gestures to navigate onscreen, providing an intuitive user experience. It also simulates the functions of a regular mouse. NOTE: For more details, refer to the Using the touchpad section in this manual. Numeric keypad The numeric keypad toggles between these two functions: for numeric input and as pointer direction keys. NOTE: For more details, refer to the Using the numeric keypad section in this manual. 17 Notebook PC E-Manual IR Camera model 18 Notebook PC E-Manual IR Camera The built-in camera allows you to take pictures or record videos using your Notebook PC. The IR Camera also supports Windows Hello. NOTE:

When you sign in with Windows Hello, the set up screen will be in black and white color. The red IR LED blinks in the process while data is being read before you sign in with Windows Hello facial recognition. Camera indicator The camera indicator lights up when the built-in camera is in use. Camera The built-in camera allows you to take pictures or record videos using your Notebook PC. 19 Notebook PC E-Manual Display panel This high-definition display panel provides excellent viewing features for photos, videos, and other multimedia files on your Notebook PC. Touch screen panel (on selected models) This high-definition touch screen panel provides excellent viewing features for photos, videos, and other multimedia files on your Notebook PC. It also allows you to operate it using touch screen gestures. NOTE: For more details, refer to the Using touch screen panel gestures section in this manual. Airplane mode indicator This indicator lights up when the Airplane mode in your Notebook PC is enabled. NOTE: When enabled, the Airplane mode disables all wireless connectivity. Keyboard The keyboard provides full-sized QWERTY keys with a comfortable travel depth for typing. It also enables you to use the function keys, allows quick access to Windows, and controls other multimedia functions. NOTE: The keyboard layout differs by model or territory. 20 Notebook PC E-Manual Capital lock indicator This indicator lights up when the capital lock function is activated. Using capital lock allows you to type capitalized letters

(such as A, B, C) using your Notebook PCs keyboard. Touchpad The touchpad allows the use of multi-gestures to navigate onscreen, providing an intuitive user experience. It also simulates the functions of a regular mouse. NOTE: For more details, refer to the Using the touchpad section in this manual. Numeric keypad The numeric keypad toggles between these two functions: for numeric input and as pointer direction keys. NOTE: For more details, refer to the Using the numeric keypad section in this manual. 21 Notebook PC E-Manual Bottom NOTE: The bottom side may vary in appearance depending on model. WARNING! The bottom of the Notebook PC can get warm to hot while in use or while charging the battery pack. When working on your Notebook PC, do not place it on surfaces that can block the vents. IMPORTANT! Battery time varies by usage and by the specifications for this Notebook PC. The battery pack cannot be disassembled. 22 Notebook PC E-Manual Air vents The air vents allow cool air to enter and warm air to exit the Notebook PC. WARNING! Ensure that paper, books, clothing, cables, or other objects do not block any of the air vents or else overheating may occur. Audio speakers The built-in audio speakers allow you to hear audio straight from your Notebook PC. Audio features are software-controlled. 23 Notebook PC E-Manual Right Side Standard model IR Camera model Power button Press the power button to turn your Notebook PC on or off. You can also use the power button to put your Notebook PC to sleep or hibernate mode and wake it up from sleep or hibernate mode. In the event that your Notebook PC becomes unresponsive, press and hold the power button for at least four (4) seconds until your Notebook PC shuts down. Volume button This button turns the volume up or down on your Notebook PC. 24 Notebook PC E-Manual Two-color battery charge indicator The two-color LED provides a visual indication of the batterys charge status. Refer to the following table for details:

Color Solid Green Solid Orange Blinking Orange Lights off Status The Notebook PC is plugged to a power source and the battery power is between 95% and 100%. The Notebook PC is plugged to a power source, charging its battery, and the battery power is less than 95%. The Notebook PC is running on battery mode and the battery power is less than 10%. The Notebook PC is running on battery mode and the battery power is between 10% to 100%. Drive activity indicator This indicator lights up when your Notebook PC is accessing the internal storage drives USB 3.0 port The USB 3.0 (Universal Serial Bus 3.0) port provides a transfer rate of up to 5 Gbit/s and is backward compatible to USB 2.0. 25 Notebook PC E-Manual USB 3.0 port with USB Charger+

The USB 3.0 (Universal Serial Bus 3.0) port provides a transfer rate of up to 5 Gbit/s and is backward compatible to USB 2.0. The icon indicates this ports USB Charger+ feature which allows you to quick-charge mobile devices. HDMI port This port is for the HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) connector and is HDCP compliant for HD DVD, Blu-ray, and other protected content playback. Power (DC) input port Insert the bundled power adapter into this port to charge the battery pack and supply power to your Notebook PC. WARNING! The adapter may become warm to hot while in use. Do not cover the adapter and keep it away from your body while it is connected to a power source. IMPORTANT! Use only the bundled power adapter to charge the battery pack and supply power to your Notebook PC. 26 Notebook PC E-Manual USB Type-C port The USB (Universal Serial Bus) Type-C port provides a transfer rate of up to 5 Gbit/s and is backward compatible to USB 2.0. NOTE: Transfer rate of this port may vary per model. USB Type-C/Thunderbolt 3 combo port The USB 3.1 (Universal Serial Bus 3.1) port provides a transfer rate up to 10 Gbit/s and is backward compatible to USB 2.0. Use a Thunderbolt 3 adapter to connect your Notebook PC to a DisplayPort, VGA, DVI, or HDMI external display and experience high-resolution display features via Intel Thunderbolt technology. NOTE: Transfer rate of this port may vary per model. 27 Notebook PC E-Manual Left Side Kensington security slot The Kensington security slot allows you to secure your Notebook PC using Kensington compatible Notebook PC security products. Subwoofer jack port (on selected models) The subwoofer jack port is used to connect the subwoofer to your Notebook PC. Memory card reader This built-in memory card reader supports SD card formats. USB 3.0 port The USB 3.0 (Universal Serial Bus 3.0) port provides a transfer rate of up to 5 Gbit/s and is backward compatible to USB 2.0. Headphone/Headset/Microphone jack This port allows you to connect amplified speakers or headphones. You can also use this port to connect your headset or an external microphone. 28 Notebook PC E-Manual Chapter 2:

Using your Notebook PC 29 Notebook PC E-Manual Getting started Charge your Notebook PC A. B. Plug the AC power cord into a 100V~240V power source. Connect the DC power connector into your Notebook PCs power

(DC) input port. Charge the Notebook PC for 3 hours before using it in battery mode for the first time. NOTE: The power adapter may vary in appearance, depending on models and your region. IMPORTANT!

Power adapter information:

Input voltage: 100-240Vac Input frequency: 50/60Hz Rating output current: 2.37A (45W) / 3.42A (65W) / 4.74A (90W) Rating output voltage: 19V 30 Notebook PC E-Manual IMPORTANT!

Locate the input/output rating label on your Notebook PC and ensure that it matches the input/output rating information on your power adapter. Some Notebook PC models may have multiple rating output currents based on the available SKU. Ensure that your Notebook PC is connected to the power adapter before turning it on for the first time. We strongly recommend that you use a grounded wall socket while using your Notebook PC on power adapter mode. The socket outlet must be easily accessible and near your Notebook PC. To disconnect your Notebook PC from its main power supply, unplug your Notebook PC from the power socket. WARNING!

Read the following precautions for your Notebook PCs battery:

Only ASUS-authorized technicians should remove the battery inside the device (for non-removable battery only). The battery used in this device may present a risk of fire or chemical burn if removed or disassembled. Follow the warning labels for your personal safety. Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Do not dispose of in fire. Never attempt to short-circuit your Notebook PCs battery. Never attempt to disassemble and reassemble the battery

(for non-removable battery only). Discontinue usage if leakage is found. The battery and its components must be recycled or disposed of properly. Keep the battery and other small components away from children. 31 Notebook PC E-Manual Lift to open the display panel Press the power button 32 Notebook PC E-Manual Gestures for the touch screen panel and touchpad Gestures allow you to launch programs and access the settings of your Notebook PC. Refer to the following illustrations when using hand gestures on your touch screen panel and touchpad. NOTE:

The following screenshots are for reference only. The touch screen panels appearance may vary depending on model. The touch screen panel is available on selected models. Using touch screen panel gestures The gestures allow you to launch programs and access the settings of your Notebook PC. The functions can be activated by using the hand gestures on your Notebook PCs touch screen panel. Left edge swipe Right edge swipe Swipe from the left edge of the screen to launch Task view. Swipe from the right edge of the screen to launch Action Center. 33 Notebook PC E-Manual Tap/Double-tap Press and hold Tap an app to select it. Double-tap an app to launch it. Press and hold to open the right-

click menu. Zoom in Zoom out Spread apart your two fingers on the touch screen panel. Bring together your two fingers on the touch screen panel. 34 Notebook PC E-Manual Finger slide Drag Slide your finger to scroll up and down and slide your finger to pan the screen left or right. Drag to create a selection box around multiple items. Drag and drop an item to move it to a new location. 35 Notebook PC E-Manual Using the touchpad Moving the pointer You can tap anywhere on the touchpad to activate its pointer, then slide your finger on the touchpad to move the pointer onscreen. Slide horizontally Slide vertically Slide diagonally 36 Notebook PC E-Manual One-finger gestures Tap/Double-tap Tap an app to select it. Double-tap an app to launch it. Drag and drop Double-tap an item, then slide the same finger without lifting it off the touchpad. To drop the item to its new location, lift your finger from the touchpad. 37 Notebook PC E-Manual Left-click Right-click Click an app to select it. Double-click an app to launch it. Click this button to open the right-

click menu. NOTE: The areas inside the dotted line represent the locations of the left mouse button and the right mouse button on the touchpad. Two-finger gestures Two-finger scroll (up/down) Two-finger scroll (left/right) Slide two fingers to scroll up or down. Slide two fingers to scroll left or right. 38 Notebook PC E-Manual Zoom out Zoom in Bring together your two fingers on the touchpad. Spread apart your two fingers on the touchpad. Drag and drop Select an item then press and hold the left button. Using your other finger, slide on the touchpad to drag the item, lift your finger off the button to drop the item. 39 Notebook PC E-Manual Using the keyboard Function keys The function keys on your Notebook PCs keyboard can trigger the following commands:

Puts the Notebook PC into Sleep mode Turns Airplane mode on or off NOTE: When enabled, the Airplane mode disables all wireless connectivity. Decreases display brightness Increases display brightness Turns the display panel on or off Toggles the display mode NOTE: Ensure that the second display is connected to your Notebook PC. 40 Notebook PC E-Manual Enables or disables the touchpad Turns the speaker on or off Turns the speaker volume down Turns the speaker volume up Windows 10 keys There are two special Windows keys on your Notebook PCs keyboard used as below:

Launches the Start menu Displays the drop-down menu 41 Notebook PC E-Manual Multimedia control keys The multimedia control keys allow you to control multimedia files, such as audios and videos, when played in your Notebook PC. in combination with the arrow keys on your Notebook PC, Press illustrated as below. Stop Play or pause Skip to previous track or rewind Skip to next track or fast forward 42 Notebook PC E-Manual Using the numeric keypad NOTE: The numeric keypad layout may differ by model or territory but the usage procedures remain the same. A numeric keypad is available on selected Notebook PC models. You can use this keypad for numeric input or as pointer direction keys. Press to toggle between using the keypad as number keys or as pointer direction keys. 43 Notebook PC E-Manual Rotating the display panel Your Notebook PCs display panel is adjustable up to 360 degrees. You may adjust the display panel as shown below. 360 degrees adjustable Notebook PC mode Stand mode Tent mode Tablet mode NOTE: Rotating the screen to Stand, Tent and Tablet mode will disable the keyboard and touchpad. 44 Notebook PC E-Manual Chapter 3:

Working with Windows 10 45 Notebook PC E-Manual Starting for the first time When you start your Notebook PC for the first time, a series of screens appear to guide you in configuring your Windows 10 operating system. To start your Notebook PC for the first time:

1. 2. 3. 4. Press the power button on your Notebook PC. Wait for a few minutes until the setup screen appears. From the setup screen, pick your region and a language to use on your Notebook PC. Carefully read the License Terms. Select I accept. Follow the onscreen instructions to configure the following basic items:

Personalize Get online Settings Your account 5. After configuring the basic items, Windows 10 proceeds to install your apps and preferred settings. Ensure that your Notebook PC is kept powered on during the setup process. 6. Once the setup process is complete, the Desktop appears. NOTE: The screenshots in this chapter are for reference only. 46 Notebook PC E-Manual Start menu The Start menu is the main gateway to your Notebook PCs programs, Windows apps, folders, and settings. Change account settings, lock, or sign out from your account Launch an app from the Start screen Launch Taskview Launch an app from the taskbar Launch Search Launch the Start menu Launch All apps Shut down, restart, or put your Notebook PC to sleep Launch Settings Launch File Explorer You can use the Start menu to do these common activities:

Start programs or Windows apps Open commonly used programs or Windows apps Adjust Notebook PC settings Get help with the Windows operating system Turn off your Notebook PC Log off from Windows or switch to a different user account 47 Notebook PC E-Manual Launching the Start menu Tap the Start button your desktop. in the lower-left corner of Position your mouse pointer over the Start button in the lower-left corner of your desktop then click it. Press the Windows logo key on your keyboard. Opening programs from the Start menu One of the most common uses of the Start menu is opening programs installed on your Notebook PC. Tap the program to launch it. Position your mouse pointer over the program then click to launch it. Use the arrow keys to browse through the programs. Press to launch it. NOTE: Select All apps at the bottom of the left pane to display a full list of programs and folders on your Notebook PC in alphabetical order. 48 Notebook PC E-Manual Windows apps These are apps pinned on the right pane of the Start menu and displayed in tiled-format for easy access. NOTE: Some Windows apps require signing in to your Microsoft account before they are fully launched. 49 Notebook PC E-Manual Working with Windows apps Use your Notebook PCs touch screen, touchpad, or keyboard to launch, customize, and close apps. Launching Windows apps from the Start menu Tap the app to launch it. Position your mouse pointer over the app then click to launch it. Use the arrow keys to browse through the apps. Press to launch an app. Customizing Windows apps You can move, resize, unpin, or pin apps to the taskbar from the Start menu using the following steps:

Moving apps Press and hold the app, then drag and drop it to a new location. Position your mouse pointer over the app, then drag and drop the app to a new location. 50 Notebook PC E-Manual

Resizing apps Press and hold the app, then tap tile size. and select an app Position your mouse pointer over the app and right-click it, then click Resize and select an app tile size. Use the arrow keys to navigate to the app. Press then select Resize and select an app tile size.

, Unpinning apps Press and hold the app, then tap the icon. Position your mouse pointer over the app and right-click it, then click Unpin from Start. Use the arrow keys to navigate to the app. Press then select Unpin from Start.

, 51 Notebook PC E-Manual Pinning apps to the taskbar Press and hold the app, then tap Pin to taskbar. Position your mouse pointer over the app and right-click it, then click Pin to taskbar. Use the arrow keys to navigate to the app. Press then select Pin to taskbar.

, Pinning more apps to the Start menu From All apps, press and hold the app you want to add to the Start menu, then tap Pin to Start. From All apps, position your mouse pointer over the app you want to add to the Start menu and right-click it, then click Pin to Start. From All apps, press add to the Start menu, then select Pin to Start. on the app that you want to 52 Notebook PC E-Manual Task view Quickly switch between opened apps and programs using the task view feature, you can also use task view to switch between desktops. Launching task view Tap the edge of the screen. icon on the taskbar or swipe form the left Position your mouse pointer over the taskbar and click it. icon on the Press on your keyboard. 53 Notebook PC E-Manual Snap feature The Snap feature displays apps side-by-side, allowing you to work or switch between apps. Snap hotspots You can drag and drop apps to these hotspots to snap them into place. 54 Notebook PC E-Manual Using Snap or 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. Launch the app you wish to snap. Drag the title bar of your app and drop the app to the edge of the screen to snap. Launch another app and repeat the above steps to snap another app. Launch the app you wish to snap. Press and hold the keys to snap the app. key, then use the arrow Launch another app and repeat the above steps to snap another app. 55 Notebook PC E-Manual Action Center Action Center consolidates notifications from apps and presents a single place where you can interact with them. It also has a really useful Quick Actions section at the bottom. Launching Action Center Click the edge of the screen. icon on the taskbar or swipe from the right Position your mouse pointer over the taskbar and click it. icon on the Press on your keyboard. 56 Notebook PC E-Manual Other keyboard shortcuts Using the keyboard, you can also use the following shortcuts to help you launch applications and navigate Windows 10.

\

Launches Start menu Launches Action Center Launches the desktop Launches the File Explorer Opens the Share panel Launches Settings Launches Connect panel Activates the Lock screen Minimizes all currently active windows 57 Notebook PC E-Manual Launches Search Launches Project panel Opens the Run window Opens Ease of Access Center Opens the context menu of the Start button Launches the magnifier icon and zooms in your screen Zooms out your screen Opens Narrator Settings 58 Notebook PC E-Manual Connecting to wireless networks Wi-Fi Access emails, surf the Internet, and share applications via social networking sites using your Notebook PCs Wi-Fi connection. IMPORTANT! Airplane mode disables this feature. Ensure that Airplane mode is turned off before enabling the Wi-Fi connection of your Notebook PC. Connecting Wi-Fi Connect your Notebook PC to a Wi-Fi network by using the following steps:

or 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the icon from the taskbar. Select the icon to enable Wi-Fi. Select an access point from the list of available Wi-Fi connections. Select Connect to start the network connection. NOTE: You may be prompted to enter a security key to activate the Wi-Fi connection. 59 Notebook PC E-Manual Bluetooth Use Bluetooth to facilitate wireless data transfers with other Bluetooth-

enabled devices. IMPORTANT! Airplane mode disables this feature. Ensure that Airplane mode is turned off before enabling the Bluetooth connection of your Notebook PC. Pairing with other Bluetooth-enabled devices You need to pair your Notebook PC with other Bluetooth-enabled devices to enable data transfers. Connect your devices by using the following steps:

1. 2. 3. or Launch Settings from the Start menu. Select Devices, then select Bluetooth to search for Bluetooth-enabled devices. Select a device from the list. Compare the passcode on your Notebook PC with the passcode sent to your chosen device. If they are the same, select Yes to successfully pair your Notebook PC with the device. NOTE: For some Bluetooth-enabled devices, you may be prompted to key in the passcode of your Notebook PC. 60 Notebook PC E-Manual Airplane mode Airplane mode disables wireless communication, allowing you to use your Notebook PC safely while in-flight. NOTE: Contact your airline provider to learn about related in-flight services that can be used and restrictions that must be followed when using your Notebook PC in-flight. Turning Airplane mode on 1. 2. or Launch Action Center from the taskbar. Select the icon to enable Airplane mode. Press

. Turning Airplane mode off 1. 2. or Launch Action Center from the taskbar. Select the icon to disable Airplane mode. Press

. 61 Notebook PC E-Manual Turning your Notebook PC off You can turn off your Notebook PC by doing either of the following procedures:

or Launch the Start menu, then select Shut down to do a normal shutdown.

>

From the log-in screen, select

> Shut down. to launch Shut down Press Windows. Select Shut down from the drop-down list then select OK. If your Notebook PC is unresponsive, press and hold the power button for at least four (4) seconds until your Notebook PC turns off. 62 Notebook PC E-Manual Putting your Notebook PC to sleep To put your Notebook PC to Sleep mode:

or Launch the Start menu, then select Sleep to put your Notebook PC to sleep.

>

From the log-in screen, select

> Sleep. Press Select Sleep from the drop-down list then select OK. to launch Shut down Windows. NOTE: You can also put your Notebook PC to Sleep mode by pressing the power button once. 63 Notebook PC E-Manual 64 Notebook PC E-Manual Chapter 4:

Power-On Self-Test (POST) 65 Notebook PC E-Manual The Power-On Self-Test (POST) The POST (Power-On Self-Test) is a series of software-controlled diagnostic tests that run when you turn on or restart your Notebook PC. The software that controls the POST is installed as a permanent part of the Notebook PCs architecture. Using POST to access BIOS and Troubleshoot During POST, you can access the BIOS settings or run troubleshooting options using the function keys of your Notebook PC. You may refer to the following information for more details. BIOS The BIOS (Basic Input and Output System) stores system hardware settings that are needed for system startup in the Notebook PC. The default BIOS settings apply to most conditions of your Notebook PC. Do not change the default BIOS settings except in the following circumstances:

An error message appears onscreen during system bootup and requests you to run the BIOS Setup. You have installed a new system component that requires further BIOS settings or updates. WARNING! Using inappropriate BIOS settings may result to system instability or boot failure. We strongly recommend that you change the BIOS settings only with the help of a trained service personnel. Accessing BIOS Restart your Notebook PC then press during POST. 66 Notebook PC E-Manual BIOS Settings NOTE: The BIOS screens in this section are for reference only. The actual screens may differ by model and territory. Boot This menu allows you to set your boot option priorities. You may refer to the following procedures when setting your boot priority. 1. On the Boot screen, select Boot Option #1. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Boot Security Save & Exit Boot Configuration Fast Boot [Enabled]

Launch CSM [Disabled]

Driver Option Priorities Boot Option Priorities Boot Option #1 [Windows Boot Manager]

Add New Boot Option Delete Boot Option Sets the system boot order

: Select Screen

: Select Item Enter: Select

+/ : Change Opt. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC : Exit Version 2.16.1243 Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. 67 Notebook PC E-Manual 2. Press and select a device as the Boot Option #1. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Boot Security Save & Exit Boot Configuration Fast Boot [Enabled]

Launch CSM [Disabled]

Driver Option Priorities Boot Option Priorities Boot Option #1 [Windows Boot Manager]

Add New Boot Option Delete Boot Option Boot Option #1 Windows Boot Manager Disabled Sets the system boot order

: Select Screen

: Select Item Enter: Select

+/ : Change Opt. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC : Exit Version 2.16.1243 Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. 68 Notebook PC E-Manual Security This menu allows you to set up the administrator and user password of your Notebook PC. It also allows you to control the access to your Notebook PCs hard disk drive, input/output (I/O) interface, and USB interface. NOTE:

If you install a User Password, you will be prompted to input this before entering your Notebook PC's operating system. If you install an Administrator Password, you will be prompted to input this before entering BIOS. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Boot Security Save & Exit Password Description If ONLY the Administrators password is set, then this only limits access to Setup and is only asked for when entering Setup. If ONLY the users password is set, then this is a power on password and must be entered to boot or enter Setup. In Setup, the User will have Administrator rights. Administrator Password Status NOT INSTALLED User Password Status NOT INSTALLED Administrator Password User Password HDD Password Status : NOT INSTALLED Set Master Password Set User Password I/O Interface Security System Mode state User Secure Boot state Enabled Secure Boot Control [Enabled]

Key Management Set Administrator Password. The password length must be in the following range:

Minimum length 3 Maximum length 20 Must type with character:

a-z, 0-9

: Select Screen

: Select Item Enter: Select

+/ : Change Opt. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC : Exit Version 2.16.1243 Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. 69 Notebook PC E-Manual To set the password:

1. 2. 3. On the Security screen, select Administrator Password or User Password. Type in a password then press

. Re-type to confirm the password then press

. To clear the password:

On the Security screen, select Administrator Password or User Password. Type in the current password then press

. Leave the Create New Password field blank then press

. Select Yes in the confirmation box then press

. 1. 2. 3. 4. 70 Notebook PC E-Manual I/O Interface Security In the Security menu, you can access I/O Interface Security to lock or unlock some interface functions of your Notebook PC. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Boot Security Save & Exit I/O Interface Security LAN Network Interface [UnLock]

Wireless Network Interface [UnLock]

HD AUDIO Interface [UnLock]

USB Interface Security LAN Network interface Lock UnLock If Locked, LAN controller will be disabled.

: Select Screen

: Select Item Enter: Select

+/ : Change Opt. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC : Exit Version 2.16.1243 Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. To lock an interface:

1. On the Security screen, select I/O Interface Security. 2. Select an interface you would like to lock then press

. 3. Select Lock. 71 Notebook PC E-Manual USB Interface Security Through the I/O Interface Security menu, you can also access USB Interface Security to lock or unlock ports and devices. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Boot Security Save & Exit USB Interface Security USB Interface [UnLock]

External Ports [UnLock]

CMOS Camera [UnLock]

Card Reader [UnLock]

USB interface Lock UnLock If Locked, all USB device will be disabled

: Select Screen

: Select Item Enter: Select

+/ : Change Opt. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC : Exit Version 2.16.1243 Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. To lock the USB interface:

1. On the Security screen, select I/O Interface Security > USB Interface Security. 2. Select an interface that you would like to lock then select Lock. NOTE: Setting the USB Interface to Lock also locks and hides the External Ports and other devices included under USB Interface Security. 72 Notebook PC E-Manual Set Master Password In the Security menu, you can use Set Master Password to set up a password-enabled access to your hard disk drive. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Boot Security Save & Exit Password Description If ONLY the Administrators password is set, then this only limits access to Setup and is only asked for when entering Setup. If ONLY the users password is set, then this is a power on password and must be entered to boot or enter Setup. In Setup, the User will have Administrator rights. Administrator Password Status NOT INSTALLED User Password Status NOT INSTALLED Administrator Password User Password HDD Password Status : NOT INSTALLED Set Master Password Set User Password I/O Interface Security Set HDD Master Password.

***Advisable to Power Cycle System after Setting Hard Disk Passwords***

: Select Screen

: Select Item Enter: Select

+/ : Change Opt. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC : Exit Version 2.16.1243 Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. To set the HDD password:

1. On the Security screen, select Set Master Password. 2. Type in a password then press

. 3. 4. Re-type to confirm the password then press

. Select Set User Password then repeat the previous steps to set up the user password. 73 Notebook PC E-Manual Save & Exit To keep your configuration settings, select Save Changes and Exit before exiting the BIOS. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Boot Security Save & Exit Save Changes and Exit Discard Changes and Exit Save Options Save Changes Discard Changes Restore Defaults Boot Override Windows Boot Manager Launch EFI Shell from filesystem device Exit system setup after saving the changes.

: Select Screen

: Select Item Enter: Select

+/ : Change Opt. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC : Exit Version 2.16.1243 Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. 74 Notebook PC E-Manual To update the BIOS:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Verify the Notebook PCs exact model then download the latest BIOS file for your model from the ASUS website. Save a copy of the downloaded BIOS file to a flash disk drive. Connect your flash disk drive to your Notebook PC. Restart your Notebook PC then press during POST. From the BIOS menu, select Advanced > Start Easy Flash, then press

. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Boot Security Save & Exit Start Easy Flash Internal Pointing Device [Enabled]

Wake on Lid Open [Enabled]

Power Off Energy Saving [Enabled]

SATA Configuration Graphics Configuration Intel (R) Anti-Theft Technology Corporation USB Configuration Network Stack Press Enter to run the utility to select and update BIOS.

: Select Screen

: Select Item Enter: Select

+/ : Change Opt. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC : Exit Version 2.16.1243 Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. 75 Notebook PC E-Manual 6. Locate your downloaded BIOS file in the flash disk drive then press

. ASUSTek EasyFlash Utility FLASH TYPE : Generic Flash Type Current BIOS Platform : UX560_Q504 Version : 101 Build Date : Oct 26 2015 Build Time : 11:51:05 New BIOS Platform : Unknown Version : Unknown Build Date : Unknown Build Time : Unknown 0 EFI

<DIR>

FSO FS1 FS2 FS3 FS4

[] : Switch [] : Choose [q] : Exit [Enter] : Enter/Execute 7. After the BIOS update process, select Exit > Restore Defaults to restore the system to its default settings. 76 Notebook PC E-Manual Recovering your system Using recovery options on your Notebook PC allows you to restore the system to its original state or simply refresh its settings to help improve performance. IMPORTANT!

Backup all your data files before doing any recovery option on your Notebook PC. Note down important customized settings such as network settings, user names, and passwords to avoid data loss. Ensure that your Notebook PC is plugged in to a power source before resetting your system. Windows 10 allows you to do any of the following recovery options:

Keep my files - This option allows you refresh your Notebook PC without affecting personal files (photos, music, videos, documents). Using this option, you can restore your Notebook PC to its default settings and delete other installed apps. Remove everything - This option resets your Notebook PC to its factory settings. You must backup your data before doing this option. 77 Notebook PC E-Manual Go back to an earlier build - This option allows you to go back to an earlier build. Use this option if this build is not working for you. Advanced startup - Using this option allows you to perform other advanced recovery options on your Notebook PC such as:

-

-

Using a USB drive, network connection or Windows recovery DVD to startup your Notebook PC. Using Troubleshoot to enable any of these advanced recovery options: System Restore, System Image Recovery, Startup Repair, Command Prompt, UEFI Firmware Settings, and Startup Settings. Performing a recovery option Refer to the following steps if you want to access and use any of the available recovery options for your Notebook PC. 1. Launch Settings and select Update and security. 78 Notebook PC E-Manual 2. Under the Update and security option, select Recovery then select the recovery option you would like to perform. 79 Notebook PC E-Manual 80 Notebook PC E-Manual Tips and FAQs 81 Notebook PC E-Manual Useful tips for your Notebook PC To help you maximize the use of your Notebook PC, maintain its system performance, and ensure all your data are kept secured, here are some useful tips that you can follow:

Update Windows periodically to ensure that your applications have the latest security settings. Use an anti-virus software to protect your data and keep this updated too. Unless absolutely necessary, refrain from using force shutdown to turn off your Notebook PC. Always backup your data and make it a point to create a backup data in an external storage drive. Refrain from using the Notebook PC at extremely high temperatures. If you are not going to use your Notebook PC for a long period of time (at least a month), we recommend that you take out the battery if the battery is removable. Disconnect all external devices and ensure you have the following items prior to resetting your Notebook PC:

-

-

-

-

Product key for your operating systems and other installed applications Backup data Log in ID and password Internet connection information 82 Notebook PC E-Manual Hardware FAQs 1. A black dot, or sometimes a colored dot, appears onscreen when I turn on the Notebook PC. What should I do?

Although these dots normally appear onscreen, they will not affect your system. If the incident continues and subsequently affects system performance, consult an authorized ASUS service center. 2. My display panel has an uneven color and brightness. How can I fix this?

The color and brightness of your display panel may be affected by the angle and current position of your Notebook PC. The brightness and color tone of your Notebook PC may also vary per model. You may use the function keys or the display settings in your operating system to adjust the appearance of your display panel. 3. How can I maximize my Notebook PC s battery life?

You can try doing any of the following suggestions:

Use the function keys to adjust the display brightness. If you are not using any Wi-Fi connection, switch your system into Airplane mode. Disconnect unused USB devices. Close unused applications, especially those that take up too much system memory. 83 Notebook PC E-Manual 4. My battery charge indicator does not light up. Whats wrong?

Check whether the power adapter or battery pack is attached correctly. You may also disconnect the power adapter or battery pack, wait for a minute, then reconnect them again to the power outlet and Notebook PC. If the problem still exists, contact your local ASUS service center for assistance. 5. Why is my touchpad not working?

Press to enable your touchpad. 6. When I play audio and video files, why cant I hear any sound from my Notebook PCs audio speakers?

You can try doing any of the following suggestions:

Press to turn up the speaker volume. Check if your speakers were set to mute. Check if a headphone jack is connected to your Notebook PC and remove it. 7. What should I do if my Notebook PCs power adapter gets lost or my battery stops working?

Contact your local ASUS service center for assistance. 84 Notebook PC E-Manual 8. My Notebook PC cannot do keystrokes correctly because my cursor keeps on moving. What should I do?

Make sure that nothing accidentally touches or presses on your touchpad while you type on the keyboard. You can also disable your touchpad by pressing

. 9. Instead of showing letters, pressing the U, I, and O keys on my keyboard displays numbers. How can I change this?

Press the key or

(on selected models) on your Notebook PC to turn off this feature and use the said keys for inputting letters. 85 Notebook PC E-Manual Software FAQs 1. When I turn on my Notebook PC, the power indicator lights up but nothing appears on my screen. What can I do to fix this?

You can try doing any of the following suggestions:

Force shutdown your Notebook PC by pressing the power button for at least four (4) seconds. Check if the power adapter and battery pack are inserted correctly then turn on your Notebook PC. If the problem still exists, contact your local ASUS service center for assistance. 2. What should I do when my screen displays this message:

Remove disks or other media. Press any key to restart.?

You can try doing any of the following suggestions:

Remove all connected USB devices then restart your Notebook PC. Remove any optical discs that are left inside the optical drive then restart. If the problem still exists, your Notebook PC might have a memory storage problem. Contact your local ASUS service center for assistance. 3. My Notebook PC boots slower than usual and my operating system lags. How can I fix this?

Delete the applications you recently installed or were not included with your operating system package then restart your system. 86 Notebook PC E-Manual 4. My Notebook PC does not boot up. How can I fix this?

You can try doing any of the following suggestions:

Remove all connected devices to your Notebook PC then restart your system. If the problem still exists, contact your local ASUS service center for assistance. 5. Why cant my Notebook PC wake up from sleep mode?

You need to press the power button to resume your last working state. Your system might have completely used up its battery power. Connect the power adapter to your Notebook PC and connect to a power outlet then press the power button. 87 Notebook PC E-Manual 88 Notebook PC E-Manual Appendices 89 Notebook PC E-Manual DVD-ROM Drive Information The DVD-ROM drive allows you to view and create your own CDs and DVDs. You can purchase an optional DVD viewer software to view DVD titles. NOTE: The DVD-ROM Drive is available on selected models. Regional Playback Information Playback of DVD movie titles involves decoding MPEG2 video, digital AC3 audio and decryption of CSS protected content. CSS (sometimes called copy guard) is the name given to the content protection scheme adopted by the motion picture industry to satisfy a need to protect against unlawful content duplication. Although the design rules imposed on CSS licensors are many, one rule that is most relevant is playback restrictions on regionalized content. In order to facilitate geographically staggered movie releases, DVD video titles are released for specific geographic regions as defined in Region Definitions below. Copyright laws require that all DVD movies be limited to a particular region (usually coded to the region at which it is sold). While DVD movie content may be released for multiple regions, CSS design rules require that any system capable of playing CSS encrypted content must only be capable of playing one region. IMPORTANT! The region setting may be changed up to five times using the viewer software, then it can only play DVD movies for the last region setting. Changing the region code after that will require factory resetting which is not covered by warranty. If resetting is desired, shipping and resetting costs will be at the expense of the user. 90 Notebook PC E-Manual Region Definitions Region 1 Canada, US, US Territories Region 2 Czech, Egypt, Finland, France, Germany, Gulf States, Hungary, Iceland, Iran, Iraq, Ireland, Italy, Japan, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Saudi Arabia, Scotland, South Africa, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Syria, Turkey, UK, Greece, Former Yugoslav Republics, Slovakia Region 3 Burma, Indonesia, South Korea, Malaysia, Philippines, Singapore, Taiwan, Thailand, Vietnam Region 4 Australia, Caribbean (Except US Territories), Central America, New Zealand, Pacific Islands, South America Region 5 CIS, India, Pakistan, Rest of Africa, Russia, North Korea Region 6 China 91 Notebook PC E-Manual Blu-ray ROM Drive Information The Blu-ray ROM Drive allows you to view HD (High-Definition) videos and other disc file formats such as DVDs and CDs. NOTE: The Blue-ray ROM Drive is available on selected models. Region Definitions Region A North, Central and South American countries, and their territories; Taiwan, Hong Kong, Macao, Japan, Korea (South and North), South East Asian countries and their territories. Region B European, African, and South West Asian countries and their territories; Australia and New Zealand. Region C Central, South Asian, Eastern European countries and their territories; China and Mongolia. NOTE: Refer to Blu-ray Disc website at www.blu-raydisc.com/en/Technical/FAQs/Blu-

rayDiscforVideo.aspx for more details. Internal Modem Compliancy The Notebook PC with internal modem model complies with JATE (Japan), FCC

(US, Canada, Korea, Taiwan), and CTR21. The internal modem has been approved in accordance with Council Decision 98/482/EC for pan-European single terminal connection to the public switched telephone network (PSTN). However due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in different countries, the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network termination point. In the event of problems you should contact your equipment supplier in the first instance. 92 Notebook PC E-Manual Overview On 4th August 1998 the European Council Decision regarding the CTR 21 has been published in the Official Journal of the EC. The CTR 21 applies to all non voice terminal equipment with DTMF-dialling which is intended to be connected to the analogue PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network). CTR 21 (Common Technical Regulation) for the attachment requirements for connection to the analogue public switched telephone networks of terminal equipment (excluding terminal equipment supporting the voice telephony justified case service) in which network addressing, if provided, is by means of dual tone multi-frequency signalling. Network Compatibility Declaration Statement to be made by the manufacturer to the Notified Body and the vendor:

This declaration will indicate the networks with which the equipment is designed to work and any notified networks with which the equipment may have inter-

working difficulties. Statement to be made by the manufacturer to the user: This declaration will indicate the networks with which the equipment is designed to work and any notified networks with which the equipment may have inter-working difficulties. The manufacturer shall also associate a statement to make it clear where network compatibility is dependent on physical and software switch settings. It will also advise the user to contact the vendor if it is desired to use the equipment on another network. Up to now the Notified Body of CETECOM issued several pan-European approvals using CTR 21. The results are Europes first modems which do not require regulatory approvals in each individual European country. Non-Voice Equipment Answering machines and loud-speaking telephones can be eligible as well as modems, fax machines, auto-dialers and alarm systems. Equipment in which the end-to-end quality of speech is controlled by regulations (e.g. handset telephones and in some countries also cordless telephones) is excluded. 93 Notebook PC E-Manual This table shows the countries currently under the CTR21 standard. Applied Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Still Pending No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes Yes Yes More Testing No No Not Applicable Yes No No No No Not Applicable No No Still Pending No No No Yes No Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable No No No Country Austria1 Belgium Czech Republic Denmark1 Finland France Germany Greece Hungary Iceland Ireland Italy Israel Lichtenstein Luxemburg The Netherlands1 Norway Poland Portugal Spain Sweden Switzerland United Kingdom 94 Notebook PC E-Manual This information was copied from CETECOM and is supplied without liability. For updates to this table, you may visit http://www.cetecom.de/technologies/ctr_21. html. 1 National requirements will apply only if the equipment may use pulse dialling

(manufacturers may state in the user guide that the equipment is only intended to support DTMF signalling, which would make any additional testing superfluous). In The Netherlands additional testing is required for series connection and caller ID facilities. Declaration of Conformity (R&TTE directive 1999/5/EC) The following items were completed and are considered relevant and sufficient:

Essential requirements as in [Article 3]

Protection requirements for health and safety as in [Article 3.1a]

Testing for electric safety according to [EN 60950]

Protection requirements for electromagnetic compatibility in [Article 3.1b]

Testing for electromagnetic compatibility in [EN 301 489-1] &

[EN 301 489-17]

Effective use of the radio spectrum as in [Article 3.2]

Radio test suites according to [EN 300 328-2]

95 Notebook PC E-Manual Federal Communications Commission Interference Statement This device complies with FCC Rules Part 15. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission

(FCC) rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. WARNING! The use of a shielded-type power cord is required in order to meet FCC emission limits and to prevent interference to the nearby radio and television reception. It is essential that only the supplied power cord be used. Use only shielded cables to connect I/O devices to this equipment. You are cautioned that changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void your authority to operate the equipment.

(Reprinted from the Code of Federal Regulations #47, part 15.193, 1993. Washington DC: Office of the Federal Register, National Archives and Records Administration, U.S. Government Printing Office.) 96 Notebook PC E-Manual FCC Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure Caution Statement WARNING! Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate this equipment. The manufacture declares that this device is limited to Channels 1 through 11 in the 2.4GHz frequency by specified firmware controlled in the USA. This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. To maintain compliance with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, please avoid direct contact to the transmitting antenna during transmitting. End users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This device operates within a 5.15-5.25 GHz frequency range and is restricted for indoor use only. Outdoor operation within 5150-5250MHz is prohibited. RF Exposure Information (SAR) This device meets the governments requirements for exposure to radio waves. This device is designed and manufactured not to exceed the emission limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S. Government. The exposure standard employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6 W/kg. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions accepted by the FCC with the EUT transmitting at the specified power level in different channels. 97 Notebook PC E-Manual RF Exposure information (SAR) - CE This device meets the EU requirements (1999/519/EC) on the limitation of exposure of the general public to electromagnetic fields by way of health protection. The limits are part of extensive recommendations for the protection of the general public. These recommendations have been developed and checked by independent scientific organizations through regular and thorough evaluations of scientific studies. The unit of measurement for the European Councils recommended limit for mobile devices is the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR), and the SAR limit is 2.0 W/Kg averaged over 10 gram of body tissue. It meets the requirements of the International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP). For next-to-body operation, this device has been tested and meets the ICNRP exposure guidelines and the European Standard EN 50566 and EN 62209-2. SAR is measured with the device directly contacted to the body while transmitting at the highest certified output power level in all frequency bands of the mobile device. CE Mark Warning This device complies with the R&TTE Directive (1999/5/EC), the EMC Directive

(2004/108/EC), and the Low Voltage Directive (2006/95/EC) issued by the Commission of the European Community. Countries where the device will be sold to:

AT EE IT NO BE ES IS PL BG FI LI PT CH FR LT RO CY GB LU SE CZ GR LV SI DE HU MT SK DK IE NL TR 98 Notebook PC E-Manual IC Radiation Exposure Statement for Canada This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. To maintain compliance with IC RF exposure compliance requirements, please avoid direct contact to the transmitting antenna during transmitting. End users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause interference and This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. To prevent radio interference to the licensed service (i.e. co-channel Mobile Satellite systems) this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing. This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B) 99 Notebook PC E-Manual Dclaration dIndustrie Canada relative lexposition aux ondes radio Cet appareil est conforme aux limites dexposition aux radiations dIndustrie Canada dfinies pour un environnement non-contrl. Pour maintenir la conformit avec les exigences dexposition RF dIC, veuillez viter tout contact direct avec lantenne pendant lmission. Les utilisateurs finaux doivent suivre les instructions de fonctionnement spcifiques pour satisfaire la conformit aux expositions RF. Son utilisation est sujette aux deux conditions suivantes:

Cet appareil ne peut pas causer dinterfrence, et Cet appareil doit accepter toute interfrence, y compris les interfrences qui pourraient causer un fonctionnement non souhait de lappareil. Pour viter les interfrences radio avec le service sous licence (cest -dire le partage de canal avec les systmes de tlphonie satellite), cet appareil est destin tre utilis en intrieur et loin des fentres pour fournir un blindage maximal. Tout appareil (ou son antenne dmission) qui est install en extrieur est sujet cette licence. Le present appareil est conforme aux CNR dIndustrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B) 100 Notebook PC E-Manual Wireless Operation Channel for Different Domains N. America 2.412-2.462 GHz Japan 2.412-2.484 GHz Europe ETSI 2.412-2.472 GHz Ch01 through CH11 Ch01 through Ch14 Ch01 through Ch13 France Restricted Wireless Frequency Bands Some areas of France have a restricted frequency band. The worst case maximum authorized power indoors are:

10mW for the entire 2.4 GHz band (2400 MHz2483.5 MHz) 100mW for frequencies between 2446.5 MHz and 2483.5 MHz NOTE: Channels 10 through 13 inclusive operate in the band 2446.6 MHz to 2483.5 MHz. There are few possibilities for outdoor use: on private property or on the private property of public persons, use is subject to a preliminary authorization procedure by the Ministry of Defense, with maximum authorized power of 100mW in the 2446.52483.5 MHz band. Use outdoors on public property is not permitted. In the departments listed below, for the entire 2.4 GHz band:

Maximum authorized power indoors is 100mW Maximum authorized power outdoors is 10mW 101 Notebook PC E-Manual Departments in which the use of the 24002483.5 MHz band is permitted with an EIRP of less than 100mW indoors and less than 10mW outdoors:

01 Ain 02 Aisne 05 Hautes Alpes 08 Ardennes 11 Aude 24 Dordogne 32 Gers 41 Loir et Cher 55 Meuse 60 Oise 12 Aveyron 25 Doubs 36 Indre 45 Loiret 58 Nivre 61 Orne 03 Allier 09 Arige 16 Charente 26 Drme 37 Indre et Loire 50 Manche 59 Nord 63 Puy du Dme 64 Pyrnes Atlantique 66 Pyrnes Orientales 67 Bas Rhin 68 Haut Rhin 70 Haute Sane 71 Sane et Loire 75 Paris 88 Vosges 94 Val de Marne 82 Tarn et Garonne 84 Vaucluse 89 Yonne 90 Territoire de Belfort This requirement is likely to change over time, allowing you to use your wireless LAN card in more areas within France. Please check with ART for the latest information (www.arcep.fr). NOTE: Your WLAN Card transmits less than 100mW, but more than 10mW. 102 Notebook PC E-Manual UL Safety Notices Required for UL 1459 covering telecommunications (telephone) equipment intended to be electrically connected to a telecommunication network that has an operating voltage to ground that does not exceed 200V peak, 300V peak-to-peak, and 105V rms, and installed or used in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70). When using the Notebook PC modem, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons, including the following:

DO NOT use the Notebook PC near water, for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool. DO NOT use the Notebook PC during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. DO NOT use the Notebook PC in the vicinity of a gas leak. Required for UL 1642 covering primary (non-rechargeable) and secondary

(rechargeable) lithium batteries for use as power sources in products. These batteries contain metallic lithium, or a lithium alloy, or a lithium ion, and may consist of a single electrochemical cell or two or more cells connected in series, parallel, or both, that convert chemical energy into electrical energy by an irreversible or reversible chemical reaction. DO NOT dispose the Notebook PC battery pack in a fire, as they may explode. Check with local codes for possible special disposal instructions to reduce the risk of injury to persons due to fire or explosion. DO NOT use power adapters or batteries from other devices to reduce the risk of injury to persons due to fire or explosion. Use only UL certified power adapters or batteries supplied by the manufacturer or authorized retailers. 103 Notebook PC E-Manual Power Safety Requirement Products with electrical current ratings up to 6A and weighing more than 3Kg must use approved power cords greater than or equal to: H05VV-F, 3G, 0.75mm2 or H05VV-F, 2G, 0.75mm2. TV Notices Note to CATV System InstallerCable distribution system should be grounded

(earthed) in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 70, the National Electrical Code (NEC), in particular Section 820.93, Grounding of Outer Conductive Shield of a Coaxial Cable installation should include bonding the screen of the coaxial cable to the earth at the building entrance. REACH Complying with the REACH (Registration, Evaluation, Authorization, and Restriction of Chemicals) regulatory framework, we publish the chemical substances in our products at ASUS REACH website at http://csr.asus.com/english/

REACH.htm. Macrovision Corporation Product Notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S.A. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Prevention of Hearing Loss To prevent possible hearing damage, do not listen at high volume levels for long periods. 104 Notebook PC E-Manual Nordic Lithium Cautions (for lithium-ion batteries) CAUTION! Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturers instructions. (English) ATTENZIONE! Rischio di esplosione della batteria se sostituita in modo errato. Sostituire la batteria con un una di tipo uguale o equivalente consigliata dalla fabbrica. Non disperdere le batterie nellambiente. (Italian) VORSICHT! Explosionsgefahr bei unsachgemen Austausch der Batterie. Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einem vom Hersteller empfohlenem hnlichen Typ. Entsorgung gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers. (German) ADVARSELI! Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig hndtering. Udskiftning m kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levr det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandren. (Danish) VARNING! Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Anvnd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera anvnt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion. (Swedish) VAROITUS! Paristo voi rjht, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan sousittelemaan tyyppiin. Hvit kytetty paristo valmistagan ohjeiden mukaisesti. (Finnish) ATTENTION! Il y a danger dexplosion sil y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du mre type ou dun type quivalent recommand par le constructeur. Mettre au rebut les batteries usages conformment aux instructions du fabricant. (French) ADVARSEL! Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri. Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten. Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner. (Norwegian)

(Japanese)

!

. (Russian) 105 Notebook PC E-Manual Optical Drive Safety Information Laser Safety Information CD-ROM Drive Safety Warning CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT WARNING! To prevent exposure to the optical drives laser, do not attempt to disassemble or repair the optical drive by yourself. For your safety, contact a professional technician for assistance. Service warning label WARNING! INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN. DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS. CDRH Regulations The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration implemented regulations for laser products on August 2, 1976. These regulations apply to laser products manufactured from August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein or in the laser product installation guide may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Coating Notice IMPORTANT! To provide electrical insulation and maintain electrical safety, a coating is applied to insulate the device except on the areas where the I/O ports are located. 106 Notebook PC E-Manual CTR 21 Approval (for Notebook PC with built-in Modem) Danish Dutch English Finnish French 107 Notebook PC E-Manual German Greek Italian Portuguese Spanish Swedish 108 Notebook PC E-Manual ENERGY STAR complied product ENERGY STAR is a joint program of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and the U.S. Department of Energy helping us all save money and protect the environment through energy efficient products and practices. All ASUS products with the ENERGY STAR logo comply with the ENERGY STAR standard, and the power management feature is enabled by default. The monitor and computer are automatically set to sleep after 10 and 30 minutes of user inactivity. To wake your computer, click the mouse or press any key on the keyboard. Please visit http://www.energystar.gov/powermanagement for detail information on power management and its benefits to the environment. In addition, please visit http://www.energystar.gov for detail information on the ENERGY STAR joint program. NOTE: Energy Star is NOT supported on FreeDOS and Linux-based operating systems. Global Environmental Regulation Compliance and Declaration ASUS follows the green design concept to design and manufacture our products, and makes sure that each stage of the product life cycle of ASUS product is in line with global environmental regulations. In addition, ASUS disclose the relevant information based on regulation requirements. Please refer to http://csr.asus.com/english/Compliance.htm for information disclosure based on regulation requirements ASUS is complied with:

Japan JIS-C-0950 Material Declarations EU REACH SVHC Korea RoHS 109 Notebook PC E-Manual ASUS Recycling/Takeback Services ASUS recycling and takeback programs come from our commitment to the highest standards for protecting our environment. We believe in providing solutions for you to be able to responsibly recycle our products, batteries, other components as well as the packaging materials. Please go to http://csr.asus.com/

english/Takeback.htm for detailed recycling information in different regions. Rechargeable Battery Recycling Service in North America For US and Canada customers, you can call 1-800-822-8837

(toll-free) for recycling information of your ASUS products rechargeable batteries. Regional notice for California WARNING! This product may contain chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects or other reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. Regional notice for Singapore Complies with IDA Standards DB103778 This ASUS product complies with IDA Standards. Regional notice for India This product complies with the India E-waste (Management and Handling) Rule 2011 and prohibits use of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls (PBBs) and polybrominated diphenyl ethers (PBDEs) in concentrations exceeding 0.1% by weight in homogenous materials and 0.01% by weight in homogenous materials for cadmium, except for the exemptions listed in Schedule-II of the Rule. 110 Notebook PC E-Manual Radiation Exposure Statement The product comply with the Canada portable RF exposure limit set forth for an uncontrolled environment and are safe for intended operation as described in this manual. The further RF exposure reduction can be achieved if the product can be kept as far as possible from the user body or set the device to lower output power if such function is available. Dclaration dexposition aux radiations Le produit est conforme aux limites dexposition pour les appareils portables RF pour les Etats-Unis et le Canada tablies pour un environnement non contrl. Le produit est sr pour un fonctionnement tel que dcrit dans ce manuel. La rduction aux expositions RF peut tre augmente si lappareil peut tre conserv aussi loin que possible du corps de lutilisateur ou que le dispositif est rgl sur la puissance de sortie la plus faible si une telle fonction est disponible. Caution

(i) the device for operation in the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems;

(ii) the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5470-5725 MHz shall comply with the e.i.r.p. limit; and

(iii) the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5825 MHz shall comply with the e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non point-to-

point operation as appropriate.

(iv) Users should also be advised that high-power radars are allocated as primary users (i.e. priority users) of the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5650-5850 MHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices. 111 Notebook PC E-Manual Avertissement Le guide dutilisation des dispositifs pour rseaux locaux doit inclure des instructions prcises sur les restrictions susmentionnes, notamment :

(i) les dispositifs fonctionnant dans la bande 5 150-5 250 MHz sont rservs uniquement pour une utilisation lintrieur afin de rduire les risques de brouillage prjudiciable aux systmes de satellites mobiles utilisant les mmes canaux;

(ii) le gain maximal dantenne permis pour les dispositifs utilisant les bandes 5 250-5 350 MHz et 5 470-5 725 MHz doit se conformer la limite de p.i.r.e.;

(iii) le gain maximal dantenne permis (pour les dispositifs utilisant la bande 5 725-

5 825 MHz) doit se conformer la limite de p.i.r.e. spcifie pour lexploitation point point et non point point, selon le cas.

(iv) De plus, les utilisateurs devraient aussi tre aviss que les utilisateurs de radars de haute puissance sont dsigns utilisateurs principaux (c.--d., quils ont la priorit) pour les bandes 5 250-5 350 MHz et 5 650-5 850 MHz et que ces radars pourraient causer du brouillage et/ou des dommages aux dispositifs LAN-EL. Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure Information The radiated output power of the Wireless Device is below the Industry Canada

(IC) radio frequency exposure limits. The Wireless Device should be used in such a manner such that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. This device has been evaluated for and shown compliant with the IC Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) limits when operated in portable exposure conditions. Informations concernant lexposition aux frquences radio (RF) La puissance de sortie mise par lappareil de sans fil est infrieure la limite dexposition aux frquences radio dIndustry Canada (IC). Utilisez lappareil de sans fil de faon minimiser les contacts humains lors du fonctionnement normal. Ce dispositif a t valu pour et dmontr conforme la Taux IC dabsorption spcifique (SAR) des limites lorsquil est utilis dans des conditions dexposition portatifs. 112 Notebook PC E-Manual EU Declaration of Conformity We, the undersigned, Manufacturer:

Address:

Authorized representative in Europe:

Address, City:

Country:

declare the following apparatus:

Product name :

Model name :

The object of the declaration described above is in conformity with the relevant Union harmonisation legislation:

EMC Directive 2004/108/EC (until April 19th, 2016) and Directive 2014/30/EU (from April 20th, 2016) ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. 4F, No. 150, LI-TE Rd., PEITOU, TAIPEI 112, TAIWAN ASUS COMPUTER GmbH HARKORT STR. 21-23, 40880 RATINGEN GERMANY Notebook PC UX560U,Q504U,Q524U,Q534U EN 55022:2010+AC:2011 EN 61000-3-2:2014 EN 55013:2001+A1:2003+A2:2006 R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC EN 300 328 V1.8.1(2012-06) EN 300 440-1 V1.6.1(2010-08) EN 300 440-2 V1.4.1(2010-08) EN 301 511 V9.0.2(2003-03) EN 301 908-1 V6.2.1(2013-04) EN 301 908-2 V6.2.1(2013-10) EN 301 908-13 V6.2.1(2014-02) EN 301 893 V1.7.1(2012-06) EN 300 330-2 V1.5.1(2010-02) EN 50360:2001/A1:2012 EN 62479:2010 EN 62311:2008 EN 55024:2010 EN 61000-3-3:2013 EN 55020:2007+A11:2011 EN 301 489-1 V1.9.2(2011-09) EN 301 489-3 V1.6.1(2013-12) EN 301 489-4 V2.1.1(2013-12) EN 301 489-7 V1.3.1(2005-11) EN 301 489-9 V1.4.1(2007-11) EN 301 489-17 V2.2.1(2012-09) EN 301 489-24 V1.5.1(2010-09) EN 301 357-2 V1.4.1(2008-11) EN 302 291-2 V1.1.1(2005-07) EN 302 623 V1.1.1(2009-01) EN 50566:2013/AC:2014 EN 50385:2002 LVD Directive 2006/95/EC (until April 19th, 2016) and Directive 2014/35/EU (from April 20th, 2016) EN 60950-1: 2006 / A12: 2011 EN 60950-1: 2006 / A2: 2013 Ecodesign Directive 2009/125/EC Regulation (EC) No. 1275/2008 Regulation (EC) No. 642/2009 EN 60065:2002 / A12: 2011 Regulation (EC) No. 278/2009 Regulation (EU) No. 617/2013 RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU Ver. 160217 CE marking Equipment Class 2 Signature Jerry Shen Printed Name CEO Position

(EU conformity marking) Taipei, Taiwan Place of issue 10/5/2016 Date of issue 2016 Year CE marking was first affixed 113 Notebook PC E-Manual 114 Notebook PC E-Manual

E11011 First Edition December 2015 E-Manual COPYRIGHT INFORMATION No part of this manual, including the products and software described in it, may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form or by any means, except documentation kept by the purchaser for backup purposes, without the express written permission of ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. (ASUS). ASUS PROVIDES THIS MANUAL AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL ASUS, ITS DIRECTORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES

(INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF USE OR DATA, INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS AND THE LIKE), EVEN IF ASUS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES ARISING FROM ANY DEFECT OR ERROR IN THIS MANUAL OR PRODUCT. Products and corporate names appearing in this manual may or may not be registered trademarks or copyrights of their respective companies, and are used only for identification or explanation and to the owners benefit, without intent to infringe. SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL ARE FURNISHED FOR INFORMATIONAL USE ONLY, AND ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE, AND SHOULD NOT BE CONSTRUED AS A COMMITMENT BY ASUS. ASUS ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY FOR ANY ERRORS OR INACCURACIES THAT MAY APPEAR IN THIS MANUAL, INCLUDING THE PRODUCTS AND SOFTWARE DESCRIBED IN IT. Copyright 2015 ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY Circumstances may arise where because of a default on ASUS part or other liability, you are entitled to recover damages from ASUS. In each such instance, regardless of the basis on which you are entitled to claim damages from ASUS, ASUS is liable for no more than damages for bodily injury (including death) and damage to real property and tangible personal property; or any other actual and direct damages resulted from omission or failure of performing legal duties under this Warranty Statement, up to the listed contract price of each product. ASUS will only be responsible for or indemnify you for loss, damages or claims based in contract, tort or infringement under this Warranty Statement. This limit also applies to ASUS suppliers and its reseller. It is the maximum for which ASUS, its suppliers, and your reseller are collectively responsible. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES IS ASUS LIABLE FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING: (1) THIRD-PARTY CLAIMS AGAINST YOU FOR DAMAGES; (2) LOSS OF, OR DAMAGE TO, YOUR RECORDS OR DATA; OR (3) SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR INDIRECT DAMAGES OR FOR ANY ECONOMIC CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS), EVEN IF ASUS, ITS SUPPLIERS OR YOUR RESELLER IS INFORMED OF THEIR POSSIBILITY. SERVICE AND SUPPORT Visit our multi-language website at https://www.asus.com/support/

2 Notebook PC E-Manual Table of Contents About this manual .....................................................................................................7 Conventions used in this manual .............................................................................8 Icons ....................................................................................................................................8 Typography .......................................................................................................................8 Safety precautions .....................................................................................................9 Using your Notebook PC ..............................................................................................9 Caring for your Notebook PC .....................................................................................10 Proper disposal ................................................................................................................11 Chapter 1: Hardware Setup Getting to know your Notebook PC ...................................................................14 Top View .............................................................................................................................14 Bottom ................................................................................................................................17 Right Side ..........................................................................................................................18 Left Side .............................................................................................................................20 Chapter 2: Using your Notebook PC Getting started ...........................................................................................................24 Charge your Notebook PC ...........................................................................................24 Lift to open the display panel ....................................................................................26 Press the power button ................................................................................................26 Using the touchpad .......................................................................................................27 Using the keyboard ...................................................................................................31 Function keys ...................................................................................................................31 Windows 10 keys ..........................................................................................................32 3 Notebook PC E-Manual Chapter 3: Working with Windows 10 Starting for the first time .........................................................................................34 Start menu ...................................................................................................................35 Windows apps ..........................................................................................................37 Working with Windows apps....................................................................................38 Customizing Windows apps .....................................................................................38 Task view .......................................................................................................................41 Snap feature ................................................................................................................42 Snap hotspots ..................................................................................................................42 Action Center ..............................................................................................................44 Other keyboard shortcuts ......................................................................................45 Connecting to wireless networks ........................................................................47 Wi-Fi .....................................................................................................................................47 Bluetooth ...........................................................................................................................48 Airplane mode .................................................................................................................49 Turning your Notebook PC off ..............................................................................50 Putting your Notebook PC to sleep ....................................................................51 Chapter 4: Power-On Self-Test (POST) The Power-On Self-Test (POST) .............................................................................54 Using POST to access BIOS and Troubleshoot......................................................54 BIOS ................................................................................................................................54 Accessing BIOS ................................................................................................................54 BIOS Settings ....................................................................................................................55 Recovering your system ..........................................................................................65 Performing a recovery option ....................................................................................66 4 Notebook PC E-Manual Tips and FAQs Useful tips for your Notebook PC ........................................................................70 Hardware FAQs ...........................................................................................................71 Software FAQs .............................................................................................................74 Appendices DVD-ROM Drive Information ......................................................................................78 Blu-ray ROM Drive Information .................................................................................80 Internal Modem Compliancy .....................................................................................80 Overview ............................................................................................................................81 Network Compatibility Declaration .........................................................................81 Non-Voice Equipment ...................................................................................................81 Declaration of Conformity (R&TTE directive 1999/5/EC) ..................................83 Federal Communications Commission Interference Statement ...................84 FCC Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure Caution Statement .................................85 RF Exposure Information (SAR) ..................................................................................85 CE Marking ........................................................................................................................86 IC Radiation Exposure Statement for Canada ......................................................87 Dclaration dIndustrie Canada relative lexposition aux ondes radio ....88 Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure Information ........................................................89 Informations concernant lexposition aux tilizeive radio (RF) ........................89 Wireless Operation Channel for Different Domains ...........................................90 France Restricted Wireless Frequency Bands .......................................................90 UL Safety Notices ............................................................................................................92 Power Safety Requirement ..........................................................................................93 TV Notices .........................................................................................................................93 5 Notebook PC E-Manual REACH .................................................................................................................................93 Macrovision Corporation Product Notice ..............................................................93 Prevention of Hearing Loss .........................................................................................93 Nordic Lithium Cautions (for lithium-ion batteries) ...........................................94 Optical Drive Safety Information ..............................................................................95 CTR 21 Approval (for Notebook PC with built-in Modem) ..............................96 ENERGY STAR complied product ..............................................................................98 Global Environmental Regulation Compliance and Declaration ..................98 ASUS Recycling/Takeback Services ..........................................................................99 Rechargeable Battery Recycling Service in North America.............................99 Regional notice for California .....................................................................................99 Regional notice for Singapore ...................................................................................99 Regional notice for India ..............................................................................................100 Notices for removable batteries ................................................................................100 Avis concernant les batteries remplaables..........................................................100 6 Notebook PC E-Manual About this manual This manual provides information about the hardware and software features of your Notebook PC, organized through the following chapters:

Chapter 1: Hardware Setup This chapter details the hardware components of your Notebook PC. Chapter 2: Using your Notebook PC This chapter shows you how to use the different parts of your Notebook PC. Chapter 3: Working with Windows 10 This chapter provides an overview of using Windows 10 in your Notebook PC. Chapter 4: Power-On Self-Test (POST) This chapter shows you how to use POST to change the settings of your Notebook PC. Tips and FAQs This section presents some recommended tips, hardware FAQs, and software FAQs you can refer to for maintaining and fixing common issues with your Notebook PC. Appendices This section includes notices and safety statements for your Notebook PC. 7 Notebook PC E-Manual Conventions used in this manual To highlight key information in this manual, some text are presented as follows:

IMPORTANT! This message contains vital information that must be followed to complete a task. NOTE: This message contains additional information and tips that can help complete tasks. WARNING! This message contains important information that must be followed to keep you safe while performing tasks and prevent damage to your Notebook PC's data and components. Icons The icons below indicate the devices you can use for completing a series of tasks or procedures on your Notebook PC.

= Use the touchpad.

= Use the keyboard. Typography Bold

= This indicates a menu or an item that must be selected. Italic

= This indicates sections that you can refer to in this manual. 8 Notebook PC E-Manual Safety precautions Using your Notebook PC This Notebook PC should only be used in environments with ambient temperatures between 5C (41F) and 35C (95F). Refer to the rating label on the bottom of your Notebook PC and ensure that your power adapter complies with this rating. Do not leave your Notebook PC on your lap or near any part of your body to prevent discomfort or injury from heat exposure. Do not use damaged power cords, accessories, and other peripherals with your Notebook PC. While powered on, ensure that you do not carry or cover your Notebook PC with any materials that can reduce air circulation. Do not place your Notebook PC on uneven or unstable work surfaces. You can send your Notebook PC through x-ray machines (used on items placed on conveyor belts), but do not expose them to magnetic detectors and wands. Contact your airline provider to learn about related in-flight services that can be used and restrictions that must be followed when using your Notebook PC in-flight. 9 Notebook PC E-Manual Caring for your Notebook PC Disconnect the AC power and remove the battery pack (if applicable) before cleaning your Notebook PC. Use a clean cellulose sponge or chamois cloth dampened with a solution of nonabrasive detergent and a few drops of warm water. Remove any extra moisture from your Notebook PC using a dry cloth. Do not use strong solvents such as thinners, benzene, or other chemicals on or near your Notebook PC. Do not place objects on top of your Notebook PC. Do not expose your Notebook PC to strong magnetic or electrical fields. Do not use or expose your Notebook PC near liquids, rain, or moisture. Do not expose your Notebook PC to dusty environments. Do not use your Notebook PC near gas leaks. 10 Notebook PC E-Manual Proper disposal Do not throw your Notebook PC in municipal waste. This product has been designed to enable proper reuse of parts and recycling. The symbol of the crossed out wheeled bin indicates that the product

(electrical, electronic equipment and mercury-

containing button cell battery) should not be placed in municipal waste. Check local regulations for disposal of electronic products. Do not throw the battery in municipal waste. The symbol of the crossed out wheeled bin indicates that the battery should not be placed in municipal waste. 11 Notebook PC E-Manual 12 Notebook PC E-Manual Chapter 1:

Hardware Setup 13 Notebook PC E-Manual Getting to know your Notebook PC Top View NOTE: The keyboard's layout may vary per region or country. The Notebook view may also vary in appearance depending on the Notebook PC model. 14 Notebook PC E-Manual Camera The built-in camera allows you to take pictures or record videos using your Notebook PC. Camera indicator The camera indicator lights up when the built-in camera is in use. Display panel This high-definition display panel provides excellent viewing features for photos, videos, and other multimedia files on your Notebook PC. Airplane mode indicator This indicator lights up when the Airplane mode in your Notebook PC is enabled. NOTE: When enabled, the Airplane mode disables all wireless connectivity. 15 Notebook PC E-Manual Keyboard The keyboard provides full-sized QWERTY keys with a comfortable travel depth for typing. It also enables you to use the function keys, allows quick access to Windows, and controls other multimedia functions. NOTE: The keyboard layout differs by model or territory. Capital lock indicator This indicator lights up when the capital lock function is activated. Using capital lock allows you to type capitalized letters

(such as A, B, C) using your Notebook PCs keyboard. Touchpad The touchpad allows the use of multi-gestures to navigate onscreen, providing an intuitive user experience. It also simulates the functions of a regular mouse. NOTE: For more details, refer to the Using the touchpad section in this manual. 16 Notebook PC E-Manual Bottom NOTE: The bottom side may vary in appearance depending on model. WARNING! The bottom of the Notebook PC can get warm to hot while in use or while charging the battery pack. When working on your Notebook PC, do not place it on surfaces that can block the vents. IMPORTANT! Battery time varies by usage and by the specifications for this Notebook PC. The battery pack cannot be disassembled. Audio speakers The built-in audio speakers allow you to hear audio straight from your Notebook PC. Audio features are software-controlled. 17 Notebook PC E-Manual Right Side Headphone/Headset/Microphone jack This port allows you to connect amplified speakers or headphones. You can also use this port to connect your headset or an external microphone. Micro HDMI port This port is for the micro HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) connector and is HDCP compliant for HD DVD, Blu-ray, and other protected content playback. USB Type-C port The USB (Universal Serial Bus) Type-C port provides a transfer rate of up to 5 Gbit/s and is backward compatible to USB 2.0. NOTE: Transfer rate of this port may vary per model. 18 Notebook PC E-Manual USB 3.0 port with USB Charger+

The USB 3.0 (Universal Serial Bus 3.0) port provides a transfer rate of up to 5 Gbit/s and is backward compatible to USB 2.0. The icon indicates this ports USB Charger+ feature which allows you to quick-charge mobile devices. Power (DC) input port Insert the bundled power adapter into this port to charge the battery pack and supply power to your Notebook PC. WARNING! The adapter may become warm to hot while in use. Do not cover the adapter and keep it away from your body while it is connected to a power source. IMPORTANT! Use only the bundled power adapter to charge the battery pack and supply power to your Notebook PC. 19 Notebook PC E-Manual Left Side USB 3.0 port The USB 3.0 (Universal Serial Bus 3.0) port provides a transfer rate of up to 5 Gbit/s and is backward compatible to USB 2.0. Memory card reader This built-in memory card reader supports SD and SDXC card formats. Status indicators The status indicators help identify the current hardware status of your Notebook PC. Two-color battery charge indicator The two-color LED provides a visual indication of the batterys charge status. Refer to the following table for details:

20 Notebook PC E-Manual Color Solid Green Solid Orange Blinking Orange Lights off Power indicator Status The Notebook PC is plugged to a power source and the battery power is between 95% and 100%. The Notebook PC is plugged to a power source, charging its battery, and the battery power is less than 95%. The Notebook PC is running on battery mode and the battery power is less than 10%. The Notebook PC is running on battery mode and the battery power is between 10% to 100%. The power indicator lights up when the Notebook PC is turned on and blinks slowly when the Notebook PC is in sleep mode. Volume button This button turns the volume up or down on your Notebook PC. Power button Press the power button to turn your Notebook PC on or off. You can also use the power button to put your Notebook PC to sleep or hibernate mode and wake it up from sleep or hibernate mode. In the event that your Notebook PC becomes unresponsive, press and hold the power button for at least four (4) seconds until your Notebook PC shuts down. 21 Notebook PC E-Manual 22 Notebook PC E-Manual Chapter 2:

Using your Notebook PC 23 Notebook PC E-Manual Getting started Charge your Notebook PC A. B. Plug the AC power cord into a 100V~240V power source. Connect the DC power connector into your Notebook PCs power

(DC) input port. Charge the Notebook PC for 3 hours before using it in battery mode for the first time. NOTE: The power adapter may vary in appearance, depending on models and your region. IMPORTANT!

Power adapter information:

Input voltage: 100-240Vac Input frequency: 50-60Hz Rating output current: 2.37A max. (45W) Rating output voltage: 19V 24 Notebook PC E-Manual IMPORTANT!

Locate the input/output rating label on your Notebook PC and ensure that it matches the input/output rating information on your power adapter. Some Notebook PC models may have multiple rating output currents based on the available SKU. Ensure that your Notebook PC is connected to the power adapter before turning it on for the first time. We strongly recommend that you use a grounded wall socket while using your Notebook PC on power adapter mode. The socket outlet must be easily accessible and near your Notebook PC. To disconnect your Notebook PC from its main power supply, unplug your Notebook PC from the power socket. WARNING!

Read the following precautions for your Notebook PCs battery:

Only ASUS-authorized technicians should remove the battery inside the device (for non-removable battery only). The battery used in this device may present a risk of fire or chemical burn if removed or disassembled. Follow the warning labels for your personal safety. Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Do not dispose of in fire. Never attempt to short-circuit your Notebook PCs battery. Never attempt to disassemble and reassemble the battery

(for non-removable battery only). Discontinue usage if leakage is found. The battery and its components must be recycled or disposed of properly. Keep the battery and other small components away from children. 25 Notebook PC E-Manual Lift to open the display panel Press the power button 26 Notebook PC E-Manual Using the touchpad Moving the pointer You can tap anywhere on the touchpad to activate its pointer, then slide your finger on the touchpad to move the pointer onscreen. Slide horizontally Slide vertically Slide diagonally 27 Notebook PC E-Manual One-finger gestures Tap/Double-tap Tap an app to select it. Double-tap an app to launch it. Drag and drop Double-tap an item, then slide the same finger without lifting it off the touchpad. To drop the item to its new location, lift your finger from the touchpad. 28 Notebook PC E-Manual Left-click Right-click Click an app to select it. Double-click an app to launch it. Click this button to open the right-

click menu. NOTE: The areas inside the dotted line represent the locations of the left mouse button and the right mouse button on the touchpad. Two-finger gestures Two-finger scroll (up/down) Two-finger scroll (left/right) Slide two fingers to scroll up or down. Slide two fingers to scroll left or right. 29 Notebook PC E-Manual Zoom out Zoom in Bring together your two fingers on the touchpad. Spread apart your two fingers on the touchpad. Drag and drop Select an item then press and hold the left button. Using your other finger, slide on the touchpad to drag the item, lift your finger off the button to drop the item. 30 Notebook PC E-Manual Using the keyboard Function keys The function keys on your Notebook PCs keyboard can trigger the following commands:

Puts the Notebook PC into Sleep mode Turns Airplane mode on or off NOTE: When enabled, the Airplane mode disables all wireless connectivity. Decreases display brightness Increases display brightness Turns the display panel on or off Toggles the display mode NOTE: Ensure that the second display is connected to your Notebook PC. 31 Notebook PC E-Manual Enables or disables the touchpad Turns the speaker on or off Turns the speaker volume down Turns the speaker volume up Windows 10 keys There are two special Windows keys on your Notebook PCs keyboard used as below:

Launches the Start menu Displays the drop-down menu 32 Notebook PC E-Manual Chapter 3:

Working with Windows 10 33 Notebook PC E-Manual Starting for the first time When you start your Notebook PC for the first time, a series of screens appear to guide you in configuring your Windows 10 operating system. To start your Notebook PC for the first time:

1. 2. 3. 4. Press the power button on your Notebook PC. Wait for a few minutes until the setup screen appears. From the setup screen, pick your region and a language to use on your Notebook PC. Carefully read the License Terms. Select I accept. Follow the onscreen instructions to configure the following basic items:

Personalize Get online Settings Your account 5. After configuring the basic items, Windows 10 proceeds to install your apps and preferred settings. Ensure that your Notebook PC is kept powered on during the setup process. 6. Once the setup process is complete, the Desktop appears. NOTE: The screenshots in this chapter are for reference only. 34 Notebook PC E-Manual Start menu The Start menu is the main gateway to your Notebook PCs programs, Windows apps, folders, and settings. Change account settings, lock, or sign out from your account Launch an app from the Start screen Launch Taskview Launch an app from the taskbar Launch Search Launch the Start menu Launch All apps Shut down, restart, or put your Notebook PC to sleep Launch Settings Launch File Explorer You can use the Start menu to do these common activities:

Start programs or Windows apps Open commonly used programs or Windows apps Adjust Notebook PC settings Get help with the Windows operating system Turn off your Notebook PC Log off from Windows or switch to a different user account 35 Notebook PC E-Manual Launching the Start menu Position your mouse pointer over the Start button in the lower-left corner of your desktop then click it. Press the Windows logo key on your keyboard. Opening programs from the Start menu One of the most common uses of the Start menu is opening programs installed on your Notebook PC. Position your mouse pointer over the program then click to launch it. Use the arrow keys to browse through the programs. Press to launch it. NOTE: Select All apps at the bottom of the left pane to display a full list of programs and folders on your Notebook PC in alphabetical order. 36 Notebook PC E-Manual Windows apps These are apps pinned on the right pane of the Start menu and displayed in tiled-format for easy access. NOTE: Some Windows apps require signing in to your Microsoft account before they are fully launched. 37 Notebook PC E-Manual Working with Windows apps Use your Notebook PCs touchpad or keyboard to launch, customize, and close apps. Launching Windows apps from the Start menu Position your mouse pointer over the app then click to launch it. Use the arrow keys to browse through the apps. Press to launch an app. Customizing Windows apps You can move, resize, unpin, or pin apps to the taskbar from the Start menu using the following steps:

Moving apps Position your mouse pointer over the app, then drag and drop the app to a new location. 38 Notebook PC E-Manual Resizing apps Position your mouse pointer over the app and right-click it, then click Resize and select an app tile size. Use the arrow keys to navigate to the app. Press then select Resize and select an app tile size.

, Unpinning apps Position your mouse pointer over the app and right-click it, then click Unpin from Start. Use the arrow keys to navigate to the app. Press then select Unpin from Start.

, 39 Notebook PC E-Manual Pinning apps to the taskbar Position your mouse pointer over the app and right-click it, then click Pin to taskbar. Use the arrow keys to navigate to the app. Press then select Pin to taskbar.

, Pinning more apps to the Start menu From All apps, position your mouse pointer over the app you want to add to the Start menu and right-click it, then click Pin to Start. From All apps, press add to the Start menu, then select Pin to Start. on the app that you want to 40 Notebook PC E-Manual Task view Quickly switch between opened apps and programs using the task view feature, you can also use task view to switch between desktops. Launching task view Position your mouse pointer over the taskbar and click it. icon on the Press on your keyboard. 41 Notebook PC E-Manual Snap feature The Snap feature displays apps side-by-side, allowing you to work or switch between apps. Snap hotspots You can drag and drop apps to these hotspots to snap them into place. 42 Notebook PC E-Manual Using Snap 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3. Launch the app you wish to snap. Drag the title bar of your app and drop the app to the edge of the screen to snap. Launch another app and repeat the above steps to snap another app. Launch the app you wish to snap. Press and hold the keys to snap the app. key, then use the arrow Launch another app and repeat the above steps to snap another app. 43 Notebook PC E-Manual Action Center Action Center consolidates notifications from apps and presents a single place where you can interact with them. It also has a really useful Quick Actions section at the bottom. Launching Action Center Position your mouse pointer over the taskbar and click it. icon on the Press on your keyboard. 44 Notebook PC E-Manual Other keyboard shortcuts Using the keyboard, you can also use the following shortcuts to help you launch applications and navigate Windows 10.

\

Launches Start menu Launches Action Center Launches the desktop Launches the File Explorer Opens the Share panel Launches Settings Launches Connect panel Activates the Lock screen Minimizes all currently active windows 45 Notebook PC E-Manual Launches Search Launches Project panel Opens the Run window Opens Ease of Access Center Opens the context menu of the Start button Launches the magnifier icon and zooms in your screen Zooms out your screen Opens Narrator Settings 46 Notebook PC E-Manual Connecting to wireless networks Wi-Fi Access emails, surf the Internet, and share applications via social networking sites using your Notebook PCs Wi-Fi connection. IMPORTANT! Airplane mode disables this feature. Ensure that Airplane mode is turned off before enabling the Wi-Fi connection of your Notebook PC. Connecting Wi-Fi Connect your Notebook PC to a Wi-Fi network by using the following steps:

1. 2. 3. 4. Select the icon from the taskbar. Select the icon to enable Wi-Fi. Select an access point from the list of available Wi-Fi connections. Select Connect to start the network connection. NOTE: You may be prompted to enter a security key to activate the Wi-Fi connection. 47 Notebook PC E-Manual Bluetooth Use Bluetooth to facilitate wireless data transfers with other Bluetooth-

enabled devices. IMPORTANT! Airplane mode disables this feature. Ensure that Airplane mode is turned off before enabling the Bluetooth connection of your Notebook PC. Pairing with other Bluetooth-enabled devices You need to pair your Notebook PC with other Bluetooth-enabled devices to enable data transfers. Connect your devices by using the following steps:

1. 2. 3. Launch Settings from the Start menu. Select Devices, then select Bluetooth to search for Bluetooth-enabled devices. Select a device from the list. Compare the passcode on your Notebook PC with the passcode sent to your chosen device. If they are the same, select Yes to successfully pair your Notebook PC with the device. NOTE: For some Bluetooth-enabled devices, you may be prompted to key in the passcode of your Notebook PC. 48 Notebook PC E-Manual Airplane mode Airplane mode disables wireless communication, allowing you to use your Notebook PC safely while in-flight. NOTE: Contact your airline provider to learn about related in-flight services that can be used and restrictions that must be followed when using your Notebook PC in-flight. Turning Airplane mode on 1. 2. Launch Action Center from the taskbar. Select the icon to enable Airplane mode. Press

. Turning Airplane mode off 1. 2. Launch Action Center from the taskbar. Select the icon to disable Airplane mode. Press

. 49 Notebook PC E-Manual Turning your Notebook PC off You can turn off your Notebook PC by doing either of the following procedures:

Launch the Start menu, then select Shut down to do a normal shutdown.

>

From the log-in screen, select

> Shut down. to launch Shut down Press Windows. Select Shut down from the drop-down list then select OK. If your Notebook PC is unresponsive, press and hold the power button for at least four (4) seconds until your Notebook PC turns off. 50 Notebook PC E-Manual Putting your Notebook PC to sleep To put your Notebook PC to Sleep mode:

Launch the Start menu, then select Sleep to put your Notebook PC to sleep.

>

From the log-in screen, select

> Sleep. Press Select Sleep from the drop-down list then select OK. to launch Shut down Windows. NOTE: You can also put your Notebook PC to Sleep mode by pressing the power button once. 51 Notebook PC E-Manual 52 Notebook PC E-Manual Chapter 4:

Power-On Self-Test (POST) 53 Notebook PC E-Manual The Power-On Self-Test (POST) The POST (Power-On Self-Test) is a series of software-controlled diagnostic tests that run when you turn on or restart your Notebook PC. The software that controls the POST is installed as a permanent part of the Notebook PCs architecture. Using POST to access BIOS and Troubleshoot During POST, you can access the BIOS settings or run troubleshooting options using the function keys of your Notebook PC. You may refer to the following information for more details. BIOS The BIOS (Basic Input and Output System) stores system hardware settings that are needed for system startup in the Notebook PC. The default BIOS settings apply to most conditions of your Notebook PC. Do not change the default BIOS settings except in the following circumstances:

An error message appears onscreen during system bootup and requests you to run the BIOS Setup. You have installed a new system component that requires further BIOS settings or updates. WARNING! Using inappropriate BIOS settings may result to system instability or boot failure. We strongly recommend that you change the BIOS settings only with the help of a trained service personnel. Accessing BIOS Restart your Notebook PC then press during POST. 54 Notebook PC E-Manual BIOS Settings NOTE: The BIOS screens in this section are for reference only. The actual screens may differ by model and territory. Boot This menu allows you to set your boot option priorities. You may refer to the following procedures when setting your boot priority. 1. On the Boot screen, select Boot Option #1. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Boot Security Save & Exit Boot Configuration Fast Boot [Enabled]

Launch CSM [Disabled]

Driver Option Priorities Boot Option Priorities Boot Option #1 [Windows Boot Manager]

Add New Boot Option Delete Boot Option Sets the system boot order

: Select Screen

: Select Item Enter: Select

+/ : Change Opt. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC : Exit Version 2.15.1226. Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. 55 Notebook PC E-Manual 2. Press and select a device as the Boot Option #1. Main Advanced Boot Security Save & Exit Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Sets the system boot order Boot Configuration Fast Boot [Enabled]

Launch CSM [Disabled]

Driver Option Priorities Boot Option #1 Boot Option Priorities Windows Boot Manager Boot Option #1 [Windows Boot Manager]

Disabled Add New Boot Option Delete Boot Option

: Select Screen

: Select Item Enter: Select

+/ : Change Opt. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC : Exit Version 2.15.1226. Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. 56 Notebook PC E-Manual Security This menu allows you to set up the administrator and user password of your Notebook PC. It also allows you to control the access to your Notebook PCs hard disk drive, input/output (I/O) interface, and USB interface. NOTE:

If you install a User Password, you will be prompted to input this before entering your Notebook PC's operating system. If you install an Administrator Password, you will be prompted to input this before entering BIOS. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Boot Security Save & Exit Password Description If ONLY the Administrators password is set, then this only limits access to Setup and is only asked for when entering Setup. If ONLY the users password is set, then this is a power on password and must be entered to boot or enter Setup. In Setup, the User will have Administrator rights. Administrator Password Status NOT INSTALLED User Password Status NOT INSTALLED Administrator Password User Password HDD Password Status : NOT INSTALLED Set Master Password Set User Password I/O Interface Security System Mode state User Secure Boot state Enabled Secure Boot Control [Enabled]

Key Management Set Administrator Password. The password length must be in the following range:

Minimum length 3 Maximum length 20

: Select Screen

: Select Item Enter: Select

+/ : Change Opt. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC : Exit Version 2.15.1226. Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. 57 Notebook PC E-Manual To set the password:

1. 2. 3. On the Security screen, select Administrator Password or User Password. Type in a password then press

. Re-type to confirm the password then press

. To clear the password:

On the Security screen, select Administrator Password or User Password. Type in the current password then press

. Leave the Create New Password field blank then press

. Select Yes in the confirmation box then press

. 1. 2. 3. 4. 58 Notebook PC E-Manual I/O Interface Security In the Security menu, you can access I/O Interface Security to lock or unlock some interface functions of your Notebook PC. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Security I/O Interface Security LAN Network Interface [UnLock]

Wireless Network Interface [UnLock]

HD AUDIO Interface [UnLock]

USB Interface Security LAN Network Interface Lock UnLock If Locked, LAN controller will be disabled.

: Select Screen

: Select Item Enter: Select

+/ : Change Opt. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC : Exit Version 2.15.1226. Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. To lock an interface:

1. On the Security screen, select I/O Interface Security. 2. Select an interface you would like to lock then press

. 3. Select Lock. 59 Notebook PC E-Manual USB Interface Security Through the I/O Interface Security menu, you can also access USB Interface Security to lock or unlock ports and devices. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Security USB Interface Security USB Interface [UnLock]

External Ports [UnLock]

CMOS Camera [UnLock]

Card Reader [UnLock]

USB Interface Lock UnLock If Locked, all USB device will be disabled

: Select Screen

: Select Item Enter: Select

+/ : Change Opt. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC : Exit Version 2.15.1226. Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. To lock the USB interface:

1. On the Security screen, select I/O Interface Security > USB Interface Security. 2. Select an interface that you would like to lock then select Lock. NOTE: Setting the USB Interface to Lock also locks and hides the External Ports and other devices included under USB Interface Security. 60 Notebook PC E-Manual Set Master Password In the Security menu, you can use Set Master Password to set up a password-enabled access to your hard disk drive. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Boot Security Save & Exit Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2011 American Megatrends, Inc. Password Description Set HDD Master Password. If ONLY the Administrators password is set,then this only limits access to Setup

***Advisable to and is only asked for when entering Setup. Power Cycle System If ONLY the users password is set, then after Setting Hard this is a power on password and must be Disk Passwords***

entered to boot or enter Setup. In Setup, the User will have Administrator rights. Administrator Password Status NOT INSTALLED User Password Status NOT INSTALLED Administrator Password User Password HDD Password Status : NOT INSTALLED Set Master Password Set User Password I/O Interface Security

: Select Screen

: Select Item Enter: Select

+/ : Change Opt. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC : Exit Version 2.15.1226. Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. To set the HDD password:

1. On the Security screen, select Set Master Password. 2. Type in a password then press

. 3. 4. Re-type to confirm the password then press

. Select Set User Password then repeat the previous steps to set up the user password. 61 Notebook PC E-Manual Save & Exit To keep your configuration settings, select Save Changes and Exit before exiting the BIOS. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Boot Security Save & Exit Save Changes and Exit Discard Changes and Exit Save Options Save Changes Discard Changes Restore Defaults Boot Override Windows Boot Manager Launch EFI Shell from filesystem device Exit system setup after saving the changes.

: Select Screen

: Select Item Enter: Select

+/ : Change Opt. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC : Exit Version 2.15.1226. Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. 62 Notebook PC E-Manual To update the BIOS:

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Verify the Notebook PCs exact model then download the latest BIOS file for your model from the ASUS website. Save a copy of the downloaded BIOS file to a flash disk drive. Connect your flash disk drive to your Notebook PC. Restart your Notebook PC then press during POST. From the BIOS menu, select Advanced > Start Easy Flash, then press

. Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. Main Advanced Boot Security Save & Exit Aptio Setup Utility - Copyright (C) 2011 American Megatrends, Inc. Start Easy Flash Internal Pointing Device [Enabled]

Wake on Lid Open [Enabled]

Power Off Energy Saving [Enabled]

SATA Configuration Graphics Configuration Intel (R) Anti-Theft Technology Corporation USB Configuration Network Stack Press Enter to run the utility to select and update BIOS.

: Select Screen

: Select Item Enter: Select

+/ : Change Opt. F1 : General Help F9 : Optimized Defaults F10 : Save & Exit ESC : Exit Version 2.15.1226. Copyright (C) 2015 American Megatrends, Inc. 63 Notebook PC E-Manual 6. Locate your downloaded BIOS file in the flash disk drive then press

. ASUSTek Easy Flash Utility FLASH TYPE: Generic Flash Type New BIOS Platform: Unknown Version: Unknown Build Date: Unknown Build Time: Unknown Current BIOS Platform: UX360 Version: 101 Build Date: Oct 26 2015 Build Time: 11:51:05 FSO FS1 FS2 FS3 FS4 0 EFI

<DIR>

[]: Switch []: Choose [q]: Exit [Enter]: Enter/Execute 7. After the BIOS update process, select Exit > Restore Defaults to restore the system to its default settings. 64 Notebook PC E-Manual Recovering your system Using recovery options on your Notebook PC allows you to restore the system to its original state or simply refresh its settings to help improve performance. IMPORTANT!

Backup all your data files before doing any recovery option on your Notebook PC. Note down important customized settings such as network settings, user names, and passwords to avoid data loss. Ensure that your Notebook PC is plugged in to a power source before resetting your system. Windows 10 allows you to do any of the following recovery options:

Keep my files - This option allows you refresh your Notebook PC without affecting personal files (photos, music, videos, documents). Using this option, you can restore your Notebook PC to its default settings and delete other installed apps. Remove everything - This option resets your Notebook PC to its factory settings. You must backup your data before doing this option. 65 Notebook PC E-Manual Go back to an earlier build - This option allows you to go back to an earlier build. Use this option if this build is not working for you. Advanced startup - Using this option allows you to perform other advanced recovery options on your Notebook PC such as:

-

-

Using a USB drive, network connection or Windows recovery DVD to startup your Notebook PC. Using Troubleshoot to enable any of these advanced recovery options: System Restore, System Image Recovery, Startup Repair, Command Prompt, UEFI Firmware Settings, and Startup Settings. Performing a recovery option Refer to the following steps if you want to access and use any of the available recovery options for your Notebook PC. 1. Launch Settings and select Update and security. 66 Notebook PC E-Manual 2. Under the Update and security option, select Recovery then select the recovery option you would like to perform. 67 Notebook PC E-Manual 68 Notebook PC E-Manual Tips and FAQs 69 Notebook PC E-Manual Useful tips for your Notebook PC To help you maximize the use of your Notebook PC, maintain its system performance, and ensure all your data are kept secured, here are some useful tips that you can follow:

Update Windows periodically to ensure that your applications have the latest security settings. Use an anti-virus software to protect your data and keep this updated too. Unless absolutely necessary, refrain from using force shutdown to turn off your Notebook PC. Always backup your data and make it a point to create a backup data in an external storage drive. Refrain from using the Notebook PC at extremely high temperatures. If you are not going to use your Notebook PC for a long period of time (at least a month), we recommend that you take out the battery if the battery is removable. Disconnect all external devices and ensure you have the following items prior to resetting your Notebook PC:

-

-

-

-

Product key for your operating systems and other installed applications Backup data Log in ID and password Internet connection information 70 Notebook PC E-Manual Hardware FAQs 1. A black dot, or sometimes a colored dot, appears onscreen when I turn on the Notebook PC. What should I do?

Although these dots normally appear onscreen, they will not affect your system. If the incident continues and subsequently affects system performance, consult an authorized ASUS service center. 2. My display panel has an uneven color and brightness. How can I fix this?

The color and brightness of your display panel may be affected by the angle and current position of your Notebook PC. The brightness and color tone of your Notebook PC may also vary per model. You may use the function keys or the display settings in your operating system to adjust the appearance of your display panel. 3. How can I maximize my Notebook PC s battery life?

You can try doing any of the following suggestions:

Use the function keys to adjust the display brightness. If you are not using any Wi-Fi connection, switch your system into Airplane mode. Disconnect unused USB devices. Close unused applications, especially those that take up too much system memory. 71 Notebook PC E-Manual 4. My battery charge indicator does not light up. Whats wrong?

Check whether the power adapter or battery pack is attached correctly. You may also disconnect the power adapter or battery pack, wait for a minute, then reconnect them again to the power outlet and Notebook PC. If the problem still exists, contact your local ASUS service center for assistance. 5. Why is my touchpad not working?

Press to enable your touchpad. 6. When I play audio and video files, why cant I hear any sound from my Notebook PCs audio speakers?

You can try doing any of the following suggestions:

Press to turn up the speaker volume. Check if your speakers were set to mute. Check if a headphone jack is connected to your Notebook PC and remove it. 7. What should I do if my Notebook PCs power adapter gets lost or my battery stops working?

Contact your local ASUS service center for assistance. 72 Notebook PC E-Manual 8. My Notebook PC cannot do keystrokes correctly because my cursor keeps on moving. What should I do?

Make sure that nothing accidentally touches or presses on your touchpad while you type on the keyboard. You can also disable your touchpad by pressing

. 9. Instead of showing letters, pressing the U, I, and O keys on my keyboard displays numbers. How can I change this?

Press the key or

(on selected models) on your Notebook PC to turn off this feature and use the said keys for inputting letters. 73 Notebook PC E-Manual Software FAQs 1. When I turn on my Notebook PC, the power indicator lights up but nothing appears on my screen. What can I do to fix this?

You can try doing any of the following suggestions:

Force shutdown your Notebook PC by pressing the power button for at least four (4) seconds. Check if the power adapter and battery pack are inserted correctly then turn on your Notebook PC. If the problem still exists, contact your local ASUS service center for assistance. 2. What should I do when my screen displays this message:

Remove disks or other media. Press any key to restart.?

You can try doing any of the following suggestions:

Remove all connected USB devices then restart your Notebook PC. Remove any optical discs that are left inside the optical drive then restart. If the problem still exists, your Notebook PC might have a memory storage problem. Contact your local ASUS service center for assistance. 3. My Notebook PC boots slower than usual and my operating system lags. How can I fix this?

Delete the applications you recently installed or were not included with your operating system package then restart your system. 74 Notebook PC E-Manual 4. My Notebook PC does not boot up. How can I fix this?

You can try doing any of the following suggestions:

Remove all connected devices to your Notebook PC then restart your system. If the problem still exists, contact your local ASUS service center for assistance. 5. Why cant my Notebook PC wake up from sleep mode?

You need to press the power button to resume your last working state. Your system might have completely used up its battery power. Connect the power adapter to your Notebook PC and connect to a power outlet then press the power button. 75 Notebook PC E-Manual 76 Notebook PC E-Manual Appendices 77 Notebook PC E-Manual DVD-ROM Drive Information The DVD-ROM drive allows you to view and create your own CDs and DVDs. You can purchase an optional DVD viewer software to view DVD titles. NOTE: The DVD-ROM Drive is available on selected models. Regional Playback Information Playback of DVD movie titles involves decoding MPEG2 video, digital AC3 audio and decryption of CSS protected content. CSS (sometimes called copy guard) is the name given to the content protection scheme adopted by the motion picture industry to satisfy a need to protect against unlawful content duplication. Although the design rules imposed on CSS licensors are many, one rule that is most relevant is playback restrictions on regionalized content. In order to facilitate geographically staggered movie releases, DVD video titles are released for specific geographic regions as defined in Region Definitions below. Copyright laws require that all DVD movies be limited to a particular region (usually coded to the region at which it is sold). While DVD movie content may be released for multiple regions, CSS design rules require that any system capable of playing CSS encrypted content must only be capable of playing one region. IMPORTANT! The region setting may be changed up to five times using the viewer software, then it can only play DVD movies for the last region setting. Changing the region code after that will require factory resetting which is not covered by warranty. If resetting is desired, shipping and resetting costs will be at the expense of the user. 78 Notebook PC E-Manual Region Definitions Region 1 Canada, US, US Territories Region 2 Czech, Egypt, Finland, France, Germany, Gulf States, Hungary, Iceland, Iran, Iraq, Ireland, Italy, Japan, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Saudi Arabia, Scotland, South Africa, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Syria, Turkey, UK, Greece, Former Yugoslav Republics, Slovakia Region 3 Burma, Indonesia, South Korea, Malaysia, Philippines, Singapore, Taiwan, Thailand, Vietnam Region 4 Australia, Caribbean (Except US Territories), Central America, New Zealand, Pacific Islands, South America Region 5 CIS, India, Pakistan, Rest of Africa, Russia, North Korea Region 6 China 79 Notebook PC E-Manual Blu-ray ROM Drive Information The Blu-ray ROM Drive allows you to view HD (High-Definition) videos and other disc file formats such as DVDs and CDs. NOTE: The Blue-ray ROM Drive is available on selected models. Region Definitions Region A North, Central and South American countries, and their territories; Taiwan, Hong Kong, Macao, Japan, Korea (South and North), South East Asian countries and their territories. Region B European, African, and South West Asian countries and their territories; Australia and New Zealand. Region C Central, South Asian, Eastern European countries and their territories; China and Mongolia. NOTE: Refer to Blu-ray Disc website at www.blu-raydisc.com/en/Technical/FAQs/Blu-

rayDiscforVideo.aspx for more details. Internal Modem Compliancy The Notebook PC with internal modem model complies with JATE (Japan), FCC

(US, Canada, Korea, Taiwan), and CTR21. The internal modem has been approved in accordance with Council Decision 98/482/EC for pan-European single terminal connection to the public switched telephone network (PSTN). However due to differences between the individual PSTNs provided in different countries, the approval does not, of itself, give an unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN network termination point. In the event of problems you should contact your equipment supplier in the first instance. 80 Notebook PC E-Manual Overview On 4th August 1998 the European Council Decision regarding the CTR 21 has been published in the Official Journal of the EC. The CTR 21 applies to all non voice terminal equipment with DTMF-dialling which is intended to be connected to the analogue PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network). CTR 21 (Common Technical Regulation) for the attachment requirements for connection to the analogue public switched telephone networks of terminal equipment (excluding terminal equipment supporting the voice telephony justified case service) in which network addressing, if provided, is by means of dual tone multi-frequency signalling. Network Compatibility Declaration Statement to be made by the manufacturer to the Notified Body and the vendor:

This declaration will indicate the networks with which the equipment is designed to work and any notified networks with which the equipment may have inter-

working difficulties. Statement to be made by the manufacturer to the user: This declaration will indicate the networks with which the equipment is designed to work and any notified networks with which the equipment may have inter-working difficulties. The manufacturer shall also associate a statement to make it clear where network compatibility is dependent on physical and software switch settings. It will also advise the user to contact the vendor if it is desired to use the equipment on another network. Up to now the Notified Body of CETECOM issued several pan-European approvals using CTR 21. The results are Europes first modems which do not require regulatory approvals in each individual European country. Non-Voice Equipment Answering machines and loud-speaking telephones can be eligible as well as modems, fax machines, auto-dialers and alarm systems. Equipment in which the end-to-end quality of speech is controlled by regulations (e.g. handset telephones and in some countries also cordless telephones) is excluded. 81 Notebook PC E-Manual This table shows the countries currently under the CTR21 standard. Applied Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Still Pending No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No Yes Yes Yes More Testing No No Not Applicable Yes No No No No Not Applicable No No Still Pending No No No Yes No Not Applicable Not Applicable Not Applicable No No No Country Austria1 Belgium Czech Republic Denmark1 Finland France Germany Greece Hungary Iceland Ireland Italy Israel Lichtenstein Luxemburg The Netherlands1 Norway Poland Portugal Spain Sweden Switzerland United Kingdom 82 Notebook PC E-Manual This information was copied from CETECOM and is supplied without liability. For updates to this table, you may visit http://www.cetecom.de/technologies/ctr_21. html. 1 National requirements will apply only if the equipment may use pulse dialling

(manufacturers may state in the user guide that the equipment is only intended to support DTMF signalling, which would make any additional testing superfluous). In The Netherlands additional testing is required for series connection and caller ID facilities. Declaration of Conformity (R&TTE directive 1999/5/EC) The following items were completed and are considered relevant and sufficient:

Essential requirements as in [Article 3]

Protection requirements for health and safety as in [Article 3.1a]

Testing for electric safety according to [EN 60950]

Protection requirements for electromagnetic compatibility in [Article 3.1b]

Testing for electromagnetic compatibility in [EN 301 489-1] &

[EN 301 489-17]

Effective use of the radio spectrum as in [Article 3.2]

Radio test suites according to [EN 300 328-2]

83 Notebook PC E-Manual Federal Communications Commission Interference Statement This device complies with FCC Rules Part 15. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission

(FCC) rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. WARNING! The use of a shielded-type power cord is required in order to meet FCC emission limits and to prevent interference to the nearby radio and television reception. It is essential that only the supplied power cord be used. Use only shielded cables to connect I/O devices to this equipment. You are cautioned that changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void your authority to operate the equipment.

(Reprinted from the Code of Federal Regulations #47, part 15.193, 1993. Washington DC: Office of the Federal Register, National Archives and Records Administration, U.S. Government Printing Office.) 84 Notebook PC E-Manual FCC Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure Caution Statement WARNING! Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate this equipment. The manufacture declares that this device is limited to Channels 1 through 11 in the 2.4GHz frequency by specified firmware controlled in the USA. This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. To maintain compliance with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, please avoid direct contact to the transmitting antenna during transmitting. End users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. RF Exposure Information (SAR) This device meets the governments requirements for exposure to radio waves. This device is designed and manufactured not to exceed the emission limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S. Government. The exposure standard employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6 W/kg. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions accepted by the FCC with the EUT transmitting at the specified power level in different channels. 85 Notebook PC E-Manual CE Marking CE marking for devices without wireless LAN/Bluetooth The shipped version of this device complies with the requirements of the EEC directives 2004/108/EC Electromagnetic compatibility and 2006/95/EC Low voltage directive. CE marking for devices with wireless LAN/Bluetooth This equipment complies with the requirements of Directive 1999/5/EC of the European Parliament and Commission from 9 March, 1999 governing Radio and Telecommunications Equipment and mutual recognition of conformity. 86 Notebook PC E-Manual IC Radiation Exposure Statement for Canada This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. To maintain compliance with IC RF exposure compliance requirements, please avoid direct contact to the transmitting antenna during transmitting. End users must follow the specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause interference and This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. To prevent radio interference to the licensed service (i.e. co-channel Mobile Satellite systems) this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing. This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B) 87 Notebook PC E-Manual Dclaration dIndustrie Canada relative lexposition aux ondes radio Cet appareil est conforme aux limites dexposition aux radiations dIndustrie Canada dfinies pour un environnement non-contrl. Pour maintenir la conformit avec les exigences dexposition RF dIC, veuillez viter tout contact direct avec lantenne pendant lmission. Les utilisateurs finaux doivent suivre les instructions de fonctionnement spcifiques pour satisfaire la conformit aux expositions RF. Son utilisation est sujette aux deux conditions suivantes:

Cet appareil ne peut pas causer dinterfrence, et Cet appareil doit accepter toute interfrence, y compris les interfrences qui pourraient causer un fonctionnement non souhait de lappareil. Pour viter les interfrences radio avec le service sous licence (cest -dire le partage de canal avec les systmes de tlphonie satellite), cet appareil est destin tre utilis en intrieur et loin des fentres pour fournir un blindage maximal. Tout appareil (ou son antenne dmission) qui est install en extrieur est sujet cette licence. Le present appareil est conforme aux CNR dIndustrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B) 88 Notebook PC E-Manual Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure Information The radiated output power of the Wireless Device is below the Industry Canada

(IC) radio frequency exposure limits. The Wireless Device should be used in such a manner such that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. This device has been evaluated for and shown compliant with the IC Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) limits when operated in portable exposure conditions. Informations concernant lexposition aux tilizeive radio (RF) La puissance de sortie mise par lappareil de sans tilize infrieure la limite dexposition aux tilizeive radio dIndustry Canada (IC). Utilisez lappareil de sans fil de faon tilizei les contacts humains lors du fonctionnement normal. Ce tilizeive a t valu pour et dmontr conforme la Taux IC dabsorption spcifique (SAR) des limites lorsquil est tilize dans des conditions dexposition portatifs. 89 Notebook PC E-Manual Wireless Operation Channel for Different Domains N. America 2.412-2.462 GHz Japan 2.412-2.484 GHz Europe ETSI 2.412-2.472 GHz Ch01 through CH11 Ch01 through Ch14 Ch01 through Ch13 France Restricted Wireless Frequency Bands Some areas of France have a restricted frequency band. The worst case maximum authorized power indoors are:

10mW for the entire 2.4 GHz band (2400 MHz2483.5 MHz) 100mW for frequencies between 2446.5 MHz and 2483.5 MHz NOTE: Channels 10 through 13 inclusive operate in the band 2446.6 MHz to 2483.5 MHz. There are few possibilities for outdoor use: on private property or on the private property of public persons, use is subject to a preliminary authorization procedure by the Ministry of Defense, with maximum authorized power of 100mW in the 2446.52483.5 MHz band. Use outdoors on public property is not permitted. In the departments listed below, for the entire 2.4 GHz band:

Maximum authorized power indoors is 100mW Maximum authorized power outdoors is 10mW 90 Notebook PC E-Manual Departments in which the use of the 24002483.5 MHz band is permitted with an EIRP of less than 100mW indoors and less than 10mW outdoors:

01 Ain 02 Aisne 05 Hautes Alpes 08 Ardennes 11 Aude 24 Dordogne 32 Gers 41 Loir et Cher 55 Meuse 60 Oise 12 Aveyron 25 Doubs 36 Indre 45 Loiret 58 Nivre 61 Orne 03 Allier 09 Arige 16 Charente 26 Drme 37 Indre et Loire 50 Manche 59 Nord 63 Puy du Dme 64 Pyrnes Atlantique 66 Pyrnes Orientales 67 Bas Rhin 68 Haut Rhin 70 Haute Sane 71 Sane et Loire 75 Paris 88 Vosges 94 Val de Marne 82 Tarn et Garonne 84 Vaucluse 89 Yonne 90 Territoire de Belfort This requirement is likely to change over time, allowing you to use your wireless LAN card in more areas within France. Please check with ART for the latest information (www.arcep.fr). NOTE: Your WLAN Card transmits less than 100mW, but more than 10mW. 91 Notebook PC E-Manual UL Safety Notices Required for UL 1459 covering telecommunications (telephone) equipment intended to be electrically connected to a telecommunication network that has an operating voltage to ground that does not exceed 200V peak, 300V peak-to-peak, and 105V rms, and installed or used in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70). When using the Notebook PC modem, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons, including the following:

DO NOT use the Notebook PC near water, for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool. DO NOT use the Notebook PC during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. DO NOT use the Notebook PC in the vicinity of a gas leak. Required for UL 1642 covering primary (non-rechargeable) and secondary

(rechargeable) lithium batteries for use as power sources in products. These batteries contain metallic lithium, or a lithium alloy, or a lithium ion, and may consist of a single electrochemical cell or two or more cells connected in series, parallel, or both, that convert chemical energy into electrical energy by an irreversible or reversible chemical reaction. DO NOT dispose the Notebook PC battery pack in a fire, as they may explode. Check with local codes for possible special disposal instructions to reduce the risk of injury to persons due to fire or explosion. DO NOT use power adapters or batteries from other devices to reduce the risk of injury to persons due to fire or explosion. Use only UL certified power adapters or batteries supplied by the manufacturer or authorized retailers. 92 Notebook PC E-Manual Power Safety Requirement Products with electrical current ratings up to 6A and weighing more than 3Kg must use approved power cords greater than or equal to: H05VV-F, 3G, 0.75mm2 or H05VV-F, 2G, 0.75mm2. TV Notices Note to CATV System InstallerCable distribution system should be grounded

(earthed) in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 70, the National Electrical Code (NEC), in particular Section 820.93, Grounding of Outer Conductive Shield of a Coaxial Cable installation should include bonding the screen of the coaxial cable to the earth at the building entrance. REACH Complying with the REACH (Registration, Evaluation, Authorization, and Restriction of Chemicals) regulatory framework, we publish the chemical substances in our products at ASUS REACH website at http://csr.asus.com/english/

REACH.htm. Macrovision Corporation Product Notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S.A. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Prevention of Hearing Loss To prevent possible hearing damage, do not listen at high volume levels for long periods. 93 Notebook PC E-Manual Nordic Lithium Cautions (for lithium-ion batteries) CAUTION! Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturers instructions. (English) ATTENZIONE! Rischio di esplosione della batteria se sostituita in modo errato. Sostituire la batteria con un una di tipo uguale o equivalente consigliata dalla fabbrica. Non disperdere le batterie nellambiente. (Italian) VORSICHT! Explosionsgefahr bei unsachgemen Austausch der Batterie. Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einem vom Hersteller empfohlenem hnlichen Typ. Entsorgung gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers. (German) ADVARSELI! Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig hndtering. Udskiftning m kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levr det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandren. (Danish) VARNING! Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Anvnd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera anvnt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion. (Swedish) VAROITUS! Paristo voi rjht, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan sousittelemaan tyyppiin. Hvit kytetty paristo valmistagan ohjeiden mukaisesti. (Finnish) ATTENTION! Il y a danger dexplosion sil y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du mre type ou dun type quivalent recommand par le constructeur. Mettre au rebut les batteries usages conformment aux instructions du fabricant. (French) ADVARSEL! Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri. Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten. Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner. (Norwegian)

(Japanese)

!

. (Russian) 94 Notebook PC E-Manual Optical Drive Safety Information Laser Safety Information CD-ROM Drive Safety Warning CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT WARNING! To prevent exposure to the optical drives laser, do not attempt to disassemble or repair the optical drive by yourself. For your safety, contact a professional technician for assistance. Service warning label WARNING! INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN. DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS. CDRH Regulations The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration implemented regulations for laser products on August 2, 1976. These regulations apply to laser products manufactured from August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein or in the laser product installation guide may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Coating Notice IMPORTANT! To provide electrical insulation and maintain electrical safety, a coating is applied to insulate the device except on the areas where the I/O ports are located. 95 Notebook PC E-Manual CTR 21 Approval (for Notebook PC with built-in Modem) Danish Dutch English Finnish French 96 Notebook PC E-Manual German Greek Italian Portuguese Spanish Swedish 97 Notebook PC E-Manual ENERGY STAR complied product ENERGY STAR is a joint program of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and the U.S. Department of Energy helping us all save money and protect the environment through energy efficient products and practices. All ASUS products with the ENERGY STAR logo comply with the ENERGY STAR standard, and the power management feature is enabled by default. The monitor and computer are automatically set to sleep after 10 and 30 minutes of user inactivity. To wake your computer, click the mouse or press any key on the keyboard. Please visit http://www.energystar.gov/powermanagement for detail information on power management and its benefits to the environment. In addition, please visit http://www.energystar.gov for detail information on the ENERGY STAR joint program. NOTE: Energy Star is NOT supported on FreeDOS and Linux-based operating systems. Global Environmental Regulation Compliance and Declaration ASUS follows the green design concept to design and manufacture our products, and makes sure that each stage of the product life cycle of ASUS product is in line with global environmental regulations. In addition, ASUS disclose the relevant information based on regulation requirements. Please refer to http://csr.asus.com/english/Compliance.htm for information disclosure based on regulation requirements ASUS is complied with:

Japan JIS-C-0950 Material Declarations EU REACH SVHC Korea RoHS 98 Notebook PC E-Manual ASUS Recycling/Takeback Services ASUS recycling and takeback programs come from our commitment to the highest standards for protecting our environment. We believe in providing solutions for you to be able to responsibly recycle our products, batteries, other components as well as the packaging materials. Please go to http://csr.asus.com/

english/Takeback.htm for detailed recycling information in different regions. Rechargeable Battery Recycling Service in North America For US and Canada customers, you can call 1-800-822-8837

(toll-free) for recycling information of your ASUS products rechargeable batteries. Regional notice for California WARNING! This product may contain chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects or other reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. Regional notice for Singapore Complies with IDA Standards DB103778 This ASUS product complies with IDA Standards. 99 Notebook PC E-Manual Regional notice for India This product complies with the India E-waste (Management and Handling) Rule 2011 and prohibits use of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls (PBBs) and polybrominated diphenyl ethers (PBDEs) in concentrations exceeding 0.1% by weight in homogenous materials and 0.01% by weight in homogenous materials for cadmium, except for the exemptions listed in Schedule-II of the Rule. Notices for removable batteries Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. The battery and its component must be recycled or disposed of properly. Avis concernant les batteries remplaables La batterie de lordinateur portable peut prsenter un risque dincendie ou de brlure si celle-ci est retire ou dsassemble. La batterie et ses composants doivent tre recycls de faon approprie. 100 Notebook PC E-Manual 101 Notebook PC E-Manual 102 Notebook PC E-Manual

Report No1670212R-SAUSP01V00 Page: 6 of 18 Report No1670212R-SAUSP01V00 Page: 7 of 18 Report No1670212R-SAUSP01V00 Page: 8 of 18 Report No1670212R-SAUSP01V00 Page: 9 of 18 Report No1670212R-SAUSP01V00 Page: 10 of 18 Report No1670212R-SAUSP01V00 Page: 11 of 18 Report No1670212R-SAUSP01V00 Page: 12 of 18 Report No1670212R-SAUSP01V00 Page: 13 of 18 Report No1670212R-SAUSP01V00 Page: 14 of 18 Report No1670212R-SAUSP01V00 Page: 15 of 18 Report No1670212R-SAUSP01V00 Page: 16 of 18 Report No1670212R-SAUSP01V00 TongDa MainAux Antenna Vendor (T-543-3010690-A) ASUS (P/N: 14008-01900500) TongDa MainAux Antenna Vendor (T-543-3010690-A) ASUS (P/N: 14008-01900500) Page: 17 of 18 Report No1670212R-SAUSP01V00 INPAQ MainAux Antenna Vendor (WA-F-LBLB-02-015) ASUS (P/N: 14008-01900400) INPAQ MainAux Antenna Vendor (WA-F-LBLB-02-015) ASUS (P/N: 14008-01900400) Page: 18 of 18

Report No1670200R-SAUSP05V00 Page: 8 of 30 Report No1670200R-SAUSP05V00 Hong Bo MainAux Antenna Vendor (260-26116) ASUS (P/N: 14008-01720200) Page: 9 of 30 Report No1670200R-SAUSP05V00 Hong Bo MainAux Antenna Vendor (260-26116) ASUS (P/N: 14008-01720200) LUXSHARE MainAux Antenna Vendor (LA38LN001-1H) ASUS (P/N: 14008-01720300) Page: 10 of 30 Report No1670200R-SAUSP05V00 LUXSHARE MainAux Antenna Vendor (LA38LN001-1H) ASUS (P/N: 14008-01720300) Page: 11 of 30 Report No1670200R-SAUSP05V00 Page: 12 of 30 Report No1670200R-SAUSP05V00 Page: 13 of 30 Report No1670200R-SAUSP05V00 Page: 14 of 30 Report No1670200R-SAUSP05V00 Page: 15 of 30 Report No1670200R-SAUSP05V00 Page: 16 of 30 Report No1670200R-SAUSP05V00 Page: 17 of 30 Report No1670200R-SAUSP05V00 Page: 18 of 30 Report No1670200R-SAUSP05V00 Page: 19 of 30 Report No1670200R-SAUSP05V00 Page: 20 of 30 Report No1670200R-SAUSP05V00 Page: 21 of 30 Report No1670200R-SAUSP05V00 Page: 22 of 30 Report No1670200R-SAUSP05V00 Page: 23 of 30 Report No1670200R-SAUSP05V00 Page: 24 of 30 Report No1670200R-SAUSP05V00 Page: 25 of 30 Report No1670200R-SAUSP05V00 Page: 26 of 30 Report No1670200R-SAUSP05V00 Page: 27 of 30 Report No1670200R-SAUSP05V00 Page: 28 of 30 Report No1670200R-SAUSP05V00 Page: 29 of 30 Report No1670200R-SAUSP05V00 Page: 30 of 30

EUT Photographs Report No1670212R-SAUSP01V00 Page: 3 of 18 Report No1670212R-SAUSP01V00 Page: 4 of 18 Report No1670212R-SAUSP01V00 Page: 5 of 18

ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. FCC ID Label FCC ID.: MSQ8260NG 4F, No. 150, Li-Te Rd., Peitou, Taipei, Taiwan Tel : +886-2-28943447

ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. FCC ID.: MSQ8260NG FCC ID Label 4F, No. 150, Li-Te Rd., Peitou, Taipei, Taiwan Tel : +886-2-28943447

ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. The FCC ID and DoC Label will be placed on the equipment as shown in the photograph below. FCC ID.: MSQ8260NG 4F, No. 150, Li-Te Rd., Peitou, Taipei, Taiwan Tel : +886-2-28943447 ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. FCC ID.: MSQ8260NG 4F, No. 150, Li-Te Rd., Peitou, Taipei, Taiwan Tel : +886-2-28943447

ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. The FCC ID and DoC Label will be placed on the equipment as shown in the photograph below. FCC ID.: MSQ8260NG 4F, No. 150, Li-Te Rd., Peitou, Taipei, Taiwan Tel : +886-2-28943447

ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. The FCC ID Label will be placed on the equipment as shown in the photograph below. FCC ID.: MSQ8260NG 4F, No. 150, Li-Te Rd., Peitou, Taipei, Taiwan Tel : +886-2-28943447

ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. The FCC ID Label will be placed on the equipment as shown in the photograph below. FCC ID.: MSQ8260NG 4F, No. 150, Li-Te Rd., Peitou, Taipei, Taiwan Tel : +886-2-28943447

ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. The FCC ID Label will be placed on the equipment as shown in the photograph below. FCC ID.: MSQ8260NG 4F, No. 150, Li-Te Rd., Peitou, Taipei, Taiwan Tel : +886-2-28943447

ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. The FCC ID and DoC Label will be placed on the equipment as shown in the photograph below. FCC ID.: MSQ8260NG 4F, No. 150, Li-Te Rd., Peitou, Taipei, Taiwan Tel : +886-2-28943447

ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. The FCC ID and DoC Label will be placed on the equipment as shown in the photograph below. FCC ID.: MSQ8260NG 4F, No. 150, Li-Te Rd., Peitou, Taipei, Taiwan Tel : +886-2-28943447

ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. The FCC ID and DoC Label will be placed on the equipment as shown in the photograph below. FCC ID.: MSQ8260NG 4F, No. 150, Li-Te Rd., Peitou, Taipei, Taiwan Tel : +886-2-28943447 ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. FCC ID.: MSQ8260NG 4F, No. 150, Li-Te Rd., Peitou, Taipei, Taiwan Tel : +886-2-28943447

ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. FCC ID.: MSQ8260NG FCC ID Label 4F, No. 150, Li-Te Rd., Peitou, Taipei, Taiwan Tel : +886-2-28943447

ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. The FCC ID Label will be placed on the equipment as shown in the photograph below. FCC ID.: MSQ8260NG 4F, No. 150, Li-Te Rd., Peitou, Taipei, Taiwan Tel : +886-2-28943447

ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. FCC ID.: MSQ8260NG Federal Communications Commission Aug. 30, 2016 Authorization and Evaluation Division ATTESTATION FCC ID: MSQ8260NG Product: Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 7265 Model: 8260NGW We dont provide any controls or software to allow operation outside the USA frequency band when we sell a product bearing the FCC ID: MSQ8260NG in USA. Sincerely, Associate Vice President

[PUTER INC. 4F, No. 150, Li-Te Rd., Peitou, Taipei, Taiwan Tel : +886-2-28943447

ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. Declaration of Product Modifications Aug. 30, 2016 This is to request a Class II permissive change for FCC ID: MSQ8260NG, originally granted on 05/23/2016(NII of New rule) and 01/27/2016(DTS,DSS). The major change filed under this application is:

Change #1: Additional Chassis added, ASUSTeK, model number : UX330U, U3100, U330U, U3000U. lu3100 _| All models are electrically identical, different

| u330U__| model names are for marketing purpose. U3000U

#2: Reduce the Output Power through firmware, and SAR measurement were evaluated.

(only reduce Wi-Fi Output Power, Bluetooth Output Power haven't changes).

#3: Addition two antennas, the antenna type is same, the antenna gain is lower than the original application. Sincerely, ssociate Vice President ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. Teli +886-2-28943447 Fax: +886-2-28987364 Email: jackson_yen@asus.com -

ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. FCC ID.: MSQ8260NG ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. 4F, No. 150, Li-Te Rd., Peitou, Taipei, Taiwan Tel : +886-2-28943447 Fax: +886-2-28987364 Federal Communications Commission Aug. 30, 2016 Authorization and Evaluation Division Confidentiality Request Pursuant to Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the Commissions Rules, the Applicant Hereby requests confidential treatment of information accompanying this Application As outlined below:

Schematics : (8260NGW) Schem.pdf Block Diagram : (8260NGW) BlkDia.pdf Operational Description : (8260NGW) OPDes.pdf The above materials contain trade secrets and proprietary information not customarily Released to the public. The public disclosure of these matters might be harmful to the Applicant and provide unjustified benefits to its competitors. The Applicant understands that pursuant to Rule 0.457, disclosure of this Application and all accompanying documentation will not be made before the date of the Grant for this application. Sincerely, V aks ww Jackson Yen / Asgociate Vice President ASU$TeK COMPUTER INC. 4F, No. 150, Li-Te Rd., Peitou, Taipei, Taiwan Tel : +886-2-28943447

ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. AF, No. 150, Li-Te Rd., Peitou, Taipei, Taiwan TEL No: +886-2-28943447 FAX No: +886-2-28987364 DTS-UNII Device Declaration Letter To whom it may concern:

We have declared below featured for FCC equipment authorization, Device FCC ID: MSQ8260NG

(1) DFS Device -- [1] Master, [J Client with Radar detection capability , EX] Client without radar detection capability, 1] N/A Date: Aug. 30 ,2016

(2) Active / Passive Scanning , adhoc mode access point capability Frequency Band Active Scanning passive scanning Ad Hoc Mode Access point

(MHz} (the device can (where the device or WIFI Direct capability transmit a probe is can listen only capability

{beacon)) with no probes) 2412-2467 Li Yes, Xj No Xx] Yes, LJ No Xl Yes, LINo | L1 Yes, Xd No 2422-2457 [_] Yes , XI No i] Yes , L] No Xl Yes, LINo | L] Yes , KI No 5180-5240 L] Yes , XI No KX Yes, L] No Yes , Xx] No | [] Yes, X] No 5260-5320 L] Yes , XI No KX Yes , L] No L] Yes, XINo | LJ Yes, KINo |

5500-5700 CL] Yes , XJ No XX Yes, LI No [] Yes, No | [] Yes, K] No 5745-5825 Ll] Yes, X) No KX] Yes , [J No Yes, X] No | LJ Yes, XI No 5190-5230 Yes , DQ No Bd Yes , L} No Yes, J No | [1 Yes, J No 5270-5310 L] Yes, X] No XlYes, L] No Yes , XJ No | LJ Yes, XI No 5510-5670 C1 Yes , XI No Xl Yes, L] No LJ Yes , XINo | L] Yes, Ki No 5755-5795 L] Yes , XI No Kl Yes , L] No L1 Yes, XINo | L] Yes, KX] No 5720 (Yes , XI No kl Yes , L] No C1 Yes, XINo [| [] Yes, Xi No 5710 Yes , X] No KX Yes [1 No LJ Yes , X] No 5210 L] Yes , X] No | Yes , L] No [1 Yes, XINo 5290 LJ Yes , KX] No Xi Yes, [] No LJ Yes , XJ No 5530-5690 LI Yes, X] No Et Yes, [] No LYes , XINo 5775 ] Yes , KX] No Kl Yes, L] No LU Yes , XJ No This information when programmed into the EEPROM will not be accessible and can not be changed by the end user. If you have any questions please do not hesitate to contact us. Signature, JS Jackson/Yen / Ass ASUSTK COMP R INC. Email: jackson_yen@asus.com ate Vice President

RF_160, Issue 03 ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. Declaration of Authorization We Name: ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. Address: 4F, No. 150, Li-Te Rd., Peitou, Taipei, Taiwan City: Peitou, Taipei Country: Taiwan Declare that:

Name Representative of agent: Vincent Lin Agent Company name: QuieTek Corp. Address: No.5-22, Ruishukeng, Linkou Dist., New Taipei City 24451, Taiwan, R.O.C. City: New Taipei City Country Taiwan, R.O.C. is authorized to apply for Certification of the following product(s):

Product description: Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 8260 FCC ID: MSQ8260NG Trademark: Intel on our behalf. Date: 2016/08/30 City: Peitou, Taipei Name: Jackson Yen Function: Associate Vice President V Signature:

Notes:

(1): Required for FCC application

(2): For FCC it must be the Grantee Code owner or the authorized agent.

ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. AF, No. 150, Li-Te Rd., Peitou, Taipei, Taiwan TEL No.: +886-2-28943447 FAX No.: +886-2-28987364 Attestation for FCC Declaration of Conformity FCC ID: MSQ8260NG Date: Aug. 30, 2016 Please be notified that we, the undersigned, ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC., declares that the product which bears the above FCC ID is also compliant with the FCC requirements for DoC. The test report number supporting the DoC is 1670212R-ITUSP01V00 Testing in regards to this report was done by QuieTek Corporation, located at 2F, No.345, Xinhu 2nd Rd., Neihu District,, Taipei Taiwan, which has been accredited in accordance to all of the requirements of 47CFR 2.948 (d) and (e) of the FCC rules and KDB349827. Sincerely, ASUSTjkK COMPUTER INC. Tel: +886-2-28943447 Fax: +886-2-28987364 Email: jackson_yen@asus.com

ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. FCC ID.: M ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. 4F, No. 150, Li-Te Rd., Peitou, Taipei, Taiwan Tel : +886-2-28943447 Fax: +886-2-28987364 Federal Communications Commission Aug. 31, Authorization and Evaluation Division Confidentiality Request Pursuant to Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the Commissions Rules, the Applicant Hereby requests confidential treatment of information accompanying this Applic Schematics : (8260NGW) Schem.pdf Block Diagram : (8260NGW) BlkDia.pdf Operational Description : (8260NGW) OPDes.pdf The above materials contain trade secrets and proprietary information not custom Released to the public. The public disclosure of these matters might be harmful t Applicant and provide unjustified benefits to its competitors. The Applicant understands that pursuant to Rule 0.457, disclosure of this Applic:

and all accompanying documentation will not be made before the date of the Gra this application. Sincerely, 4F, No. 150, Li-Te Rd., Peitou, Taipei, Taiwan Tel : +886-2-28943447 SQ8260NG 2016 ation arily

> the ition nt for

ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. FCC ID.: MSQ8260NG Federal Communications Commission Jul. 28, 2016 Authorization and Evaluation Division ATTESTATION FCC ID: MSQ8260NG Product: Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 8260 Model: 8260NGW We dont provide any controls or software to allow operation outside the USA frequency band when we sell a product bearing the FCC ID: MSQ8260NG in USA. Sincerely, sociate Vice President UTER INC. 4F, No. 150, Li-Te Rd., Peitou, Taipei, Taiwan Tel : +886-2-28943447

ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. 4F, No. 150, Li-Te Rd., Peitou, Taipei, Taiwan TEL No.: +886-2-28943447 FAX No.: +886-2-28987364 Attestation for FCC Declaration of Conformity FCC ID: MSQ8260NG Date: Jul. 28, 2016 Please be notified that we, the undersigned, ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC., declares that the product which bears the above FCC ID is also compliant with the FCC requirements for DoC. The test report number supporting the DoC is 1660445R-ITUSP01V00 Testing in regards to this report was done by QuieTek Corporation, located at 2F, No.345, Xinhu 2nd Rd., Neihu District,, Taipei Taiwan, which has been accredited in accordance to all of the requirements of 47CFR 2.948 (d) and (e) of the FCC rules and KDB349827. Sincerely,

Jackson Yen / Associate Vice President ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. Tel: +886-2-28943447 Fax: +886-2-28987364 Email: jackson_yen@asus.com

THIS MUST BE SIGNED BY THE APPLICANT AND SHOULD BE PLACED ON APPLICANTS LETTERHEAD ONLY IF AGENT IS SUBMITTING APPLICATION Authority to Act as Agent Date: 24 day of May, 2016 American Certification Body, Inc. 6731 Whittier Avenue Suite C110 McLean, VA 22101 To Whom It May Concern:

uieTek Corporation is authorized to act on our behalf, until otherwise notified, for applications to American Certification Body, Inc. (ACB). We certify that we are not subject to denial of federal benefits, that includes FCC benefits, pursuant to Section 5301 of the Anti-Drug Abuse Act of 1988, 21 U.S.C. 862. Further, no party, as defined in 47 CFR 1.2002 (b), to the application is subject to denial of federal benefits, that includes FCC benefits. Thank you, Agency Agreement Expiration Date:

By: (YIU | Jackson Yen

(Signature) Ll (Print name) Title: Asg f - President On behalf of: ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC.

(Company Name) Telephone: +886-2-28943447

'_ Must be signed by applicant contact given for applicant on the FCC site, or by the authorized agent if an appropriate authorized agent letter has been provided. Letters should be placed on appropriate letterhead. 020415 08

ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. Declaration of Product Modifications May 26, 2016 This is to request a Class II permissive change for FCC ID: MSQ8260NG

, granted on 03/15/2016. The major change filed under this application is:

The Band 1, Band 2a, Band 2c and Band 3 previously authorized under Old Rules,a Class II permissive change filing to demonstrate compliance with the New Rules, all other hardware and output power is identical with original granted. This change is for a device previously granted under rule parts of 15.247( Band 3) and is now applying for approval under 15.407(b)(4)(ii) for devices with antenna gains less than 10dBi with no changes to hardware or output power. Sincerely,

Jackson Yen / Associate Vice President ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. Tel: +886-2-28943447 Fax: +886-2-28987364 Email: jackson_yen@asus.com

RF_160, Issue 03 ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. Declaration of Authorization We Name: ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. Address: 4F, No. 150, Li-Te Rd., Peitou, Taipei, Taiwan -

City: Taipei Country: Taiwan Declare that:

Name Representative of agent: Vincent Lin Agent Company name: QuieTek Corp. Address: No. 5-22, Ruishukeng, Linkou Dist., 24451, City: New Taipei City Country Taiwan. R.O.C. is authorized to apply for Certification of the following product(s):

Product description: Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 8260 FCC ID: 8260NGW Trademark: Intel on our behalf. Date: May 24, 2016 City: Peitou, Taipei Name: Jackson Yen. Function: Associate Vice President Signature:

Notes:

(1): Required for FCC application

(2): For FCC it must be the Grantee Code owner or the authorized agent.

THIS MUST BE SIGNED BY THE APPLICANT/AGENT AND SHOULD BE PLACED ON APPROPRIATE LETTERHEAD Request for Confidentiality Date: 24 day of May, 2016 Subject: Confidentiality Request for: FCC ID: MSQ8260NG Pursuant to FCC 47 CRF 0.457(d) and 0.459 and IC RSP-100, Section 6.4, the applicant requests that a part of the subject FCC application be held confidential. Type of Confidentiality Requested Exhibit

(Short Term (J Permanent Block Diagrams L] Short Term External Photos

[_] Short Term (J Permanent** Internal Photos LJ Short Term Permanent Operation Description/Theory of Operation

(J Short Term [_] Permanent Parts List & Placement/BOM

[] Short Term (J Permanent Tune-Up Procedure LJ Short Term [-] Permanent Schematics

[] Short Term Test Setup Photos

(J Short Term (1 Permanent** Users Manual

(2 Short Term EX] Permanent* Software Security Description ASUSTeK Computer Inc. has spent substantial effort in developing this product and it is one of the first of its kind in industry. Having the subject information easily available to "competition" would negate the advantage they have achieved by developing this product. Not protecting the details of the design will result in financial hardship. Permanent Confidentiality:

The applicant requests the exhibits listed above as permanently confidential be permanently withheld from public review due to materials that contain trade secrets and proprietary information not customarily released to the public. Short-Term Confidentiality:

The applicant requests the exhibits selected above as short term confidential be withheld from public view for a period of 180 days from the date of the Grant of Equipment Authorization and prior to marketing. This is to avoid premature release of sensitive information prior to marketing or release of the product to the public. Applicant is also aware that they are responsible to notify ACB in the event information regarding the product or the product is made available to the public. ACB will then release the documents listed above for public disclosure pursuant to FCC Public Notice DA 04-1705. NOTE for Industry Canada Applications:

IC currently only distinguishes Permanent Confidentiality exhibits as shown above. Short Term confidentiality is not considered applicable to IC applications. Sincerely, By: Jackson Yen

(Print name)

- The asterisked items (*) require further information to be provided to ACB before permanent confidentiality will be extended to these exhibits. Please refer to FCC KDB 726920 and the specific Document link for D01 found at:

https://apps.fec.gow/oetcf/kdb/forms/FTSSearchResultPage.cfm?switch=P&id=41731 and review section V regarding EXCEPTIONAL CIRCUMSTANCES. As of the October 2014 version of this document, TCBs can not authorize these requests. The applicant should petition the FCC by submitting an inquiry as directed. A copy of this inquiry and the FCCs response must be provided with the application. 3. Must be signed by applicant contact given for applicant on the FCC site. or by the authorized agent if an appropriate authorized agent letter has been provided. Letters should be placed on appropriate letterhead. 020415 - 08

ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. Declaration of Product Modifications Apr. 27, 2016 This is to request a Class II permissive change for FCC ID: MSQ8260NG originally granted on 01/27/2016. The major change filed under this application is:

Change #1: Frequency band 3 was previously authorized for this device under section 15.247 of the rules, this permissive change demonstrates compliance with new UNII rules for this same frequency band under section 15.407. This Change is according to KDB 926956 D01 U-NII Transition Plan v01r05. The minimum test requirements for Class II permissive change is according Answer of Question 16 section c)3) requirements. Change #2: The Band 1, Band 2a and Band 2c previously authorized under "Old Rules, a Class II permissive change filing to demonstrate compliance with the New Rules, all others hardware is identical with original granted.

ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. Declaration of Product Modifications Mar. 10, 2016 This is to request a Class I! permissive change for FCC ID: MSQ8260NG

, originally granted on 01/27/2016. The major change filed under this application is:

Change #1: Additional Chassis added, ASUSTeK, model number : UX360C notebook/tablet.

#2: Reduce the Output Power through firmware, and SAR measurement were evaluated.

(only reduce Wi-Fi 5GHz Band Power, Wi-Fi 2.4GHz Band and Bluetooth power haven't changes).

#3: Addition two antennas, the antenna type is same, the antenria gain is lower than original application, the antennas are lised as below:

PIFA__|LA81RF001-1H (Main)(Aux)

[2_[Hong Lin PIFA 260-26090 (Main)(Aux) Sincerely, Jackson Yen / Associate Vice President ASUSTeK C UTER INC. Tel: +886-2-28943447 Fax: +886-2-28987364 Email: jackson_yen@asus.com

ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. FCC ID.: 8260NGW Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division Feb. 05, 2016 Confidential Statement We have understood that the following request for confidential documents has been and viewable since the date of grant, since it has been granted. Confidentiality Request Pursuant to Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the Commissions Rules, the Applicant Hereby requests confidential treatment of information accompanying this Application As outlined below:

Schematics : (8260NGW) BlkDia Block Diagram: (8260NGW) Schem Above mentioned document contains detailed system and equipment description are considered as proprietary information in operation of the equipment. The public disclosure of above documents might be harmful to our company and would give competitor an unfair advantage in the market. In additional to above mentioned documents, pursuant to Public Notice DA 04-1705 of the Commissions policy, in order to comply with the marketing regulations in 47 DFR 2.803 and the importation rules in 47 CFR 2.1204, while ensuring that business sensitive information remains confidential until the actual marketing of newly authorized divices. We are requesting the commission to grant short-thrm confidentiality request for 180 days on the following attachments:

External Photos: (8260NGW) Expho Internal Photos: (8260NGW) Inpho Test Setup Photos: (8260NGW) Tsup User Manual: (8260NGW) UserMan It is our understanding that all measurement test reports, FCC ID label format and correspondent during certification review process cannot be granted as confidential documents and those information will be available for public review once the grant of equipment authorization is issued:

Sincerely, 4F, No. 150, Li-Te Rd., Peitou, Taipei, Taiwan Tel: +886-2-28943447

RF_ 160, Issue 03 ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC, Declaration of Authorization We Name: ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. Address: 4F, No. 150, Li-Te Rd., Peitou, Taipei, Taiwan City: Peitou, Taipei Country: Taiwan Declare that:

Name Representative of agent: Vincent Lin Agent Company name: QuieTek Corp. Address: No.5-22, Ruishukeng, Linkou Dist., New Taipei City 24451, Taiwan, R.O.C. City: New Taipei City Country Taiwan, R.O.C. is authorized to apply for Certification of the following product(s):

Product description: Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 8260 FCC ID: 8260NGW Trademark: Intel on our behalf. Date: 2016/02/19 City: Peitou, Taipei Name: Jackson Yen @) Function: Associate Vice President Signature:

Notes:

(1): Required for FCC application

(2): For FCC it must be the Grantee Code owner or the authorized agent. FCC ID: MSQ8260NG

Asus Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, Maryland 21046 USA Subject: Declaration of Changing ID, FCC ID: PD98260NG Date: Jan. 20%, 2016 To Whom It May Concern, We, ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC., would like to precede a change ID project. Original application information:

Company name: Intel Mobile Communications FCC ID: PD98260NG Product name: Intel Dual Band Wireless-AC 8260 Model name: 8260NGW Original issued date: Aug. 13%, 2015 We would like to market the above referenced product under our FCC ID:

MSQ8260NG and part no. is 8260NGW. All other hardware and software is identical with original granted. This application has been authorized by Inte! Mobile Communications. We would like to declare that MSQ8260NG is electrically identical and the only changed is the label on the device. The original test results continue to be representative of and applicable to the changed equipment. Sincerely, boy Jackson Yn, Associate Vice President, on behalf of ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC.

Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, Maryland 21046 USA Re: Change of Identification Authorization, FCC ID: PD98260NG Date: January 5, 2016 To Whom It May Concern:

This letter grants authorization for representatives of ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. to apply to the FCC for a change in identification as specified under 47CFR2.933 of the FCC rules. This authorization applies to the Intel Corporation, Intel Wireless 8260, 802.11a/b/g/n/ac+ BT M.2 form factor, model: 8260NGW, FCC ID: PD98260NG. We are aware that ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. intends to market the above referenced product under their FCC ID:

MSQ8260NG, part number 8260NGW. Sincerely, Date: January 5, 2016 Steven C. Hackett Product Regulations Engineer iCDG Regulatory Engineering steven.c.hackett@intel.com Intel Mobile Communications 100 Center Point Circle, Suite 200 Columbia, South Carolina 29210 USA